Giao an

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (3.01 MB, 304 trang )

(1)Period :01 Week : 01. Preparing date: 19/8/2012 Teaching date: 20/8/2012 REVISION. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson students will be able to: - Practice some phrases about classroom managements used during the years. - Revise the grammar points and structures that Ss learned in grade 7. - Have a good foundation for studying English of class 8. - Have good attitude in learning English. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: Review 2. Grammar: + Personal Information + Verb Form + Question Words + Comparison 3. Language skills: Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing C/ Techniques: Slap the board, Question-Answer, Transformation, Pair work, Group work, Individually, Fill gap,… D/ Teaching aids: Textbook, workbook, chalk, board, worksheet,… E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 m) 2. Check up: (No) 3. New lesson:( 44 ms) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up (5 ms) - Get Ss to play the game “Slap the board” to review vocabulary about school subjects + Math + Technology + Physics + Biology + Chemistry + English + Literature + Music + History + Fine Art + Geography + Physical + Education + Civic Education -Correct mistake(s) if necessary -Read the words -Correct mistake(s) in their pronunciation if necessary -Get Ss to practice asking and answering about personal information * New lesson (1 m) - Introduce the new lesson. Activity 1 (6 ms) * Guided points: + Name + Telephone number + Age + Favorite subject + Address + After school activities -go around the class to check Ss’activities and offer help -give correction if necessary (1). - Divided into 2 teams and play the game with the teacher’s guide -Repeat in chorus -Read the individually - Practice in pairs - present their before the class. - Take notes. words. work.

(2) Activity 2 (8 ms) - Hang the prepared exercise on the board and get Ss to complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. I always (study)………………English at night, but he always (study)………………English in the early afternoon. 2.Now Mr. Nam (read)……………a newspaper and his children(watch)……………………TV. 3. Yesterday Nga (go)…………….to school by bike, but I (walk)………………..to school. 4. Viet Nam (be)………………an industrial country in 2020. 5. Let’s (sing)………….a song. 6. He’d like (have)……………..a cup of tea. -Correct mistake(s) if necessary (remind the verb form to Ss) *Key: 1. study – studies 2. is reading – are watching 3. went – walked 4. will be 5. sing 6. to have Activity 3 (6 ms ) -Get Ss to fill the gaps with suitable question words 1.…………is she from? – She’s from America. 2. …………is your family name? – It’s Tran. 3. ……often do you have English? - Three times a week. 4. ………….is that? – It’s me, Hanh. 5. …………are you so happy? - Because I got good marks. 6. …………rooms are there? - 20. 7. ………..is that pen? - 1,500 dong. -Go around the class to check Ss’ work and offer help -Correct mistake(s) if necessary *Key: 1-Where; 2-What; 3-How; 4-Who 5-Why; 6-How many; 7-How much Activity 4 (5 ms) Prepare the table : Adj Comparative Superlative Good better ………………………… Cheap ………………… ………………………… Popular ………………… ………………………… Small smaller ………………………… Careful ………………… ………………………… Many ………………… The most -Get Ss to complete the table with the correct form of the given adjectives -Give necessary correction (2). - Complete the sentences Paiwork Compare with other pair. Copy down. -Find the suitable question word and fill in each gap to complete the sentence (Group work) -Compare with other groups. -Present before the class. -Look at the table on the board. - Complete the table/ write the words on the board individually.

(3) -Ask Ss to read the words -Give sentences and get Ss to complete the sentences with the correct form of the adjectives in the brackets. 1. Nga’s house is……………. Lan’s house is……….Nga’s house. Minh’s house is the ……………..(small) 2. Mr. Nam drives………………….Mr. Minh.(careful) 3. This hat is…………….that one. (good) -Correct mistake(s) if necessary *Key: 1. small – smaller – smallest 2. more carefully 3. better Activity 5 (10 ms) - Ask Ss to remember some classroom managements *Some classroom managements + work in pairs + work in groups + stand up + sit down + open your books + close your books + listen to me + keep silent + don’t talk - Guide Ss to reread the words above. - Brief- introduce English 8. * Presenting the English Grade 8 - There are 16 units in this program , each unit has 6 parts Which mention a particular skill such as Listening . Speaking , Reading and Writing + At the beginning of the unit is “ Getting started “ to lead in the new lesson or in order to warm up . -Each unit has Language Focus which help Ss to summarize basic knowledge they have learnt in each one . Introduce some books , reference books to students Consolidation (2 ms) - Summarize the lesson: + Give some advice to Ss + summarize the lesson (remind what Ss are weak) Homework: (1 m) - Review: Verb form, Question words, Comparison - Prepare unit 1: Getting Started & Listen and read. F/ Self- Evaluation:. (3). -Read the words -Complete the sentences individually -Compare with their friends -Present before the class. - Listen and remember. - Repeat and read. - Listen carefully.. Pay attention. - Listen and remember.. - Prepair the next lesson.

(4) Period :02 Week : 01. Preparing date: 20/8/2012 Teaching date: 21/8/2012 UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson students will be able to: - talk about favorite activities - introduce people - describe people (appearance) B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (v) seem, receive, look like, smile (n) smile 2. Grammar: * Simple tenses * (not) adjective + enough + to-infinitive 3. Language skills: Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing C/ Techniques: Question-Answer, Presentation picture, Picture drill, Brainstorming, Presentation dialogue, Dialogue drill, Play role, Mime,… D/ Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, tape, cassette player, chalk, board, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1 m) 2. Check up: (No) 3. New lesson ( 44 ms) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up (6 ms) 1. GETTING STARTED 1. What do you like doing in your free time? 2. Do you like watching TV? - Get Ss to look at the four pictures in the textbook and say what the people in the pictures like doing * Guiding questions: What are they doing?/ When do they play soccer?... - Correct mistake(s) if necessary * Key: a/ They like playing soccer in their free time. b/ These girls like studying together. c/ The boys like playing chess. d/ These students like playing volleyball. New lesson (1 m) - Introduce the new lesson. 2. LISTEN AND READ Presentation (8 ms) - Show the picture of Hoa and Nien on the board and get Ss to identify the people in the picture (Who are these?) - Introduce about the dialogue between Hoa and Lan - Supply the new words + seem (v): (Mime + Example) (4). - Answer the teacher’s questions (Individually + Whole class) - Look at the four pictures in the textbook and say what the people in the pictures like doing (Pair work) - Present before the class - copy down. - Look at the picture and identify the girls in the picture - Listen to the teacher’s introduction - Guess the meanings of the words with the teacher’s explanation. - Take notes.

(5) + seem + adj e.g: Hoa seems happy today. + receive s.t from s.o (v) = get s.t from s.o (Mime) S + be (not) + adj +enought + to-infi + look like (v): (Example) + What does he/ she look like? (Picture) + smile (v)- (n): (Mime) -Play game +enough (adv):(Example +Picture) e.g: My daughter is only 5. She is not old enough to be in class 1. + What .......N! - Read the words and sentences - Correct mistake(s) in their pronunciation if necessary - Get Ss to play the game “Rub out and remember” Practice (20 ms) 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner: - Play the tape two times - Look at the book and listen - Play the tape one more - Repeat in chorus - Get Ss to practice the dialogue with a partner - Practice the dialogue in pairs. - Go around the class to check Ss’work and offer help - Practice the dialogue before the - Ask three pairs to read the dialogue aloud. class (3 pairs) - Correct mistake(s) in their pronunciation 2. Answer the following the questions: - Pay attention and take notes. - Make sure Ss to understand the content of questions in Exercise 2 - Read the dialogue and answer. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the -Compare the answers with a questions. friend - As Ss to share the answers with a friend. - Call on Some pairs to show their work. - Present before the class - Give necessary correction * Key: a/ Nien lives in Hue. - Copy down b/ No, she doesn’t. c/ It’s “She wasn’t old enough to be in my class”. d/ She’s going to visit Hoa at Christmas. Production (6 ms) - Work in groups *MIND-MAPPING Old enough Nien Christmas - Show their work. Lovely smile Hue Beautiful 12 - listen and remember Next- door neighbor - Ask Ss to write the sentences using the structures in lesson to talk about Nien in groups. - Go around and help if necessary. - Call some Ss from some groups to read their sentences - Correct. (5).

(6) Consolidation (2 ms) - Summarize the lesson: + Give some advice to Ss - Listen and remember. + Summarize the lesson (remind what Ss are weak) Homework: (1 m) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Do exercises at home - Practice reading the dialogue and translate it into Vietnamese. - Prepare unit 1: Speak and listen. F/ Self- Evaluation:. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Period :03 Week :01 :. Preparing date: 23/8/2012 Teaching date: 24/8/2012 UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS Lesson 2: Speak and Listen (6).

(7) A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson students will be able to: - Describe people’s appearance (Build and hair) - Guess people by description - Introduce and greet people - Have a good look on other people. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: * Build: tall, short, small, big, thin, fat, slim, and slender * Hair: long, short, straight, curly, bald, black, dark, blond, fair, brown 2.Grammar: * Simple tenses * Attributive and predicative 3.Language skills: Speaking, Listening , Reading and Writing C/ Techniques: Question-Answer, Presentation picture, Picture drill, Brainstorming, Presentation dialogue, Dialogue drill, Play role, Mime, Build dialogue, Guessing game, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, tape, cassette player, chalk, board, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1m) 2. Check up(5ms) :Call 2 pairs Ss to read the dialogue on p 10 and write structures related 3. New lesson :( 39 ms ) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up (2 ms) - Divide Ss into three groups to draw a person in one minute - Introduce the aim the lesson by using three pictures New lesson (1 m) - Introduce the new lesson. A/ SPEAK ING Presentation (6 ms) - Ask Ss to look at six pictures on page 11, 12 and guess their appearance. - Describe people’s appearance * Build: + small (a) >< big (a) + tall (a) >< short (a) + thin (a) >< fat (a) + slim (a) = slender (a) S + be + adj (build) e.g: Hoa is tall. * Hair: + long (a) >< short (a) + straight (a) (Mime) + curly (a) (Picture) + black/ dark (a) + blond/ fair (a) + bald (a): (7). - Play in groups. - Listen - Listen. - Look at the pictures and guess. - Pay attention - Copy down.. - Practice reading. - Do as T' guide.

(8) (Picture) S + have/ has + adj (k.t) + adj (h.d) + adj (m.s) +hair e.g: Hoa has long straight black hair. - Help Ss read the new words and understand the structures. - Show the picture of Mary and read the description in Speak1 - Help Ss understand the guessing game. Practice (6 ms) * Guessing game: - Hang the pictures of six people (Van, Mr. Lai, Miss Lien, Ann, Mr. Khoi and Mary) on the board - Describe one of six people Eg: - This person is tall and rather fat. He has very short black hair. Who is he?  Yes. He is Mr. Khoi. - Get Ss to describe to play the game “guessing people” in groups - Go around the class to check Ss’work and offer help - Check Ss' work - Give remarks and correct mistake(s) if necessary B/ LISTENING - Ask Ss to answer: “What do you say when you greet the other? / introduce a person to another?” Pre- Listening ( 4 ms) - Help Ss revise the ways of introduce people and responding to the introduction 1. Introduce people: +This is (Nam)/I’d like you to meet(Nam)/Come and meet (Nam) 2. Respond to the introduction: + Nice to meet you / It’s a pleasure to meet you/ How do you do. - Introduce what Ss are going to listen - Help Ss read the expressions in the box - Let Ss read the open dialogues quickly and guess what are in the blanks While- Listening ( 8 ms) - Play the tape two times with a small dialogue. - Ask Ss to give answers. - Correct mistake(s) if necessary by letting Ss listen to each dialogue again and pausing at what is necessary * Key: (1) I’d like you to meet (2) Nice to meet you (3) I’d like you to meet (4) It’s a pleasure to meet you (5) come to meet (6) How do you do (8). - Listen.. - Look at the pictures - Listen. - Work in groups. - Representative from each group gives the appearance. - Remind remember. what. they. - Take notes -Listen to the teacher’s introduction. - Repeat in chorus - Read the expressions in the box - Read the open dialogues quickly and guess what are in the blanks. - Listen and complete the dialogues. - Give answers - Listen again and check the answers - Practice the dialogues aloud. - Work in pairs: introduce.

(9) - Get Ss to practice the dialogues and respond. - Correct mistake(s) in their pronunciation if necessa Post- Listening ( 4 ms) - Get Ss to introduce their friends to others and give - Listen and remember responds - Help if necessary. Consolidation (2 ms) - Do exercises at home - Summarize the lesson + Give some advice to Ss + Summarize the lesson (remind what Ss are weak). Homework: (1 m) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Prepair for next lesson Unit 1: Read F/ Self- Evaluation:. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Period :04 Week : 02. Preparing date: 27/8/2012 Teaching date: 28/8/2012 UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS Lesson 3: Read. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson students will be able to: - Talk about oneself and other people (9).

(10) - Talk about one’s characters and favorite/ like - Develop their reading skills - Know how to love others. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n) character, orphanage, peace, joke (a) lucky, sociable, generous, reserved, outgoing (v) Annoy, do (volunteer work) (conj) although 2.Grammar: * Simple tenses * like/ enjoy + V-ing * “Although” 3.Language skills: Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing C/ Techniques: Dialogue build, Picture presentation, Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Multiple choice, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, tape, cassette player, chalk, board, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1m) 2. Check up(5ms) : - Call 2 Ss to: + describe their mother and father + give introduction and respond. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. Warm-up (2 ms) * Chatting: - Ask Ss some questions. 1/ Do you have many friends? 2/ How many close friends do you have? 3/ What do they look like? 4/ What are they like ? 5/ What do they enjoy doing in their free time? New lesson (1 m) - Introduce the new lesson. Pre- Reading ( 10 ms) - Introduce the text in which Ba is talking about his close friends - Supply the new words + lucky (a): may mắn (Explanation) + character (n):tính cách (Translation) + sociable (a) = outgoing (a) = friendly and cheerful with other people : hòa đồng, dễ gần + generous (a) = give freely, noble  generously (adv): hào phóng + extremely (adv): very (high) : rất, cực kỳ + volunteer work (n): công việc tình nguyện (Ex)do volunteer work + orphan (n): a child whose parents are dead: trẻ mồ côi + orphanage (n):a home for orphans : trại trẻ mồ côi (10). - Answer the questions.. - Listen - Listen - Pay attention - Guess the meaning and take notes. - Listen and repeat in chorus.

(11) + reserved (a) = don’t talk much in public: dè dặt, kín đáo + peace (n): yên tinh(Translation) + joke (n) + a story with a funny ending  tell a joke (v) + sense of humor (n): (Ex) + annoy(v) = cause trouble or discomfort: + although (conj): mặc dù (Trans) e.g: Although it rained heavily, I went to class on time. -Help Ss read the words -Correct mistake(s) in their pronunciation if necessary - Play the tape two times While- Reading ( 15 ms) 1. Choose the best answer and write. page 14 ( Multiple choice) - Get Ss to read the text in silence and choose the best answers - Go around the class to check Ss’work and offer help - Give necessary correction * Key: a-A. b-C c-A. d-D. 2. Now answer the questions. (Questions and answers) - Make sure Ss to understand meaning of the questions - Ask Ss to read the text again and find the answers for the questions - Go around the class to check Ss’work and offer help - Call some pairs Ss to ask and answer the questions loudly. - Give necessary correction *Key: a/ He feels lucky having a lot of friends. b/ Bao is the most sociable.c/ Khai likes reading. d/ A bad thing about Ba’s jokes is that sometimes his jokes annoy his friends. e/ Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at a local orphanage. f/ (Students’answers) Post- Reading ( 7 ms) - Get Ss to talk about their close friends (name, age, class, appearance, characters, favorite activities) -Give necessary correction (encourage Ss to speak in front of the class) Consolidation (2 ms) - Summarize the lesson:+ Give some advice to Ss + Summarize the lesson (remind what Ss are weak) Homework: (1 m) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Translate the text into Vietnamese.- Prepare unit 1: Write. (11). Read the individually. words. - Copy down - Read the text and choose one choice - Give the answer and explain. - Pay attention. - Read the text and find the answers for questions. - Ask and answer aloud.. - Take notes. - Talk about their close friends with the teacher’s guide - Show their work - Listen and remember.. - Do exercises at home.

(12) F/ Self- Evaluation:. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Period :05 Week : 02. Preparing date: 27/8/2012 Teaching date: 29/8/2012 UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS Lesson 4: Write. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson students will be able to: - Write about oneself and about other people - Talk about oneself and other people - Know how to write the personal information briefly - Develop their writing skills - Know how to take care of other people. (12).

(13) B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: Review vocabulary for appearance and characters (a) Humorous, Helpful 2. Grammar: * Simple tenses 3. Language skills: Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Survey, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, chalk, board, E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1m) 2. Check up: (5ms) - Call 2 Ss to read the text aloud and write some new words. 3. New lesson :( 39 ms ) Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. Warm-up (3 ms) * Brainstorming: - Play game build. hair. - Ask Ss to give adjectives related to " build and hair" New lesson (1 m) - Introduce the new lesson. Pre- writing( 10 ms) - Introduce the aims of this part (write personal information about your friends) - Introduce new words: + Humorous (a): hài hước (trans) + Helpful (a): tốt bụng ( exp) - Get Ss to read the information about Tam - Ask some questions about Tam to check her reading comprehension 1/ What’s his name? 2/ How old is he? 3/ What does he look like? 4/ What is he like? (Characters) 5/ Where does he live? 6/ Who does he live with? 7/ How many best friends does he have? Who are they? - Get Ss to read the paragraph about Le Van Tam (13). - Write adjectives on the board. - Listen - Listen to T’s introduction - Take motes. - Read Tam’s information - Answer the T’s questions. - Read the passage..

(14) While- Writing ( 15 ms) Fill in a similar form.......prompts ( grids) - Ask Ss to fill in a similar form for their partner Name:……………………………………..Age:…… Appearance:………………………………………… Characters:…………………………………………… Address:……………………………………………… Family:……………………………………………… Friends:……………………………………………… - Go around the class to check Ss’work and offer help - Correct some form before the class - Call one s to complete the form on the board Write- it- up: - Ask Ss to write a paragraph from the form above. - Have them share with a friend. - Go around and help if necessary Post- Writing ( 7 ms) - Choose 2 to 3 writings from Ss and correct them. - Write common mistakes on the board and correct.. - Get information from their partner and fill in the form - Compare friends. with. - Write a paragraph - Write in individuals - Share with a friend. - Give T writings. - Pay attention and take notes.. Consolidation (2 ms) - Summarize the lesson: + Give some advice to Ss - Listen and remember. + the use of description about information of personal. Homework: (1 m) - Learn new words and structures by heart. - Learn how to write a description. - Do exercises at home - Prepare unit 1: Language focus. F/Self- Evaluation:. (14). their.

(15) Period :06 Week : 02. Preparing date: 28/8/2012 Teaching date: 30/8/2012 UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS Lesson 5: Language focus. A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson students will be able to: Review the simple tenses and talk about general truths with the simple present - Review the adjectives used for describing appearance and characters - Know the usage of “enough” - Have better attitude in learning English. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: (n) planet, Earth, Moon, Mars, Mercury, (a) silly 2.Grammar: * Simple tenses * Adjectives for describing appearance and characters * S + be (not) + adj + enough + to-infinitive 3.Language skills: Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing C/ Techniques: Picture drill, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, chalk, board, … E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization: (1m) 2. Check up: (5ms) Check some Ss' writings. 3. New lesson:( 39 ms) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up (5 ms) - Divide Ss into three groups to write words related to "build, hair, and clothes". New lesson (1 m) - Introduce the new lesson. Activity 1 (6 ms) 1. Complete the paragraphs. Use ....... - Revise the formation, use and cues of the present, and past simple tenses. - Ask Ss to complete the paragraphs in pairs. - Call Ss read the paragraphs aloud. - Give answers. * Key: a/ (1) lives (2) sent (3) was (4) is b/ (1) are (2) came (3) showed (4) introduced Activity 2 (6 ms) 2. Complete the dialogue. Use........ - Introduce the new words: (15). - Play as T's guide - Listen - Pay attention and copy down. - Conjugate the verbs in pairs. - Read the paragraphs. - Correct.. - Guess the meaning of.

(16) + Planet (n): ( example) + Mars (n): ( Translation) + Mercury (n): ( explanation) + Silly (n): ( trans) - Get Ss to remind the usages of the simple present tense * biểu đạt sự việc, hành động đúng với hiện tại. E.g: Hoa lives in Ha Noi. * diễn tả hành động thường xảy ra như thói quen e.g: They often drink milk for breakfast. * diễn tả sự thật hiển nhiên (general truth) e.g: The sun rises in the east and sets in the west. - Ask them to read the words in the box . - Let them complete the dialogue between Ba and Tuan , his young cousin . - Call on some pairs to practice the complete dialogue. - Correct their pronunciation and give feedback Key: 1- sets 2- goes 3- moves 4- is 5- is 6- is Activity 3 (12 ms) 3. Look and describe - Ask Ss to discuss answering three questions. a) How many people are there in the picture? b) What does each person look like? c) What is each person wearing? - Elicit some words or phrases: + Heavy, shoulder bag, holds one's head, shorts, yellow shirts.... - Call on one student from each group to give answers. - Correct Answers: a/ There are four people in the picture.. the words and take notes.. b/ The man standing next to the taxi is tall and rather fat with short black hair. The woman is tall and thin with short black hair. The boy sitting on the ground is rather tall and thin with short black hair. The man standing across the street is rather fat and short. c/ The man standing next to the taxi is wearing a yellow shirt and black trousers, the woman is carrying a shoulder bag, and is wearing a red blouse and a red skirt. The boy sitting on the ground is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt and the man standing across the street is wearing blue trousers, a brown necktie and a pink shirt. Activity 4 (6 ms ) 4. Complete the dialogues. Use (not) adjective + enough - Set the scene to introduce the aims of the exercise - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to read the complete dialogue - Correct Key: a. not big enough b. not old enough c. strong enough d. good enough Consolidation (2 ms). - Representative answers. (16). - Take notes. - Pay attention - Do as T's requirement. - Ask answer in pairs. - Copy down - Work in groups. - Discuss answering three questions. gives. - Copy down. - Listen. - Work in pairs. - Show the dialogues aloud. - Copy down.

(17) - Summarize the lesson:+ Give some advice to Ss + summarize the lesson (remind what Ss are weak) Homework: (1 m) - Learn by heart the sentences: 1.The sun rises in the east and sets in the west. 2.The Earth goes around the sun. 3.The moon moves around the earth. - Prepare Unit 2: Getting started + Listen and Read. - Listen and remember.. - Do exercises at home. F/ Self- Evaluation:. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. (17).

(18) Period :07 Week : 03. Preparing date: 03/9/2012 Teaching date: 04/9/2012 UNIT 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use the telephone to make and confirm arrangements . - develop Ss’speaking and listening skills . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: - Some words of the media 2.Grammar: - Going to/ Adv of place 3. Language skills: listening, reading, speaking and writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, poster , pictures , radio , CD, lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organizations (1 m) : - Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Ask Ss to do the test 15 minutes themselves - T limits the time (15 minutes) then collect Ss’ test 3. New lesson ( 39 ms) :. (18).

(19) Teacher’s activities. Student’s ,activities. Warm up (5 ms): Matching ( Getting started ) - Ask Ss to match each object with its name * Answers : a. an answering machine b. a mobile phone c. a fax machine d. a telephone directory e. a public telephone f. an address book - Give the definitions of these objects on a poster and ask Ss to match the object with its definition . * Definition : 1. to send fax 2. to find someone ,s telephone number 3. to write address and telephone numbers 4. to make a phone call in street telephone box . 5. to leave and take messages 6. to make phone call anywhere you like * Answers : a-5 b-6 c-1 d-2 e- 4 f-3 Pre-teach (5 ms): * Elicits and present some words : - (to) hold on : đợi máy nhé, giữ chờ máy nhé -(to) bit far / alittle bit far : hơi hơi xa, khá xa -(an) arrangement : sự sắp xếp - ( to ) agree : đồng ý Pre- reading (8 ms) : * Open prediction : - Set the scene “ Hoa and Nga are talking on the phone . They are talking about going to see a movie “. (19). - Work in groups of 4 (table ) - Match each object with its name. - Give answer keys. Listen and copy down. - Works individually. -Copy down new words . - Repeat in chorus. -Listen to teacher sets the.

(20) F/ Self- Evaluation:. GD-ĐT EAH’LEO Trường THCS Chu Van An --------------------------. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 15 PHÚT NO 1 Môn: Tiếng Anh- Lớp 8 --------------------------. Họ và tên:…………………………...……………………Lớp:……………… Teacher’s remark. Mark. I/ Listen and circle the best answer ( 4 ms) 1. How old is Nam ? (20).

(21) A. fifteen B. fifty C. thirty D. thirty 2. What does he look like: A. tall B. has short black hair C. fat D. tall, fat and has short black hair 3. Where does he live ? A. 40 Hung Vuong street B. 14 Hung vuong street C. 40 Tran Phu street D. 14 Tran Phu street 4. Who does he live with ? A. parents B. parents and sisters C. sisters D. grandparents II/ Listen. Underline the wrong words and correct it ( 6 ms) 1. He is tall, fat, and has black long hair. ................................................................... 2. He live at 40 Hung Vuong street. .................................................................... 3. He lives to hisparents and sisters. ................................................................... -------THE END------TAPECRIPE His name is Phan Van nam and he is fifteen years old. He lives at 40 Hung Vuong street with his parents and sisters. He is tall, fat and has short black hair. His friends are Ngan and Hoa. ANSWER KEY : I ( 4 x1= 4 ms) 1. A II/ (3x 2= 6 ms) 1. black short 3. to. . . 2D. 3. A. short black. with. 2. live. F/ Self- Evaluation:. (21). 4. B . lives.

(22) Period :08 Week : 03. Preparing date: 04/9/2012 Teaching date: 06/9/2012 UNIT 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Lesson 2: Speak and listen. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - talk on the phone about intentions with “ Going To” B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar : - Could I talk to …….? - Review : Would you like to ……? 3.Language skills : Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cards , chalks , .lesson plan , posters. E/ Procedures: 1. Class organizations (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up (5 ms): -T asks some questions : 1. Have you got a telephone ? 2. Do you have a telephone at your home ? 3. What is your telephone mumber? 3. New lesson (39 ms) : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up (3 ms): * Chatting - Talk to Ss to about using telephone . 1. Do you have a telephone at home ? 2. How often do you make a phone call ? 3. What would you say when you pick up the phone to answer it ? 4. What would you say if you are the caller ? A/ SPEAKING (19 ms) Pre- speaking ( 5ms) - Ask Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs to put the sentences in the correct order to make a complete conversation . - Call on some pairs to read their answers and write them on the board : (22). -Some ss to answer the T’s questions Work in whole class. Work in pairs Report their answers.

(23) Answers :1b 2f 3j 4a 5i 6c 7e 8 k 9g 10 h 11 d - Call on some pairs to practice the conversation they have arranged . -Ask Ss some questions to check Ss ’understanding and focus on the structure GOING TO a. Are they talking on the phone ? b. What do they intend to do ? c. What time are they meeting ? Where ? d.What form of the verbs do you use to talk about intentions ? => S + BE + GOING TO + Infinitive => Express an intention While - speaking (9 ms): - Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are making arrangements to play chess “ - Ask Ss to work with partners to complete the dialogue - Call on some pairs to play the roles of Ba and Bao to practice the dialogue . - Listen and give feedback Ba : Hello . 8257012 Bao : May I speak to Ba , please . This is Bao . Ba : Hello , Bao . How are you ? Bao : I am fine . Thanks , and you ? Ba : Great . Me too. Bao : can you play chess tonight ? Ba : I am sorry . I can not play chess tonight . I am going to do my homework . Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ? Ba : Tomorrow afternoon is fine . Bao : I’ll meet you at the Center Chess Club . Ba : At the Central Chess Club ? Ok . Let ,s meet at the front door . Bao : Is 2,00, OK ? Ba : Great . See you tomorrow afternoon at 2.00 o,clock Post – speaking (5 ms): - Ask Ss to make similar dialogue . T can emphasise (nhan manh )the useful phrases and sentences - Ask Ss to make similar arrangements and practice talking with a partner . -Ask Ss to make sentences with “Going to + Infinitive “ B/ LISTENING (9 ms) Setting the scene: “ You are going to listen a dialogue on the phone between a secretary of the principal at Kingston High School and a women” ? Listen to the telephone conversation and fill in the missing information - T gives feedback (23). Practice the dialogue - Work in pairs. complete. + Yes , they are + They intend to go to the pop concert . They are meeting inside the center at 7.15 + be going to Listen and copy down. Listen to carefully .. teacher. Work in pairs. Practice dialogue. the. complete. - Work in groups of 3 or 4. Make similar dialogue . Practice asking answering - work in pairs .. and. - Ss listen carefully - Ss listen and fill *Answer Key: - Date: Ss answer/Time :Ss answer - For :The principal - Message: Mrs Mary.

(24) Post- Teach (4 ms) Nguyen wanted to see you ? Role play ( one student is Ba, another is Bao) at 9.45 in the morning. -T call some pairs after Ss finishe -Tel. number: Consolidation ( 2ms) 6483720942 - Retell the main points of the lesson. - Ss role play Homeworks ( 1 m) - Some ss practice in pair - Learn by heart vocabulary and model - Retell the main points - Do exercise 1. 2. 3 in the work book - Do exercises at home - Prepare the next lesson Unit 2: READ F/ Self- Evaluation: Period :09 Preparing date: 07/9/2012 Week : 03 Teaching date: 08/9/2012 UNIT 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Lesson 3: Read A/ Ojectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know more about Alexander Graham Bell . - read for specific information about Alex . G .B . B/ Language contents 1. Vocabulary: emigrate, transmit, conduct, demonstrate, a device, deaf – mute. 2. Grammar : Passive voice, Neither…… nor , The past simple. 3. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing . C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters , pictures of Bill , lesson plan. E/ Procedure : 1. Class organizations (1 m): - Greeting and asks some questions. 2. Checking up (5 ms) : - Asks some Ss to say new words , meaning of these words - T corrects mistakes and gives them marks. - T corrects and give them marks . - T gives the test 15 minutes to Ss. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up ( 5ms): * Brainstorming - Let Ss answer the questions by coming to the board and write : To chat with friend Play games in 2 teams + What is the mobile phone used for ?  Possible answers : - to have a message - to call someone - to make arrangements Read their answers aloud - to talk to a person who lives far from and copy . - to get information at the airport or railway station quickly Pre - reading ( 10 ms) : - Introduce the aims and some new words to Ss . (24).

(25) Pre teach vocabulary : - to emigrate = to go another country to live : xuất cảnh, di cư - to transmit ( translation ) : truyền , phát ( tín hiệu) - to conduct = to carry out: thực hiện, tiến hành, chỉ đạo . - to demonstrate ( translation )= perform. - a device ( translation ) : thiết bị, máy móc - deaf – mute( adj) = a person who is unable to hear and speak : tật câm điếc * Checking vocabulary : What and where T / F statements prediction : - Hang the poster of T / F statements on the board and ask Ss to work in pairs and guess which statements are true or false . …….a. Alexander G. Bell was born in the USA …….b. He worked with deaf – mute patients in a hospital in Boston . …….c. Thomas Watson was Bell,s assistant. ….....d. Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in 1877 . ……e. Bell experimented his invention at a lot of exhibitions - Call on some pairs to read their predictions and write them on the board . While – reading (15 ms) : * True or false : -Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at their books to read the text , then check their prediction Guess Answer Correction a b. F F. c d e. T F F. Listen carefully Listen and repeat chorus , Read individually . Guess its meanings Copy down Play game Look at the poster and work in pairs to predict .. Read their predictions Listen , read the text , then check their predictions . -work in pairs.. - Correct the false ones (one by one.). He was born in Edinburgh in Scotland He worked with deaf – mute patients at Boston University. He introduced telephone in 1876 He experimented with ways of transmitting speech over a longRead them aloud distance. f T Do the exercise - Ask some Ss to read the correct answers aloud . * Ordering : - Ask Ss to look at the exercise and read the events of Read their answers Bell,s life , then put them in the correct order . - Have them compare with their partners - Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud . work in pairs. - Corrects and give feedback = > Alexander Graham Bell (25). in.

(26) 1.Was born in Scotland 2.went to live in Canada 3.went to live in the USA 4.worked with people who could neither speak nor hear 5.worked with Thomas Watson 6.successfully demonstrate his invention 7.invented the telephone . - Call on some Ss to read all the correct order sentences aloud Post - reading ( 6ms): * Write it up : - Get Ss to write a paragraph about Bell ,s life , using the information from the text . - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class . - Correct mistakes if any and give Suggestions . Consolidations (2 ms): -Retell the main contents of this lesson. Homeworks (1 m) : 1. Copy down their writings . 2. Do the exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 2: Write. Read their sentences aloud. -Write individually . Compare with their partners Read their writings aloud . Retell the main contents Do exercises at home. F/ Self- Evaluation:. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------. (26). correct.

(27) Period : 10 Week : 04. Preparing date: 11/9/2012 Teaching date: 13/9/2012 UNIT 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Lesson 4 : Write. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - write a telephone message . - develop Ss’ writing skill. B/ Language content: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar : Past simple ( review). 3. Language skills: writing, reading , listening, speaking. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters , lesson plan, ... E/ Procedure: 1. Class organizations ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Call 2 Ss to write vocabulary - Call one student to read the text about Alxander. G. Bell and answer some qs. - T corrects and give marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms):. (27).

(28) Teacher’s activities. Student’s ,activities. Warm up (5 ms): * Matching : - Hang a poster, ask Ss to go to the board and matching - customer • sự phục vụ - furniture • lời nhắn, tin nhắn - stationery • khách hàng - midday • văn phòng phẩm - service • buổi trưa, giữa ngày. - message • đồ đạc + T. corrects the mistakes. Pre - writing ( 10 ms): * Chatting : – Talk to Ss about taking a telephone message Have you ever taken a message ? When you take a message , what should be mentioned in the message ? ( Date , time who sent , to whom , content ) * Pre – teach( vocabulary ): - customer : a person who comes to buy st at a shop . - (a) delivery : sự giao hàng (Trans…) - stationery ( papers, pens, pencils, rulers .. ): văn phòng phẩm.. (28). Play game. Practice asking and answering the questions. Listen and repeat in chorus , individually . Guess its meanings.

(29) F/ Self- Evaluation:. -------------------------------------------------------------. Period : 11 Week : 04. Preparing date: 11/9/2012 Teaching date: 13/9/2012 UNIT 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Lesson 5 : Language focus. A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - complete a telephone message by listening . - listening for details and further practice in adverbs of place. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar : - Adverb of place - Be going to 3.Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing . C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , postres, lesson plan. (29).

(30) E/ Procedures: 1. Class organizations (1 m) : - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up (15 ms) : - Checking in the contents of the new lesson . - T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 29 ms) : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities * Warm up (2 ms): * Telephone transmitting - Divide Ss into two teams . - Choose 6 volunteers from each team - the volunteers stand in two lines . T. shows the first student a telephone number . - He / She whispers the telephone number to the next person in his / her line . - The second student whispers to the third ... until the last one . - The last student has to shout out the number , if it is the same as the number teacher shows , that team wins the match . New lesson (27 ms): 1. Talk about intentions with going to - Introduce the form and use of going to - Form : S + be going to + infinitive - Use : express an intention Ex 1 (8ms): Ask Ss to do exercise 1.They have to work with a partner and say what the people are going to do - Example : T : Nga has a movie ticket .What is she going to do ? S : She is going to see a movie . - Call on some pairs to read their sentences aloud . - Correct and give feedback : a. They are going fishing b. She is going to read the new model c. She is going to do her homework . d. He is going to watch an action movie on TV tonight . e. She is going to give him a birthday present . Ex 2 (8ms) : Complete the list ( Questionnaire ) a) Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class . - Listen and give feedback . b) Get Ss to work in pairs - Have some pairs demonstrate in front of class . - Give feedback . 2. Adverbs of place (8ms) * Jumbled words - Let Ss work individually , one student one word (30). Play game. Listen and copy down Work in pairs Read the example. Read their sentences. complete. Work in pairs Stick in column “You “ and “Your partner” - Demonstrate in front of class . Work individually , one student one word Go to the board to write the meanings and read them aloud ..

(31) 1. tdeousi = outside 4. erhe = here 2. siiden = inside 5. stupairs = upstairs 3. hetre = there 6. wonstaird = downstairs - Ask Ss to go to the board and write the meanings words . - Call on some Ss to read all the adverbs aloud . Ex 3 : Complete the speech bubbles . Use each adverb in the box once . - Set the scene : “ Ba is playing hide and seek with his cousin , Mr Tuan “ - Let Ss work in pairs , then compare with another pair ( at their table ) - Call on some Ss to read out the speech bubbles - Give feedback a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is upstairs b. No , he is not here . c. He is not downstairs and he is not upstairs . d. Perhaps , he is outside . e. No , he is not there . f. I am not outside . I am inside , Ba. - Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences . Consolidations (2 ms) : - Retell the main points of this lesson . Homework(1 m): 1. Copy the complete exercises in their notebooks . 2. Write six sentences about your house , using adverbs of place . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 3: Getting started and listen and read. Listen to the scene . Work in pairs Read out bubbles. the. speech. Read the complete sentences aloud Retell the main points Copy down homeworks. F/ Self- Evaluation:. TEST NO1 :TIME 15 MINUTES I/choose the best answer (6ms). 1.Alexander Graham Bell was (an)……………………………. a.English b.American c.Scotsman d.Italian 2.They ……………………..from Canada to America to find work . a.started b.demonstrated c.delivered d.emigrated 3.The river Amazon …………………………in to the Atlantic Ocean . a.flow b.to flow c.flows d.is flowing 4.The students ……………………………to the concert tonight . a.go b.are going c.goes d.going 5.Bell do experiments and finally came ………………..with a device to introduce the telephone. a.on b.up c.over d.to 6.Tuan is not …………………………….get married . a.enough old to b.enough old for .old enough to d.old enough for (31).

(32) II/ SUPPLY The correct form of the verb (4ms) 1.Hoa’s mother (leave)……………….this city tow years ago. 2.The moon (move)……………………….around the Earth . 3.Lan and I (visit)……………………………………HCM City on the weekend. 4.Tom is intelligent enough (do)…………………….this difficult math .. Period : 12 Week : 04. Preparing date: 11/9/2012 Teaching date: 14/9/2012 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand the dialogue and use modal verbs to talk about the housework . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : Some of words about the object which are used for cooking. 2.Grammar: have to , ought to 3.Language skills: listening, reading, speaking, writing C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , pictures, postes, lesson plan. E/ Procedure: (32).

(33) 1. Class organization ( 1m) : - Greetinmg and checking attendance . 2. Checking up ( 5 ms) : - T. asks Ss some questions : ? What did you do to help your mom after school ? ? ……… - Asks some Ss to answer the questions . - T. corrects and give them marks. * Possible answers : cook meas / wash clothes / Tidy up / Feed the chicken / sweep the floor…. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up ( 5 ms) * Kim’s game ( Getting started ) - Show 6 pictures to Ss and ask them to look at 6 pictures quickly in 30 seconds and try to remember the verbs in the pictures as many as possible - Which team remembering more verbs is the winner.  Answer : a. Wash dishes / do the washing up b. Make the bed / to fold the clothes neatly ( gấp quần áo ngay ngắn ) c. Sweep the floor d. Cook e. Tidy up f. Feed the chicken * Presentation ( 10 ms) : Introduce the topic of the passage and some new words * Pre- teach (Vocabulary ): - (a) steamer : nồi hấp, nồi đun hơi -( a) cupboard : chạn, tủ chạn -( a) saucepan : chảo - chore (n) : việc vặt trong nhà, công việc nội trợ -( a) sink : bồn rửa, chậu rửa. * Checking techniques : What and where * Practice ( 15 ms) - Set the scene of the dialogue between Nam and his mother , Mrs Vui . - Ask Ss to complete the list of the things Nam has to do . - Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books and read their complete sentences : * Nam has to: - cook dinner . - go to the market to buy fish and vegestables. - call his Aunt , Ms Chi and ask her to meet his mother at grandma,s house . (33). Play game. Some Ss stand up and speak loudly.. - Copy new lesson. - Read in chorus. Listen and copy down . Repeat in chorus and individually Guess its meanings and copy Play game Listen carefully Listen to the tape while looking at their books . Read their sentences they have completed.

(34) Has / Have to + Infinitive = Must + Infinitive Model : What do you have to do ? I must do the washing up . -> Use the picture cues drill : a. do the washing up b. make the bed c. sweep the floor d. cook dinner e. tidy my room f. feed the chickens . - Call on some Ss to practice in front of class * Have Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs . Production ( 6 ms): - Ask Ss to write the lists of the things they have to do on Sundays . Beginning with : On Sunday morning , I have to tidy my room ............. - Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of class. - Correct mistakes if any and ask them to copy . Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main contents of this lesson . Homeworks ( 1m) : 1. Learn by heart all new words they have learnt . 2. Do their exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 3 : Speak. Copy and give examples. Practice in pairs. Read the dialogue in pairs . Write individually. Demonstrate their writings. Retell the main contents Listen and homeworks. copy. down. F/ Self- Evaluation:. Period : 13 Week : 04. Preparing date: 13/9/2012 Teaching date: 15/9/2012 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 2: Speak. A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use the prepositions of places to talk about the positions in the house . - develop’s Ss speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Things in the kichen and living room. 2.Grammar: Review: Where is…….? It’s………… Where are……? They are…………. Let’s…………….. I think we ought to……….. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, writing, reading (34).

(35) C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Pictures , chalks , leson plan, poster. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organizations (1m): - Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up (5 ms) : - Asks some Ss to retell the new words of last lesson. - T. corrects and give marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up (5 ms): * Kim’s game - Devide the class into 2 teams - Show the picture of a chicken to Ss . - Ask them to study the things in the picture - Take away the picture and ask Ss to write down as many things as they can remember . - Which team having more things win games . Pre – Speaking (10 ms) : - Ask Ss to tell the positions of the items in the pictures . Where is the clock ? It is above the fridge . Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl . Where is the flowers ? They are on the table . Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the bwl of fruit. Where is the cupboard ? It is on the wall , above the counter . Where are the knives ? They are on the wall , under the cupboard . Where is the dish rack ? It is on the counter , next to the bowl of fruit . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . While - speaking (15 ms): - Get Ss to work in pairs , talking about the position of each item Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above the stove . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class. - Give feedback : + The sink is next to the stove . + The cupboard is on the wall , above the counter . + The knives are on the wall , under the cupboard . + The bowl of fruit is between the rice cooker and the dish rack + The clock is on the wall , above the fridge . + The flowers are on the table . (35). Play game. Pairwork. Ask and answer. Practice Practice asking and answering about the positions of each item . - Demonstrate in front of class Work in pairs Pay attention Observe the picture Read all the sentences aloud ..

(36) - Ask them to read all the suggested sentences aloud . Post – speaking (6 ms) - Set the scene : Mrs Vui bought new furniture for her living room , but she can not decide where to put it . You should help her to arrange the furniture” - Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk about their ideas .  Ask Ss to practice speaking : - If they agree , they may use : Ok . You are right . - If they disagree , they may use : No , I think we ,d better / ought to put ... I think it should be ... Example : - Let us put the clock on the wall , between the shelf and the picture . - OK . I think we ought to put the TV and the stereo on the shelf ….. - Call on some pairs to practice speaking . Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main contents of this lesson.. Listen carefully .. Copy down Read the examples. Practice speaking .. Retell the main contents Homework (1 m): 1. Describe their living room or bedroom . 2. Do exercise in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 3 : Listen Do exercises at home F/ Self- Evaluation: Period : 14 Week : 05. Preparing date: 19/9/2012 Teaching date: 20/9/2012 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 3 : Listen. A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - identify the right item by listening . - develop Ss listening skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Some ingredients. 2.Grammar: 3.Languge skills: Listening, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Cassette , textbooks , chalks , lesson plan , poster . E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up (5 ms) : - Asks 2 Ss to complete the list of things Nam has to do ex2 ( 28 ) (36).

(37) - Two others Use “ought to” to give advice b- d (35). + T corrects and give answer keys .=> give them marks . * Keys ( possible answer): 1) - He has to go to the market to buy fish and vegetables. - He has to call Aunt Chi ask her to meet his mother at his grandma’s house . 2) b. You ought to get up earlier. d. You ought to go to a dentist . 3. New lesson (39 ms) : Teacher’s activities. Student’s ,activities. Warm up (5 ms) : * Bingo - Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks 5 things you can eat . - Prepare a list of food . Then call out each word in a loud voice . - Ss listen to the teacher carefully . If anyone has the same things , they cross them out . The first person crossing out all 5 things shouts “ Bingo “ and wins the game . * Suggested list of food : Chickens , beef , cake , candy , garlic , noodles , bread , rice , ham , peas ... Pre - listening ( 10 ms): * Predictions : - Get Ss to look at page 30 and guess 4 things they use to cook the Special Chinese Fried Rice “ - Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . While - listening ( 15 ms): - Turn on the tape 3 times and ask them to check their predictions . - Give feedback a. Fired Rice b. Pan c. Garlic and green peppers d. Ham and peas . - Turn on the tape once more to check the answers again . Post - listening ( 6 ms): Mapped dialogue - Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Mrs Tu to make a dialogue by listening the tape again . Lan : Can I help ........................, Mom ? Mrs Tu : Sure you can cook ............................... Use the big pan please . Lan : ................................................? Mrs Tu : Just a little . Wait until it is hot and then fry (37). Play game Listen to carefully. the. teacher. -Look at their books and guess - Read their predictions Listen to the tape carefully to check their predictions . Copy the answers . Listen and check once more . Listen individually Role play Practice in pairs to make a dialogue.

(38) the garlic and the green peppers . Lan : ...............................................? Mrs Tu : Yes . And you can put the rice and s teaspoon of salt in . Lan : YUmmy ! It smells ................. . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class - Correct pronunciations if any . Consolidations (2 ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework (1 m): 1. Copy down the dialogue in their notebooks . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 3: Read. Work in pairs Practice in front of class Listen and copy . Retell the main points Copy down homeworks.. F/ Self- Evaluation:. Period : 15 Week : 05. Preparing date: 19/9/2012 Teaching date: 21/9/2012. UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 4: Read A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand the safety precautions in the house and use Why- because . - develop Ss’ reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: a precaution, a socket, a bead, a match, an object, safety, destroy, injure 2. Grammar: 3. Languge skills: Listening, reading, speaking, writing C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , Cassette , pictures , realias , lesson plan E/ Procedure : 1. Class organization( 1 m): Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): (38).

(39) - Asks Ss talk some steps to make the “Special Chinese Fried Rice”. - T corrects and give them marks *Possible answers : 1. Put the little oil in the big pan. 2. Heat the pan. 3. Fry the garlic and the green peppers. 4. Put the ham and peas in . 5. Put the rice and teaspoon of salt in . 3. New lesson( 39 ms) :. (39).

(40) Teacher’s activities. Student’s ,activities. Things danger in home for children. Warm up ( 5ms) : * Brainstorming  Possible answers : drug / electricity / boiling water / fire / gas / knife./ bead / glass … Play game in two teams. Write down - Ask them to copy down . Pre – reading (10 ms) : - Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss * Pre – teach vocabulary : - a precaution ( n): sù phßng ngõa , sù đề phßng - a socket ( n)( realia ): ổ cắm điện - a bead ( n): vật tròn nhỏ - a match ( n) ( realia ): diêm - an object ( n) : vật , đồ vật - safety (n ) : sù an toµn - to destroy (n): ph¸ huû - to injure ( situation ) : gây thương tích * Checking vocabs : Slap the board True / false statements predictions - Ask Ss to read the statements and guess which is true , which is false . Statements Guess Key 1. It is safe to leave medicine around the F house . 2. Drugs can look like candy . T 3. A kitchen is a suitable place to play . F 4. Playing with one match can not start a fife . F 5. Putting a knife into an electrical socket is dangerous . T 6. Young children do not understand that many house hold objects are T dangerous .. Listen to the topic .. Listen and repeat in chorus and individually Guess its meaning s and copy. Play game in 2 teams Read and predict. Read their predictions aloud - Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on .. (40).

(41) F/ Self- Evaluation: --------------------------------------------------------------------. Period : 16 Week : 05. Preparing date: 19/9/2012 Teaching date: 22/9/2012 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 5: Write. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - write a description of a room in their house . - develop Ss writing skill . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Some objects in the kitchen 2.Grammar: preposition of position. (41).

(42) 3.Language skills: writing, speaking, reading, listening. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , board , lesson plan. E/ Procedure : 1. Class organization ( 1m) : Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Asks 2 Ss to say some things danger in home for children. - T. corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up ( 5 ms) : * Chatting ( Asking something about the room on page 32 ) 1. Which room is this ? 2. What is this ? 3. Where is it ? Pre – writing ( 10 ms) : - Introduce the aims and some new words to Ss : Pre- teach vocabulary : - folder (n) ( realia) : bìa - beneath (pre) : phía dưới > < above. - dish rack (n) : giá để bát đĩa - lighting fixture (n): đèn chùm - Container (n) : cái đựng, cái chứa ( chai , lọ, bình…) * Checking : Rub out and remember * Read the description of Hoa’s room - Ask Ss to read the description of Hoa ’sroom , then ask some comprehension questions a. What is there on the left of the room ? b. Where is the bookshelf ? c. What is there on the right side of the room ? d. Where is the wardrobe ? - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Correct and give feedback : a. There is a desk on the left of the room . b. The bookshelf is above the desk . c. There is a window on the right side of the room d. The wardrobe is beside the window and opposite the desk . - Call on some Ss to read the descriptions of Hoa ,s room aloud . While - writing (15 ms): - Ask Ss to describe Hoa’s kitchen , using the given cues . - Ask Ss to share with their partners . - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class . (42). Play game. Listen and repeat in chorus , individually Guess its meanings and copy .. Play game Read the description and practice asking and answering the questions. - work in pairs.. Read the description aloud . Work individually Compare with their friends Demonstrate their writings in front of class.

(43) - Correct the mistakes from some descriptions if any . - Give feedback This is Hoa,s kitchen . There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room . Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven On the other side of the oven , there is a sink and next to the sink is a towel rack . The disk rack stands on the counter , on the right of the window and beneath the selves . On the selves and on the counter beneath the window, there are jars of sugar , flour and tea . In the middle of the kitchen , there are a table and four chairs . The lighting fixture is above the table , and directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with flowers . - Call on some Ss to read the completed descriptions aloud . Post- writing (6 ms): * Speaking - Ask Ss to talk to their partners about their room / living room / kitchen . - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their speeches in front of class . Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main contents of this lesson. Homework (1 m): 1. Write a description of their living room . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 3: Language focus. - Describe the Hoa’skitchen. - Work individually. - Compare with the partner. Read the completed writing aloud . (one by one) Practice speaking . Demonstrate in front of class Retell the main points Do exercises at home. F/ Self- Evaluation: Period : 17 Week : 06. Preparing date: 26/9/2012 Teaching date: 27/9/2012 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 6 : Language focus. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use the Reflexive Pronouns , modal verbs to talk about the house work - know how to use Why - Because . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar: Reflexive pronouns, modal verbs Why- because 3.Language skills: Writing, speaking, reading, listening. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… (43).

(44) D/ Teaching aids : Textbook , boards , chalks , lesson plan,posters. E/ Procedure : 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and Ask some questions. 2 . Checking up (5 ms): - T. asks some Qs in Ex2 (32). - Ss answer the questions. - T. corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up (5 ms) : * Brainstorming - tidy up - do our homework Things you - cook can do - water flower - clean the floor - repair the machine - fix the TV set Things you - paint the house can not do - Call on some Ss to talk with “ Can “ - Listen and correct mistakes if any Language focus : 1. Reflexive pronouns ( 6 ms) - Set the scene “ You do your homework and no one helps you . What do you say ? “ I did my homework myself . -> Explain the reflexive Pronouns - > Form : We use I with myself You ......... yourself / yourselves He ...........himself We .........ourselves She ..........herself They ...... themselves It ............. itself - Emphasis pronouns : Used to emphasize a person or a thing . Eg : She cut herself . John saw himself in the mirror . Ex 3( 5ms): Complete the dialogue : - Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with suitable reflexive pronouns or emphasis pronouns . - Call on some pairs to practice speaking . - Give feedback : a. himself b. ourselves c. myself / yourself d. himself / herself / themselves e. yourself . - Ask them to practice the complete dialogue . 2. Modal verbs - Set the scene : “ Hoa is very sad because she failed (44). Play game in two teams. One by one of each team to talk. Talk the things you can do / can not do. Listen to the scene and answer the questions .. - Work individually. Write down and give examples - Work in pairs to complete the dialogue - Practice speaking - Work in pairs. - Listen and copy. - Pay attention.

(45) her English test . What do you say to advise her ? “ “ You should study harder “  Another word for “ should “ : Ought to Ought to + Infinitive Exercises: Ex 2 (7ms) : Ask Ss to give advice to people in the pictures - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback : a. I failed my English test You ought to study harder b. You ought to get up earlier . c. You ought to eat more fruit and vegetables . d. You ought to see a dentist . * Checking : Noughts and crosses : His tooth Hoa /late My room /untidy /ache The floor Bao She /thin /dirty /overweight The washing My Hergrades / machine / not English /bad bad work  Using “ Should “ to play game . Ex 1 ( 7 ms) : Look at the pictures . Complete the dialogue , Use Must or Have to and the verbs in the box - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue : - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class. - Give feedback 1. must / have to tidy ; 2. have to / must dust 3. must / have to sweep ; 4. must / have to clean 5. have to / must empty ; 6. must / have to feed . Ex 4 ( 6ms):- T asks: “Why did Hoa go to school late this morning?” - T asks Ss to work in pairs - opened pairs Ask Ss to work with a partner asking and answering questions about Hoa, Nam, Ha, Nga, and Mrs. Vui using Why-Because. b. Why did Nam have to cook dinner? - Because his mom was home late. c. Why did Mrs. Vui, Nam’s mom go home late? - Because she had to visit his grandma, she was. - Practice in front of class. - copy down if necessary. - Works in pairs. - Play game. - Play game in two teams.. - Work in pairs - Demonstrate in front of class . Listen and copy . Because she watched TV late last night. Pair work. Copy down. - Ask and answer. Correct the mistakes (45).

(46) sick. d. Why did Ha fail her English exam? - Because she didn’t learn for her exam. She played the computer games Retell the content e. Why didn’t Nga go to the movies? Because she had to do her chores. She had to clean Do exercises at home the kitchen and sweep the living-room - T corrects the mistakes - Ss write Consolidation (2 ms): Retell the contents of this lesson. Homework ( 1m) : 1. Do exercises in work book 2. Copy all the exercises above . 3. Prepare the test . F/ Self- Evaluation:. Period : 18 Week : 06. Preparing date: 27/9/2012 Teaching date: 28/9/2012 COSOLIDATION A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - consolidate all structure grammar from unit 1 to unit 3 . - do all exercises in work book - develop Ss’ 4 skills ( listening, speaking, reading and writing.) B/ Laguage contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Gramamar: 3. Language skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing (46).

(47) C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teching aids: Lesson plan, textbook, posters... E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization (1 m) : - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Asks some Ss retell some structure grammar from unit 1 to unit 3 - T. copies down on the board. - T.hangs a poster give main structure grammar, and give them marks.III. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up (5 ms) - Play game “ Noughts and crosses” be going to enough why Play game himself long because ought to have to must New lesson ( 31 ms) : - Asks Ss to do exercises. Using some old structure grammar.( T hangs a poster , give some Structure Listen carefully Grammar) Ex1 (13 ms) : Choose the best answer to complete the sentences: 1. He’s tall and thin. He has _______ Choose the best answer. A. black hair short B. short black hair C. hair short black D. black short hair 2. I find he is not communicative. He’s rather _____. A. outgoing B. humorous C. sociable D. Work individually reserved 3. Don’t let your little brother play with the ballpoint pen. It can ________him. A. move B. sweep C. injure D. destroy 4. The lighting fixture is ______ the dinner table. A. above B. on C. beneath D. under 5. He’ll ____________cook meals himself. A. can B. must C. have to D. Compare with partner ought to 6. Deaf-mutes can _______speak ________hear. A. both – and B. either – or Answer key: C. neither – nor D. not only – but also 2D 3C 4A 5C 7. Our son is old enough to look after _______. 1B 7A 8B 9C A. himself B. herself C. myself D. 6C ourselves 8. Don’t come in. Please wait _______for your turn. A. inside B. outside C. upstairs D. downstairs 9. Alexander Graham Bell was born ________March, 3, (47).

(48) 1847. A. at B. in C. on D. from Read their complete sentences - Call some Ss to read the complete sentences Copy down - Ask Ss to comment and correct Ex 2: Rewrite each sentence keeping the same meaing (13 ms): 1. Your little brother can’t study in this school because Work in pairs he is still young. Your little brother isn’t __________________ - Demonstrate in front of class 2. Her hair is short, curly and blonde. . She has______________________________ 3. Driving too fast is very dangerous. It __________________________________ Work in pairs 4. Do you plan to invite her to your birthday party ? Are _______________________________ Ask Ss to do exercise.They have to work with a partner Describe the picture. and say what the people are going to do . - Ask Ss to go to the board to do exercises. Ex 3: Look at the piture and describe the bedroom with One by one to talk loudly the things below (13 ms): 0.This is my Lan’s bedroom 1. There / a desk / the left / the room 2. There / a chair / the desk 3. The bed / the middle / the room 4. On the right side / the room there / a window 5. The clock / the wall, / the bed 6. The bookshelf / the wall, /the desk Read the complete sentences 7. The wardrobe / the desk 8.The cushion / the bed aloud - Have Ss to read the complete sentences aloud . The others write down on - T and Ss correct the sentences their notebooks. Consolidation (2 ms): - Retell the main contents of this lesson . -Retell the main points Homework (1m): 1.Copy the complete exercises in their notebooks . - Copy down homeworks. 2. Write six sentences about your house , using adverbs of place 3. Prepare the test 45 minutes. F/ Self- Evaluation: Period : 19 Preparing date: 6/10/2012 Week : 06 Teaching date: 12/10/2012 TEST( NO 1 ) A / The aims : I. Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 1 to unit 3 so that they can supplement what they are short of . II. Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test. (48).

(49) B/ Steps of the lesson: I. Organization: II. Checking up: III. Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson . - Deliver test papers to Ss . I)Choose the world that has the underlined part pronounced differently. (1,25ms): 1.a.character b.christmas c.children d.schoold 2.a.teacher b.pleasure c.please d.read 3.a.feed b.clean c.sweep d.head 4.a.candy b.fry c.many d.happy 5.a.slim b.thin c.smile d.visit I ) Choose The Best Answer(3ms) : 1. Peter doesn’t talk much in public. He’s rather ............... a. kind b. reserved c. sociable d. humorous 2. It is safe ............. medicine in locked cupboards. a. putting b. put c.to put d. puts 3.There is a computer …………..the middle …………the room . a.in/of b.in/in c.on/of d.on/in 4. I’m not going to wash your clothes. You must do it ........... a. yourself b.himself c. herself d. themselves 5We ought ……………the wardrobe in the corner opposite the bed a.put b.putting c. puts d.to put 6. he is………………. .. to ride a motorbike. a .not old enough b.enough not old c.not enough old d.enough old 7. I……… a letter from my old friend last week. a.sent b.gave c.received d.took 8.He is tall and thin . He has ……………………..hair a.black curly short b.short curly black c.curly short black d.short black curly 9.Nam has to leave to study his room every day . a.should b.must c.ought to d.need to 10.The sun always ………….in the East and ………….in the west a.rise/ set b. rises/set c.rise/sets d.rises/ sets 11.We must put all the small objects such as beads out …….. children’s reach a. of b. in c.on d.to 12.Boys and girls , you’ll have to do this experiment ………………this afternoon . a. yourselves b.yourself c. himself d. herself II) Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form tense.(1,5ms) 1.The earth (circle)……………..the sun once very 365 days . 2.We (watch)……………….an interesting action movie on the weekend. 3.He (visit)…………………HCM city last summer . III) Read the passage carefully and answer the following questions Alexander Graham Bell was born in Scotland. He emigrated to Canada first and then to the USA in 1870s. In America, he worked with deaf – mutes at Boston University. Soon, Bell started experimenting with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance. He worked with Thomas Watson, his assistant. Bell and Watson conducted many experiments. He sucessfully demonstrated his invention to the public at (49).

(50) countless exhibitions, he invented the telephone. By 1877 the first telephone was in commercial use. A.True or False: (0,75m). True or False 1.Thomas Watson was Bell’s assistant . 2He worked with deaf-mute patients in a hospital in Boston. 3.Bell experimented with way of transmitting speech over a long distance . B.Question(2ms) 1,Where was Alexander Graham Bell born ? …………………………………………………………………………………………… 2,Where did he emigrate in 1870s ? …………………………………………………………………………………………… 3,What did Bell invent ? …………………………………………………………………………………………… 4,When was the first telephone in commercial use ? …………………………………………………………………………………………… IV)Rewrite each sentence keeping the same meaning (1,5ms) 1.your little brother can’t study in this school because he is still young . Your little brother isn’t …………..……………………………………………………… 2.Her hair is short ,curly and blond . She has ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3I intend to come over to pick you up. I am ……………………………………………………………………………………… --- THE END---. Period :20 Week :7. Preparing date: 02/10/2012 Teaching date: 04/10/2012 UNIT 4: OUR PAST Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - tell the activities people used to do in the past . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: to look after, equipment, a folktale, Traditional, great grandfa / great grandma, light  Lit. 2. Grammar: used to +V (ìnf) 3. Language skills: listeing, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalks, leson plan, picture. E/ Procedure: (50).

(51) 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Asks Ss retell some structures grammar of last lesson . - T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up (5 ms): * Getting started - Ask Ss to look at the picture and write the names of the things that do not belong to the past . * Answers : The TV / The radio / The mobile / The light fixture / Modern clothing / school uniforms Pre – reading (10 ms) : Pre- teach vocabulary : - used to + v : đã từng ( transalation) - to look after = to take care of : chăm sóc - (an) Equipment (n): trang thiết bị (example) - a folktale : Tam Cam is a folk tale : truyện dân gian. - (a) tale: truyện cổ tích ( explain..) - Traditional ( adj ) : thuộc về truyền thống. (trans.. ) - ( a) great grandfa / great grandma(n): cô «ng / cô bµ. lost : (v) mÊt. ( example) - to light – lit – lighted : thắp, đốt ( mime ) once (adv): ngµy xa. (explain ) * Checking : What and where T / F statements prediction - Ask Ss to read the statements,predict they are true or false Statements Guess Key 1. Nga is used to live on farm F , 2. Nga s grandma did not go to T school . 3. She has an easy and happy life F when she was young . 4. There was not any modern T equipment at her time . F 5. “ The lost shoe “ is a short story - Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board While - reading (15 ms): - Turn on the tape 2 times and look at their books to read the dialogue between Nga and her Grandma to check their predictions (51). Play game in two teams. -One by one go to the board.. Listen and repeat in chorus , individually . Guess its meanings and copy down. Play game. Work in groups - Read the statements and predict. -Read their predictions - Listen to the tape and look at their books to check their predictions - Correct the false ones - work in pairs.

(52) - Ask them to correct the false statements . 1. Grandma used to love on farm 3. She had a hard life . 5. It is an old folk tale . * Comprehension : - Get Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering questions - Give feedback a. She used to live on a farm . b. Because she had to stay at home and help her Mom to look after her younger brothers and sisters . c. She used to cook the meals , clean the house and wash the clothes . d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great father used to tell stories . e.She asked her grandma to tell her the tale“The lost shoe“ - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the questions . * Fact or opinion - Have Ss read the statements part 3 and decide which is a fact and which is a pinion . Statements Fact Opinion a. I used to live on a farm . X b. There was not any electricity . X c. Mom had to do everything X without the help of modern equipment . X d. My father used to tell us stories X e. The best one was the lost shoe . X f. Traditional stories are great . - Give feedback Post – reading (6 ms) : * Survey Did you use to ................? Name Get up late. / Ride bicycle too fast . Go to school. / Eat too much candy . Forget to do your homework . - Give feedback by asking Ss some questions to check “ Who used to get up late / ride bicycle too fast ...? “ - Write it down . Consolidation (2 ms): - Retell the main points . Homework (1 m) : 1. Write the result of their survey . 2. Learn by heart new words . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 4: Speak and listen (52). Practice asking and answering the questions . Read the statements and decide which is a fact and which is a opinion. - Practice in groups Demonstrate class .. in. front. Listen and copy . - Retell the main points. - Copy down home works.. of.

(53) F/ Self- Evaluation:. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------. Period :21 Week :7. Preparing date: 03/10/2012 Teaching date: 05/10/2012 UNIT 4 : OUR PAST Lesson 2: Speak and listen. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use USED TO to talk about the things they used to do . - understand the main idea of a story by listening B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: some objects. 2. Grammar: Used to. 3. Language skills: Speaking,listening, writing, reading. (53).

(54) C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , word cards for drilling, lesson plan, poster. E/ Procedure: 1. Organization (1 m) - Greeting and ask some questions. 2. Checking up (5 ms) - Ask Ss to stand up and retell new words of last lesson.( say about the meaning, form.) - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms) Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up (5 ms) Jumbled words - rieletcicty = Electricity - rkmaet = Market - menttaenterin = Entertainment - permasuekt = Supermarket A. SPEAKING (16 ms) Pre – speaking ( 4ms) :  Recall the conversation between Nga and her grandma , then ask “ Where did Nga,s grandma always live ? “ -> She always lived on a farm . - Ask : “ Another word for always lived “ . Ask Ss to use Used to to make question and answer. While - speaking ( 8 ms): - Get Ss to work in closed pairs , then open pairs . - Ask them to compare 2 pictures , using “ USED TO “ to talk about the actions in the past , using these ideas below : 1. Where did they live in the past ? And now ? 2. How did they travel ? 3. What is about the electricity ? 4. What is about their life / work ? 5. Did children use to go to school ? 6. What is about their entertainment ? - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback . * Suggested answers : 1. People used to live in small houses . Now they live in big houses and buildings. 2. People used to walk . Now they can go by cars or motorbikes 3. Now , there is electricity everywhere . 4. People used to work hard all the time . Now they have a lot of time for entertainment . 5. Most children used to stay at home . Now , they all go to school . 6. Children used to play traditional games such as hide and seek , skip rope ... outdoors . Now , they have a lot of modern games – video games . Post - speaking (4 ms): * Write it up (54). Play games - One by one to go to the board to write. Practice reading the conversation and answer the questions Listen and copy - Practise in pairs. Practice speaking with cues Work in pairs Demonstrate in front of class - One by one. - copy down if necessary. Work individually ..

(55) - Ask Them to write a complete writing about the difference of the life in the past and now. - Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class . - Correct common mistakes . B/ LISTENING (15 ms) Pre - listening ( 4 ms): Introduce the topic of the listening task 1. Pre – teach vocabulary : - Foolish (a) : ngớ ngÈn , ngèc nghÕch - greedy ( a) : tham lam - Gold (n) : vàng ( realia ) - to lay -> laid – laid “: đẻ ( trứng) ( Picture ) - amazement (n) : ng¹c nhiªn , vui nhén * Checking : What and where 2. Prediction : - Ask Ss to predict the moral lesson of the story . - Have them look at four titles and guess which is the most suitable to the story . - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . While – listening ( 8 ms) : 1. Checking the prediction - Turn on the tape twice and ask them to check their predictions - Call on some Ss to read their results and give feed back : “ Don,t be foolish and greedy “ - Turn on the tape once more to check their results again 2. Find out the verbs in the story : - Ask Ss what tense is used in the story ( Simple past tense ) - Have Ss listen again and try to write as many verbs as possible . The student who writes more verbs get good marks - Call on some Ss to read the verbs aloud . - Give feedback: went / discovered / laid / shouted / finished / could not / were / ran / looked / wanted / decided . - Ask Ss to give the infinitives of these verbs. Post – listening ( 3ms) Ask Ss to write about the things you used to do last year . Beginning : Last year , I used to get up late . Now , I get up very early and do morning exercises . ... ... “ Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1m) 2. Do exercise in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Unit 4: Read (55). Guess meaning Listen and repeat chorus Copy down. in. Predict the moral lesson of the story Read their predictions. Listen to the tape Read their results. Aswer the questions Listen again Read the verbs aloud Copy down Write the sentences. Retell the main points Listen and copy ..

(56) F/ Self- Evaluation:. Period :22 Week :7. Preparing date: 4/10/2012 Teaching date: 6/10/2012 UNIT 4 : OUR PAST Lesson 3: Read. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand and retell the story ” the lost shoe” . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: cruel, upset, fairy,magical, rag, immediately, fall in love with 2. Grammar: 3. Language skills: reading, listening, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Techniques: Text book , word cards for drilling , cassette ,lesson plan and pictures D/ Procedures: (56).

(57) 1. Class organization ( 1m): Greeting and checking attendance 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Retell the Story “ Don’t be foolish and greedy” . - T. corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): T’ activities. Ss’ activities. * Warm up (5 ms): * Brainstorming Name some folks tales that you have read . Play games in two teams  Possible answers : - Cây tre trăm đốt ( one hundred-section bamboo ) - TÊm c¸m . / Hoµng tö Cãc ( The frog Prince ) - §«i hµi 7 dÆm ( Seven – mile shoes ) Copy some names of the - B¹ch tuyÕt vµ b¶ychó lïn ( Snow white and 7 dwarfs) stories in English . folktales. Pre – reading (10 ms) : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss . 1. Pre – teach vocabulary : - cruel (a) : độc ác , ác nghiệt - upset (a) = worried : - fairy (n) : truþÖn cæ tÝch - magical (a) -> magically (adv) : kì diệu - rag (n) ( realia ) : quần áo rách - to fall in love with : yªu - immediately (adv ) : ngay lËp tøc * Checking : R& R 2. T / F statements predictions - Ask Ss to work in groups to predict Statements Guess Key , 1. Little Pea s father is poor T farmer 2. Her father got married again T after his wife died . 3. Her new mother was beautiful F and nice to her . 4. She worked hard all day . T 5. She did not have new clothes F to take part in the festival . - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board While - reading (15 ms): 1. Checking the predictions : - Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at their (57). Listen and repeat in chorus , individually . Guess copy .. its. meanings. and. Works in pairs Play games. Work in groups. Read their predictions write. and.

(58) text books to check their predictions and correct the false ones . - Sentence 3 : Her new mother was cruel to her . - Sentence 5 : A fairy gave her beautiful clothes. - Call on 2 Ss to read the story – Correct mistakes if any. 2. Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs answering the questions - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering - Listen and give feedback a. She was a poor farmer ,s daughter . b. She made her do the chores all day . c. Before the festival started , a fairy appeared and magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes . d. He decided to marry Little Pea because the shoe fitted her e. Ss answer themselves . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class. 3. Gap filling : Complete the sentences with words from the story . - Ask Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks with suitable words from the story . - Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences aloud - Give feedback a. farmer b. died c. used d. marry /choose e. clothes f. lost Post – reading (6 ms) : * Retell the story - Have Ss work in pairs , telling the story again in details ( They can look at the statements in the gap filling exercise and add more ) - Call on some Ss to retell the story in front of class . - Correct mistakes if any . Consolidations (2 ms): - Retell the mains points of the lesson. Homework (1 m): 1. Rewrite the story . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 4: Write F/ Self- Evaluation:. (58). Listen and predictions. check. their. Read their results and correct the false ones . Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions. Work in pairs to complete the sentences Read their sentences .. complete. Listen and copy . Work in pairs to retell the story in details Demonstrate class .. in. front. Retell the mains points Do exercises at home. of.

(59) Period :23 Week :8. Preparing date: 9/10/2012 Teaching date: 11/10/2012 UNIT 4 : OUR PAST Lesson 4 : Write. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use Simple Past Tense to write a folk tale . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: wisdom, stripe, straw, servant, graze, escape. 2. Grammar: Past simple tense. 3. Language skills:Writing, speaking, reading, listening C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , eleven cards , chalks , boards ,lesson plan E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance 2. Checking up ( 5ms): (59).

(60) - Retell the story “the foolish famer and greedy wife” - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): T’ activities. Ss’ activities. Warm up (5 ms): * Chatting - Ask Ss some questions about imaginary stories 1. Do you want to read imaginary stories ? 2. Name some of them 3. Which story do you like best ? 4.Have you ever read the story “How the tigers got his stripes? Pre – writing (10 ms) : Introduce the aims of the writing and some new words . 1. Pre- teach vocabulary : - wisdom ( n) : trÝ kh«n - a stripe (n) : sọc vằn ( realia ) - a straw ( n) : rơm ( realia ) - a servant (n) : ngêi phôc vô , ®Çy tí - to graze : gặm ( cỏ) ( picture ) - to escape : trèn tho¸t * Checking : Matching A B 1. wisdom a. trèn tho¸t 2. a stripe b. đờng sọc 3. a straw c. ¨n cá , gÆm cá 4. a servant d. trÝ kh«n 5. graze e. r¬m r¹ 6. escape f . ®Çy tí - Ask Ss to come to the board to match items on the left with those on the right by drawing a line connecting the story . * Reading : - Ask Ss to read and complete the story . - Call on Ss to say the meanings of the verbs in the box . - Have them work in pairs , using suitable verbs to fill in the blanks . - Call on them to read their answers aloud . - Give feedback 1. appear 2. as 3. said 4. left 5. went 6. lit 7. burned 8. escaped * Comprehension questions : 1. Where was the man ? 2. What did the buffalo do when the tiger appeared ? 3. What did the tiger want to know ? 4. What did he do before going home ? Why ? (60). Play game Listen and copy. Listen and repeat in chorus , individually . Guess its meanings and copy. Work individually .. Read the verbs in the box and say the meanings of them .. Read the complete story ..

(61) 5. What did he do when he returned ? - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions above . While - writing (15 ms): - Get Ss to do exercise 2 . ( Ss have to imagine to be a man in order to write the story ) + Notice : Change The man -> I / His -> My - Ask Ss to work individually , then share with their partners and correct mistakes . - Take some writings to correct in front of the class. - Give suggested answers : Post – writing ( 6ms) : * Telling the story - Divide the class into 2 teams . Team A plays the role of the tiger . Team B plays the role of the buffalo - Ask them to work in team , telling the story Notice : - Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> - Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo - > Consolidation (2 ms): - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m): 1. Write the story again , imagine you are : * The tiger * The buffalo 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 5: Language focus. Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions .. Write the individually .. story. Demonstrate in front of class.. Play the roles of tiger and buffalo , telling the story . Listen and copy . Retell the main points Do exercises at home. F/ Self- Evaluation: Period :24 Week :8. Preparing date: 11/10/2012 Teaching date: 12/10/2012 UNIT 4 : OUR PAST Lesson 5: Language focus. A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - use prepositions of time and Used to ( to talk about the action which always happens in the past ) and further practice in the Past Simple Tense . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: Past simple tense. 3. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , eleven cards , chalks , boards ,lesson plan E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance (61).

(62) 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Ask Ss to imagine he/ she is a tiger or buffalo and tell the story “ How the tiger got his stripes” - Have Ss comment - T comments and give marks 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities. Ss’ activities. Warm up ( 5ms): Pelmanism - Play game run ran fly flew ride rode eat ate sit sat come came Continue until all the cards are finished . - Remind the knowledge Presentation ( 5 ms) - Ask Ss to remind the use, form of the past simple tense. - Give some examples - Ask Ss to give some examples. Practice ( 26 ms) - Have Ss to do exercises Mapped dialogue ( 10 ms) - Read the dialouge Lan : ............................lunch ? Nga : No . I ate noodles . Lan : How ................... school ? Nga : I rode a bicycle to school . Lan : Which subject did you have yesterday ? Nga : .................. math . - Paiwork Lan : .................................................? - Practice in front of class Nga : I was at home . - Ask them to work in pairs to practice the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . Correct and give feedback. * Prepositions of the time (10 ms) - Read aloud each phrase Matching - Match A B Key 1. In a. January 1.a / d 2. On b. 3 p m 2. c / e 3.At c. Wednesday 3. b / f 4. Between d. November 1997 4. f nd Read the correct phrases 5. After / Before e. July 2 5. b aloud f. 7 a m and 9 am - Call on some Ss to read aloud each phrase . - Explain the uses of some prepositions of time and ask Copy down Ss to do Exercises. Work individually .Compare - in + tháng, năm. - Before + giờ. with their partners . - on + ngày . tháng , năm. - After + giờ. Read the complete sentences - Between… + and + giữa hai giờ. - At + giờ. aloud . - Ask Ss to do exercise 3. - Ask Ss to work individually , then compare with their Copy down . partners - Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences aloud Work in pairs Practice the dialogue . (62).

(63) - Give feedback a. on b. in c. between d. at / after e. before 2. Ex 4 : Complete the dialogue ( 31 ms): - Have Ss work in pairs , looking at 4 verbs , using USED TO with the verbs “ Live – Stay – Have – be “ to complete the dialogue between Nga and Hoa . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback . 0. used to stay 2. used to be 1. used to have 3. used to live * Further practice : Deliberate mistakes - Read aloud some sentences and ask Ss to listen carefully and try to find out the mistake . When they hear a mistake , they stand up and say No then correct it Eg : T : I usually stay at home in Sunday Ss : No , on Sunday , not in Sunday . a.My father used to play football when he has spare time a. She used live in Ha noi . b. My parents will arrive in 3 o,lock . c. He was born in June the third . Consolidation (2 ms) - Retell the main contents of the lesson. Homework (1 m) : 1. Do exercises (1, 2) in textbook . 2. Do the exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson F/ Self- Evaluation: Period : 25 Week : 09. Play game ( Whole class ) Listen and copy . Retell the main contents . Do exercises at home. Preparing date: 16/10/2012 Teaching date: 18/10/2012. CORRECTING THE TEST NO 1 A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - recognize the mistakes Ss often get. - review the grammar, structure and vocabulary they’ve just learned B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 1. Grammar: Past simple tense, past simple tense - Futere with be going to - Reflexive pronouns : yourself, myself,… - Modal verbs : must, have to, ought to - Adverb of place : here, there, upstairs, down stairs,… - Adjective + too/ enough + to – infinitive - Preposition of time - Let’s - Why - because 2. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing C/ Techniques: Question-Answer, Pair work, Group work,… (63).

(64) D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalks , boards ,lesson plan E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance 2. Check up ( 5 ms) - Call some Ss to tell about the things they used to do last year. - Have Ss comment - Comment and correct the mistakes 3. New lesson ( 39 ms). Teacher’s activities. Students' activities. Warm up ( 5 ms) - Play game “ As many as possible” - Ask Ss to take out piece of paper. - Write the word “ IREGULAR VERBS “ on the board. - Inform the time limit ( 2ms) and the number of the group to be collected ( 4/ 5 first groups) - Collect Ss’ answers and correct mistakes. - Give feedback Correcting the test ( 31 ms) 1/ Comment the result of Ss’ test. - Ss in class 8A, 8D do the test quite well. - Ss in class 8G, 8B need to try much - Ss in class 8C, 8E do the test badly 2/ Give the test to Ss - Call a student to give the test to each one in the class. 3/ Praise Ss get good grades 4/ Criticize Ss not to try their best in doing the test. 5/ Tell Ss know the reason they get bad grades. - Ss don’t revise the knowledge carefully about : structure , grammar , vocabulary . - Reading and writing skills aren’t good. - Some Ss can’t distinguish the past simple and present simple. 6/ Correcting the test - Ask Ss to do the test on the board. - Have Ss correct the mistakes - T comments the answers. - T reviews some knowledge of the past simple tense, present simple tense, structure with “enough”,… - Give Ss some exercises to consolidate the knowledge. Consolidation ( 2ms) - Remind the mistakes Ss often come across and some structures have learned. Homework ( 1m) - Have Ss to redo exercises - Prepare the next lesson Unit 5 :Getting started and listen and read (64). Play game. Pay attention. Receive the test Listen carefully. Do the test aigain Pay attention. Retell. Do the exercises at home.

(65) F/ Self- Evaluation: BẢNG THỐNG KÊ KẾT QUẢ KIỂM TRA ĐỊNH KÌ MÔN : TIẾNG ANH - KHỐI : 8 LỚP. TSHS GIỎI KHÁ TB YẾU KÉM SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% 8A 35 18 51,42 9 25,71 6 17,14 2 5,71 8B 36 20 55,54 10 27,77 4 11,11 2 5,55 8C 34 21 61,76 12 35,29 1 2,94 0 0,00 8D 33 31 93,93 1 3,03 1 3,03 0 0,00 8E 35 2 5,71 10 28,57 19 54,28 1 2,85 TỔNG 173 92 53,18 42 24,28 31 17,91 5 4,6 Nhận xét, đánh giá kết quả bài kiểm tra định kì số 1 * Đánh giá : - Kết quả kiểm tra giữa các lớp không đồng đều. - Học sinh trên trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ khá cao95,4%. - Học sinh dưới trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ 4,6% - Số lượng học sinh khá, giỏi rơi vào các lớp 8A,8B, 8C, 8D . - Số lượng học sinh yếu chủ yếu ở lớp 8 E. * Nguyên nhân : - Do học lực học sinh còn yếu. - Công tác coi thi chưa nghiêm túc. * Giải pháp : - Gv cần thiết kế được nd dành cho đối tượng hs giỏi và hs yếu kém. F/ Self- Evaluation:. (65).

(66) Period : 19 Week : 08. Preparing date: 50/10/2012 Teaching date: 12/10/2012. Correcting the test no 1 A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - recognize the mistakes Ss often get. - review the grammar, structure and vocabulary they’ve just learned B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 3. Grammar: Past simple tense, past simple tense - Futere with be going to - Reflexive pronouns : yourself, myself,… - Modal verbs : must, have to, ought to - Adverb of place : here, there, upstairs, down stairs,… - Adjective + too/ enough + to – infinitive - Preposition of time - Let’s - Why - because 4. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing C/ Techniques: Question-Answer, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalks , boards ,lesson plan E/ Procedure: 2. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance 2. Check up ( 5 ms) - Call some Ss to tell about the things they used to do last year. - Have Ss comment - Comment and correct the mistakes 3. New lesson ( 39 ms). Teacher’s activities Warm up ( 5 ms) - Play game “ As many as possible” - Ask Ss to take out piece of paper. - Write the word “ IREGULAR VERBS “ on the board. - Inform the time limit ( 2ms) and the number of the group to be collected ( 4/ 5 first groups) - Collect Ss’ answers and correct mistakes. - Give feedback Correcting the test ( 31 ms) (66). Students' activities Play game. Pay attention.

(67) 1/ Comment the result of Ss’ test. - Ss in class 8A, 8D do the test quite well. - Ss in class 8G, 8B need to try much - Ss in class 8C, 8E do the test badly 2/ Give the test to Ss - Call a student to give the test to each one in the class. 3/ Praise Ss get good grades 4/ Criticize Ss not to try their best in doing the test. 5/ Tell Ss know the reason they get bad grades. - Ss don’t revise the knowledge carefully about : structure , grammar , vocabulary . - Reading and writing skills aren’t good. - Some Ss can’t distinguish the past simple and present simple. 6/ Correcting the test - Ask Ss to do the test on the board. - Have Ss correct the mistakes - T comments the answers. - T reviews some knowledge of the past simple tense, present simple tense, structure with “enough”,… - Give Ss some exercises to consolidate the knowledge. Consolidation ( 2ms) - Remind the mistakes Ss often come across and some structures have learned. Homework ( 1m) - Have Ss to redo exercises - Prepare the next lesson Unit 5 :Getting started and listen and read. Receive the test Listen carefully. Do the test aigain Pay attention. Retell. Do the exercises at home. F/ Self- Evaluation: ĐỀ KIỂM TRA MỘT TIẾT. MÔN: ENGLISH-TEST 1 (Thời gian45phút, không kể giao đề) I)Choose the world that has the underlined part pronounced differently. (1,25ms): 1.a.character b.christmas c.children d.schoold 2.a.teacher b.pleasure c.please d.read 3.a.feed b.clean c.sweep d.head 4.a.candy b.fry c.many d.happy 5.a.slim b.thin c.smile d.visit I ) Choose The Best Answer(3ms) : 1. Peter doesn’t talk much in public. He’s rather ............... a. kind b. reserved c. sociable d. humorous 2. It is safe ............. medicine in locked cupboards. a. putting b. put c.to put d. puts 3.There is a computer …………..the middle …………the room . (67).

(68) a.in/of b.in/in c.on/of d.on/in 4. I’m not going to wash your clothes. You must do it ........... a. yourself b.himself c. herself d. themselves 5We ought ……………the wardrobe in the corner opposite the bed a.put b.putting c. puts d.to put 6. he is………………. .. to ride a motorbike. a .not old enough b.enough not old c.not enough old d.enough old 7. I……… a letter from my old friend last week. a.sent b.gave c.received d.took 8.He is tall and thin . He has ……………………..hair a.black curly short b.short curly black c.curly short black d.short black curly 9.Nam has to leave to study his room every day . a.should b.must c.ought to d.need to 10.The sun always ………….in the East and ………….in the west a.rise/ set b. rises/set c.rise/sets d.rises/ sets 11.We must put all the small objects such as beads out …….. children’s reach a. of b. in c.on d.to 12.Boys and girls , you’ll have to do this experiment ………………this afternoon . a. yourselves b.yourself c. himself d. herself II) Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form tense.(1,5ms) 1.The earth (circle)……………..the sun once very 365 days . 2.We (watch)……………….an interesting action movie on the weekend. 3.He (visit)…………………HCM city last summer . III) Read the passage carefully and answer the following questions Alexander Graham Bell was born in Scotland. He emigrated to Canada first and then to the USA in 1870s. In America, he worked with deaf – mutes at Boston University. Soon, Bell started experimenting with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance. He worked with Thomas Watson, his assistant. Bell and Watson conducted many experiments. He sucessfully demonstrated his invention to the public at countless exhibitions, he invented the telephone. By 1877 the first telephone was in commercial use. A.True or False: (0,75m) True or False 1.Thomas Watson was Bell’s assistant . 2He worked with deaf-mute patients in a hospital in Boston. 3.Bell experimented with way of transmitting speech over a long distance . B.Question(2ms) 1,Where was Alexander Graham Bell born ? …………………………………………………………………………..…………….. 2,Where did he emigrate in 1870s ? …………………………………………………………………………….….……….. 3,What did Bell invent ? ……………………………………………………………………………….……….. 4,When was the first telephone in commercial use ? ………………………………………………………………………………..……….. IV)Rewrite each sentence keeping the same meaning (1,5ms) (68).

(69) 1.your little brother can’t study in this school because he is still young . Your little brother isn’t …………..…………………………..…….…………………. 2.Her hair is short ,curly and blond . She has ……………………………………………………….….…….…….……….. 3I intend to come over to pick you up. I am ………………………………………………………….……….……………… --- THE END---. ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA MỘT TIẾT SỐ 1 MÔN : TIẾNG ANH – LỚP 8 / NĂM HỌC : 2011 – 2012 I ) (12 x 0,25 = 3ms ) 1B 2C 3.B 4.D II ) ( 10 x 0,25 = 2,5 ms ) 1 was 2 is 3 has 10 doesn’t like. 5.B 6.B 7.A 8.D. 9.A 10.B 11. C 12. D. 4 went 5 to visit 6 travelled. 7 saw 8 thinks 9 is. III ) ( 5 x 0,5 = 2,5 ms ) 1. He was born in Scotland. 2. He emigrated to USA in 1870s. 3. No. He worked with deaf – mutes at Boston University. 4. He invented the telephone. 5. The first telephone in commercial use by 1877. (69).

(70) IV ) ( 4 x 0,5 = 2 ms ) 1. This is my bedroom. 2. There is a desk on ( to ) the left of the room. 3. The bed is near the desk. 4. On the right side of the room there is a window.. MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA ĐỊNH KÌ SỐ 1 MÔN : TIẾNG ANH 8 Năm học : 2011 – 2012 NHẬN BIẾT. THÔNG HIỂU. CHỦ ĐỀ TN TL TN TL Present simple tense Chủ đề 1: - Past simple My tense friends - Adjective + enough+ toinfinitive - Vocabulary Số câu 16 câu Số điểm 4 Tỉ lệ % điểm Read Chủ đề 2: pasage Making and arrangeme answer nts questions Số câu 5 câu Số điểm 2,5 Tỉ lệ % điểm - Reflexive Chủ đề 3: pronouns At home - Modals Whybecause - Vocabulary Số câu 6 câu Số điểm 1,5 Tỉ lệ % điểm 22 câu 5 câu TỔNG 5,5 2,5 (70). VẬN DỤNG CẤP ĐỘ CẤP THẤP CAO TN TL TN. ĐỘ TỔNG TL. 16 câu 4đ= 40 %. 5 câu 2,5 đ= 25% Write sentence using the given cues 4 câu 2 diểm 4 câu 2. 10 câu 3,5 đ = 35 % 31 câu 10 đ=.

(71) điểm. Period : 25 Week : 09. điểm. điểm. Preparing date: 16/10/2012 Teaching date: 18/10/2012. CORRECTING THE TEST NO 1 A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - recognize the mistakes Ss often get. - review the grammar, structure and vocabulary they’ve just learned B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 5. Grammar: Past simple tense, past simple tense - Futere with be going to - Reflexive pronouns : yourself, myself,… - Modal verbs : must, have to, ought to - Adverb of place : here, there, upstairs, down stairs,… - Adjective + too/ enough + to – infinitive - Preposition of time - Let’s - Why - because 6. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing C/ Techniques: Question-Answer, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalks , boards ,lesson plan (71). 100 %.

(72) E/ Procedure: 3. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance 2. Check up ( 5 ms) - Call some Ss to tell about the things they used to do last year. - Have Ss comment - Comment and correct the mistakes 3. New lesson ( 39 ms) Teacher’s activities Students' activities Warm up ( 5 ms) - Play game “ As many as possible” - Ask Ss to take out piece of paper. - Write the word “ IREGULAR VERBS “ on the board. - Inform the time limit ( 2ms) and the number of the group to be collected ( 4/ 5 first groups) - Collect Ss’ answers and correct mistakes. - Give feedback Correcting the test ( 31 ms) 1/ Comment the result of Ss’ test. - Ss in class 8A, 8D do the test quite well. - Ss in class 8G, 8B need to try much - Ss in class 8C, 8E do the test badly 2/ Give the test to Ss - Call a student to give the test to each one in the class. 3/ Praise Ss get good grades 4/ Criticize Ss not to try their best in doing the test. 5/ Tell Ss know the reason they get bad grades. - Ss don’t revise the knowledge carefully about : structure , grammar , vocabulary . - Reading and writing skills aren’t good. - Some Ss can’t distinguish the past simple and present simple. 6/ Correcting the test - Ask Ss to do the test on the board. - Have Ss correct the mistakes - T comments the answers. - T reviews some knowledge of the past simple tense, present simple tense, structure with “enough”,… - Give Ss some exercises to consolidate the knowledge. Consolidation ( 2ms) - Remind the mistakes Ss often come across and some structures have learned. Homework ( 1m) - Have Ss to redo exercises - Prepare the next lesson Unit 5 :Getting started and listen and read (72). Play game. Pay attention. Receive the test Listen carefully. Do the test aigain Pay attention. Retell. Do the exercises at home.

(73) F/ Self- Evaluation:. BẢNG THỐNG KÊ KẾT QUẢ KIỂM TRA ĐỊNH KÌ MÔN : TIẾNG ANH - KHỐI : 8 LỚP. TSHS GIỎI KHÁ TB YẾU KÉM SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% 8A 35 18 51,42 9 25,71 6 17,14 2 5,71 8B 36 20 55,54 10 27,77 4 11,11 2 5,55 8C 34 21 61,76 12 35,29 1 2,94 0 0,00 8D 33 31 93,93 1 3,03 1 3,03 0 0,00 8E 35 2 5,71 10 28,57 19 54,28 1 2,85 TỔNG 173 92 53,18 42 24,28 31 17,91 5 4,6 Nhận xét, đánh giá kết quả bài kiểm tra định kì số 1 * Đánh giá : - Kết quả kiểm tra giữa các lớp không đồng đều. - Học sinh trên trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ khá cao95,4%. - Học sinh dưới trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ 4,6% - Số lượng học sinh khá, giỏi rơi vào các lớp 8A,8B, 8C, 8D . - Số lượng học sinh yếu chủ yếu ở lớp 8 E. * Nguyên nhân : - Do học lực học sinh còn yếu. - Công tác coi thi chưa nghiêm túc. * Giải pháp : - Gv cần thiết kế được nd dành cho đối tượng hs giỏi và hs yếu kém. Period : 26 Week : 09. Preparing date: 16/10/2012 Teaching date: 18/10/2012 Lesson 1:. UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS Getting started & Listen and read. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand the dialogue between Jim and his Mom about his study . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: - a report card, pronunciation, (to)improve, be proud of, promise, to try one,s best 2. Grammar: Adverbs of manner, madal verbs, should, commands 3. Language skills: listening, reading, speaking, writing C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , eleven cards , chalks , boards ,lesson plan (73).

(74) E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up : 3. New lesson (44 ms): Teacher’s activities Ss’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): * Net work :Ask Ss to write as many subjects as they can on the blackboard subjects at school. Work in groups to play games. * Possible answers : Chemistry / Physics / maths / geography / literature / history . - Lead in the new lesson by Chatting Pre - reading ( 10 ms): - What subjects are you good at ? / bad at ? - What subject do you like best ? / Why ? - How often do you have maths ? / Literature..? 1. Pre- teach vocabulary : - a report card ( realia ): phiếu báo điểm - pronunciation ( mime ) (n) : cách phát âm, ngữ âm - (to) improve ( situation ): cải thiện, trau dồi - (to) be proud of : tự hào - (to) promise: hứa. , - to try one s best : cố gắng hết sức * Checking : Rub out and remember * Statements predictions : - Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are true or false . Statements Guess Key 1. Tim was out when his mother F called him . 2. Tim,s mother met his teacher at F school . 3. Tim,s report is poor . F 4. Tim needs to improve his Spanish T grammar 5. Tim promised to try his best in T learning Spanish . - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . While – reading ( 20 ms) : - Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books , (74). Read the answers aloud.. Chat the questions .. Listen and repeat in chorus , individually . Copy down Play game. Work individually. Read their predictions aloud . Listen and read the dialogue to check their predictions ..

(75) then read the dialogue to check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to read their results . - Give feedback : - Ask Ss to correct false statements . 1. Tim was in the living room / at home 2. his report is excellent 3. He needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class . - Listen and correct their pronunciation if any . * Comprehension questions : - Ask Ss to work in pairs , answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . - Give feedback . a. She is Tim,s teacher . b. She gave Tim,s mother his report card . c. He worked really hard . d. She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation . e. She gave him a dictionary - Ask them to practice in open pairs . Post - reading ( 6ms): * Survey : Ask Ss to work in groups by standing to ask each other the question “ What subject do you need to improve ? “ and they have to write the names and the subjects that their friends answer : Name What subject Lan History …………. ……….. - Ask Ss who need to improve the same subjects work in group and discuss how to improve . Consolidation ( 2 ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m): 1. Write the way how to improve the subject that they are not good at . 2. Prepare the next lesson Unit 5: Speak and listen F/ Self- Evaluation:. (75). Correct false ones . Read them aloud Practice pairs .. the. dialogue. in. Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions .. Open pairs. - Asks each other: What subjects do you need to improve ? Work in groups Retell th main points Do exercise at home.

(76) Period : 27 Week : 09. Preparing date: 17/10/2012 Teaching date: 19/10/2012 UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS Lesson 2: Speak and listen. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - talk about their study habits . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Behavior, cooperation, satisfactory ≠ unsatisfactory, comment., signature. 2. Grammar: Conditional sentence. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. (76).

(77) 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks Ss retell sme mains subjects at school. - Some pairs ask and answer about their subjects S1: How often do we have music ? S2: We have music 2times aweek. => T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms) T’ activities Ss’ activities. Warm up ( 5 ms) : * Brainstorming - Ask Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard . * Possible answers : - Speak English to friends in class - Watch English TV - Do grammar exercises - Read English stories - Read English newspapers / magazines - Listen to the English radio program. Do Exercises. Work in groups to play games .. Read EL stories. Read all the ways of improving English .. How Howtotoimprove improveyour yourEnglish English??. Copy in their notebooks . A/ SPEAKING (16 ms): Pre – speaking ( 3ms) : Introduce the topic of the speaking . - Call on some Ss to read the possible answers above and copy down . - Have Ss read the questions and words in the boxes. While – speaking (8 ms): - Asks Ss work in groups of three or four .in the tables. Ask each other about your studies.Use the questions and words in the boxes to help them. 1. When do you do your homework? ( after school / after dinner / late at night / … ) 2. Who helps you with your homework? ( your parents / your brother / your sisters / a friend …) - Asks Ss do exercises in the text books in page 48 . - T gets feedback. Call some pairs to talk loudly. - Others listening. * Model : Lan said she did her homework after dinner He / she said ……… - Call on some pairs to read the model - Ask Ss to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class. - Correct mistakes if any . Post - speaking ( 5 ms): - Ask Ss to write with information above . Eg : Lan ,s elder brother helps him with his homework - Call on some Ss to read their writings . *B/ LISTENING ( 15 ms) Pre – listening( 4ms) : - Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words Pre – teach vocabulary : - behavior (n) : cách ứng xử, hành vi. (trans..). (77). Listen and read the model , then copy Work in groups. Practice in front of class. Read their writings. - works in pairs . - copy down some keys if necessary. - Write with these informations - Some pairs to practise. Listen and repeat individually .. Copy down .. in. chorus. and.

(78) - participant (n) : người tham gia, sự tham gia - Satisfactory (adj) >< unsatisfactory (adj) thoải mái, hài lòng, toại nguyện > < không thoải mái,… - co-operation (n) : sự hợp tác - attendance (n) : số người có mặt, - (to)appreciate :đánh giá cao, cảm kích, hiểu rõ giá trị * Checking vocabulary: What and where While - listening (6 ms): * Listen : - Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction - Call on Ss to read their results and give feedback . 1. 87 days present 2. 5 days absent 3. participation : Spanish pronunciation 4. Listening : Comprehension 5. Speaking : A 6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B * Comprehension questions : - Ask Ss to answer some questions about Nga,s report card 1. Who are Nga,s parents ? 2. What is Nga,s teacher,s name ? 3. What subject was reported ? For what term ? 4. What are the comments ? 5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA B CD ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work in pairs to answer the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback . Post – listening( 5ms) : ** Survey: Questions You Your partner 1. When do you do your homework ? 2. Who helps you with your homework? 3. How much time do you spend on Maths / English / History / Literature ? 4Which subject do you need toimprove? 5. What do you do to improve your English?. Play game. Predict and compare with their partners .. Report their predictions . Listen to the tape and check their predictions Read their results . Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions .. Practice asking questions. and. Report their survey .. - Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners questions and taking notes of the answers . - Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report what they have known about their partners, study . - Correct mistakes if any . Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the mains points of this lesson .( Some Ss to retell) Homework ( 1m): 1. Copy the effective ways of learning English they have found out . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 5: Read F/ Self- Evaluation:. (78). Retell the mains points. Do exercises at home. answering. the.

(79) Period : 30 Week : 10. Preparing date: 23/10/2012 Teaching date: 25/10/2012 UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS Lesson 4: Write. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know the format of a friendly letter and practice writing a letter to a friend . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: heading, opening, closing, lunar new year. 2. Grammar: request in repoted speech. 3. Language skills: writing, reading, speaking, listening C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbook , chalks , boards,lesson plan, posters …. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance 2. Checking up ( 15ms): -Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to retell the new words and meaning of these words. Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 29 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 2ms): * Chatting 1. Have you ever written to someone ? 2. To whom do you usually write ? 3. What do you often write about ? - Lead in new lesson . Pre - writing (8 ms): Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss . Pre – teach vocabulary : - Lunar New Year Festival ( explanation ): tết âm lịch - Enjoyable (adj ) : vui thú, thích thú, vui (79). Play games Listen and copy down. Listen and repeat in chorus , individually ..

(80) thích. - (to) celebrate : kỉ niệm, tổ chức kỉ niệm -> celebration (n): lệ kỉ niệm - Mid-Autumn Festival (n) : tết trung thu - Moon festival( n) : lệ hội mừng trăng * Checking : Rub out and remember Ordering: - Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the correct order. a. Opening d. Body of the letter b. Closing e. Signature c. The date f . Writer,s address . - Give feedback 1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e - Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order . Labeling : - Ask Ss to label each section with the correct letter . Comprehension questions - Have Ss work in pairs and answer some questions a. Who wrote the letter ? To whom ? b. What are there in the heading ? c. What is the main part of the letter ? d. What did Hoa receive a few days ago ? e. What subject is Hoa good at ? f. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New Year Festival ? - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of class . While - writing ( 12 ms): - Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write a letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco , using the given information . - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class . * Suggested letter : 15 Quang Trung street Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 Dear Donna Thanks for your letter . I am glad to hear you had an interesting Mother,s Day . We have received our second semester report last month . I got good grades for Geography , Physics and Math but my English and History results were poor . My teacher advises me to improve English and History . I think I have to study harder next school year . In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the mid Autumn festival . That is an Autumn moon festival in Vietnam . This afternoon , I am going to Ha Long Bay (80). Copy down . Play games .. Do the exercise individually . Read and check . Label each section with the correct letter . Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions .. practice asking and answering Imagine and write the a letter individually . demonstrate their writings - Share with their partners.

(81) with my aunt and uncle by bus and I am going to stay ther with them until the festival comes . I will send you a postcard from there . Write soon and tell me all your news . Best Lan , Post - writing ( 4 ms): Correction - Call on Ss to read aloud their letters and correct the mistakes . Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson .. 1. 2. 3. 4.. Read their letters aloud . Copy down . - Retell the mains points of this lesson.. Homework ( 1 m) Write a letter to your friend to tell him / her - Copy dowm homeworks about your second semester report and about Summer holiday . Learn by heart vocabulary and mains structure grammar. Redo all exercises of language focus . Prepare for next lesson Unit 5: Write. F/ Self- Evaluation:. Period : 28 Week : 09. Preparing date: 18/10/2012 Teaching date: 20/10/2012 UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS Lesson 3 : Read. A /Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand the text and get specific information .. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: come across, mother tongue, revise, meaning, highlight…… 2. Grammar: simple present. 3. Language skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks, lesson plans,posters…. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organizations ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialoguge . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): (81).

(82) T’ activities. Ss’ activities. Warm up ( 5ms) : * Chatting 1. Do you like English ? 2. How many new words do you try to learn a day ? 3. What do you do when you read a new words ? 4. How do you learn / remember new words ? - Call on Ss to practice asking and answering the questions above . - Correct and lead in the new lesson . Pre - reading ( 10 ms): Introduce the topic of the reading passage and some new words . * Pre- teach vocabulary : - (a) Mother tongue ( example ): tiếng mẹ đẻ -(to )underline ( example ): g¹ch díi, g¹ch ch©n. - (to) highlight ( example ): lµm næi bËt. -( to) come across ( synonym ) = run in to : gÆp t×nh cê. - (to) stick ( mime ): d¸n , dÝnh , cµi… * Checking : * Slap the board * Prediction: Brainstorming - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the ways how a language learner can learn new words . While - reading ( 15 ms): 1/ Reading the text - Read the text - Ask Ss to read the text again ( each S reads a section) 2/ Checking the prediction * Possible answers : - Learn by heart - Translate it into mother tongue - Write each word on one piece of paper and put it into the pocket to learn whenever - Learn through example sentences - Write it on small piece of paper and stick everywhere in the house ……. Post – reading( 6 ms) : - Ask Ss to work in group in 6, find more and discuss the ways to learn new word. - Have groups impare the result with other groups - Call some group to present in front of the class. - Comment and give feedback. Consolidation ( 2ms): (82). Answer the question Practice asking and answering the question Listen and copy .. Listen and repeat in chorus , individually . Copy down . Play games Work in pairs Read the text. Report and copy the answers .. Groupwork Share the result. Retell the questions Do exercises at home.

(83) - Retell the main points of the lesson . Homework ( 1m): 1. Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you . 2. Prepare the next lesson Unit 5: Read ( con’t) F/ Self- Evaluation:. Period : 29 Week : 10. Preparing date: 21/10/2012 Teaching date: 23/10/2012 UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS Lesson 3 : Read ( continue ). A /Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand the text and get specific information .. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: simple present. 3. Language skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks, lesson plans,posters…. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organizations ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to write vocabulary and read the text (83).

(84) - Have Ss comment - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. T’ activities. Ss’ activities. Warm up ( 5ms) : - Play game : “ review new word “ - T gives a word on the board and underline the last letter - Ask Ss to write the word beginning underlined word. Ex : pen  nice  egg … Pre - reading ( 10 ms): - Ask Ss to practice reading the text again. - Call some Ss to read the text. While - reading ( 15 ms): - Ask Ss to do some following exercises 1. True / False statements - Ask Ss to read the statements , then read the text and decide which is true and which is false . ( Page 50 ) - Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback a. F b. T c . F d . T * Reading : - Call on 2 or 3 Ss to read the passage aloud . 2. Comprehension questions - Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - Give feedback a. No . They learn words in different ways . b. Because they help them to remember the use of new words . c. They write examples , put the words and their meanings on stickers , underline or highlight them . d. They may think they can not do so . Instead , they learn only important words . e. Revision is necessary in learning words . f. Learners should try different ways of learning words t find out what is the best . Post – reading( 6 ms) : * Survey - Ask Ss to work in groups to interview one another and tick the ways they have used to learn new words (84). Play the game. Read the text. Work in pairs Read the answer. Pair work Practice asking and answering the questions. Give answer. Copy down. Group work.

(85) Ways of learning words Lan Hoa ... 1. Make a list of words , their Work in groups . meanings and learn them by heart . 2. Write sample sentences with new words 3. Stick new words somewhere in the house . 4. Underline or highlight the words 5. Read stories in English . 6. Learn words through Retell the questions songs . - Call on Ss to report about their groups . Ex : Lan learns words by making a list of words Copy down homeworks …. Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of the lesson . Homework ( 1m): 1. Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you . 2. Prepare the next lesson Unit 5: Write F/ Self- Evaluation:. Period : 30 Week : 10. Preparing date: 23/10/2012 Teaching date: 25/10/2012 UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS Lesson 4: Write. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know the format of a friendly letter and practice writing a letter to a friend . B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: heading, opening, closing, lunar new year. 5. Grammar: request in repoted speech. 6. Language skills: writing, reading, speaking, listening C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbook , chalks , boards,lesson plan, posters …. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance 2. Checking up ( 15ms): -Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to retell the new words and meaning of these words. Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 29 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities (85).

(86) Warm up ( 2ms): * Chatting 1. Have you ever written to someone ? 2. To whom do you usually write ? 3. What do you often write about ? - Lead in new lesson . Pre - writing (8 ms): Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss . Pre – teach vocabulary : - Lunar New Year Festival ( explanation ): tết âm lịch - Enjoyable (adj ) : vui thú, thích thú, vui thích. - (to) celebrate : kỉ niệm, tổ chức kỉ niệm -> celebration (n): lệ kỉ niệm - Mid-Autumn Festival (n) : tết trung thu - Moon festival( n) : lệ hội mừng trăng * Checking : Rub out and remember Ordering: - Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the correct order. a. Opening d. Body of the letter b. Closing e. Signature c. The date f . Writer,s address . - Give feedback 1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e - Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order . Labeling : - Ask Ss to label each section with the correct letter . Comprehension questions - Have Ss work in pairs and answer some questions a. Who wrote the letter ? To whom ? b. What are there in the heading ? c. What is the main part of the letter ? d. What did Hoa receive a few days ago ? e. What subject is Hoa good at ? f. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New Year Festival ? - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of class . While - writing ( 12 ms): - Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write a letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco , using the given information . - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class . * Suggested letter : (86). Play games Listen and copy down. Listen and repeat in chorus , individually . Copy down . Play games .. Do the exercise individually . Read and check . Label each section with the correct letter . Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions .. practice asking and answering Imagine and write the a letter individually . demonstrate their writings - Share with their partners.

(87) 15 Quang Trung street Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 Dear Donna Thanks for your letter . I am glad to hear you had an interesting Mother,s Day . We have received our second semester report last month . I got good grades for Geography , Physics and Math but my English and History results were poor . My teacher advises me to improve English and History . I think I have to study harder next school year . In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the mid Autumn festival . That is an Autumn moon festival in Vietnam . This afternoon , I am going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus and I am going to stay ther with them until the festival comes . I will send you a postcard from there . Write soon and tell me all your news . Best Lan , Post - writing ( 4 ms): Correction - Call on Ss to read aloud their letters and correct the mistakes . Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson . 5. 6. 7. 8.. Read their letters aloud . Copy down . - Retell the mains points of this lesson.. Homework ( 1 m) Write a letter to your friend to tell him / her - Copy dowm homeworks about your second semester report and about Summer holiday . Learn by heart vocabulary and mains structure grammar. Redo all exercises of language focus . Prepare for next lesson Unit 5: Write. F/ Self- Evaluation:. (87).

(88) Period : 31 Week : 10. Preparing date: 25/10/2012 Teaching date: 27/10/2012 UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS Lesson 5: Language focus. A / Objectives: :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use adverb of manner, modal, commands, requests, and advice in reported speech B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: adverbs of manner, should, commands, request, advice in reported speech. 3. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , lesson plan, posters. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organizations ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks Ss retell the new words of last lesson. - T . corrects and give them marks. 3 . New lesson ( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities (88).

(89) Warm up (5 ms): * Pelmanism good warm bad fast badly rode eat ate sit sat - Explain the meanings and uses of them + Hard (a) and hard ( adv ) have different meanings . Presentation ( 10 ms) 1. Adverbs of manner . - Setting the scene “ Use any word from the game Pelmanism to complete the following sentences “ * Form : S + V + a / an + adjective + noun or : S + be + Adjective S + V + adverb * Use : Adj modifies the noun after it / the subject Adv modifies the verb of the sentence . Exercise : Complete the dialogues - Ask Ss to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback . 1. hard 2. fast 3. badly 4. softly - Ask ss to practice the dialogue in open pairs . 3. Commands , requests in reported speech - Explain the form of the reported speech : * Form : To ask / tell + someone + to do something + Example : a. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary ? “ => Mr Jackson asked me to give you this dictionary b. “ Please give Tim this dictionary . “ => Miss Jackson told me to give you this dictionary * Exercise 3 : Explain the situation to Ss - Have Ss work in pairs to do exercise . - Call on some pairs to read their answers aloud , then go to the board to write them on . - Give feedback a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait for her outside her office b. Miss Jackson told me to give you your report card for this semester . c. Miss Jackson asked me to help you with your Spanish pronunciation . d. Miss Jackson told me to meet her next week . - Call on some Ss to practice is pairs and correct their pronunciations . 4. Advice in reported speech - Explain the form of it (89). Play games. Listen and copy down. Work in pairs Demonstrate in front of class .. - Pay attention Listen and give examples .. Pairwork. Practice in pairs.

(90) * Form : S + said ( that ) + S + should + V ... Example : Miss Jackson said , “ Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation . “ => Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronunciation . Exercise 4 : - Ask Ss to work with their partners . - Call on some Ss to practice in pairs and correct pronunciation . - Give feedback a. Miss Jackson said you should spend more time on Spanish pronunciation . b. Miss Jackson said you should practice speaking Spanish every day . c . Miss Jackson said you should listen to Spanish conversation on TV . d. Miss Jackson you should practice reading aloud passage in Spanish . e. Miss Jackson said you should use this dictionary to find out how to pronounce Spanish words . Consolidation ( 2 ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson Homework ( 1 m) : 1. Review command , requests and advice in Reported Speech 2. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks. 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 6: Getting started and listen and read. F/ Self- Evaluation:. (90). Pay attention Read the examples aloud. Work in pairs Practice in front of class . Some Ss come to the board to write them on. Copy and read the examples aloud. Retell the main points. Do exercises at home.

(91) Period : 32 Week : 11. Preparing date: 28/10/2012 Teaching date: 30/10/2012 UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read. A /Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand the dialogue about the young pioneers . - use the simple present tense with future meaning. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: - Some words of this period. 2. Grammar : - The present simple with future meaning. - Gerunds. - Modals: may, can, could. 3. Language skills : Listening, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbook , 5 cards for drill , Cassette, posters, lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up( 5ms): - Asks 2 Ss to retell the new words and their meaning . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms) : Teacher’s activities Students,activities (91).

(92) Warm up ( 5ms): * Chatting Ask Ss some questions about their activities and their summer holidays . 1. What do you often do on your summer holiday ? 2.Are you members of the Young Pioneers & Youth Organization ? 3. Are there any activity programs for the summer ? 4. Do you take part in them ? 5. What activity do you like most ? Presentation ( 10 ms): Introduce the topic of the lesson and some new words to Ss . * Pre – teach vocabulary : -( to ) enroll ( translation ) : đăng kí vào, ghi danh. - Answer application form ( visual ) - Out door activities : Games that you play in the open air rather than in a building or a house such as : football, tennis,.... - Hobby (n) : sở thích (Revision) - Acting (n) : (revision) * Checking : Rub out and remember Practice ( 15 ms) Listen and read the dialogue : - Set the scene “ Nga is a student in grade eight . She wants to enroll in the activities for the summer . “ - Ask Ss to listen and read the dialogue at the same time. - Get Ss to work in pairs and complete Nga,s particulars . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class. - Give feedback * Name : Pham Thi Nga * Date of birth : April 22 , 1989 * Home address : 5 Tran Phu Street * Sex : Female * Phone number : Not available * Interest : Drawing , outdoor , activities , acting - Ask Ss some questions : + What is her name ? + When was she born ? + What does she live ? + What are her hobbies ? - Call on some Ss to answer the questions . * Concept checking : - What is after “ likes “ ? -> drawing - What is after “ enjoys “ ? -> acting - What do you call “ drawing “ and “ acting “ -> gerund - What is the form of “ gerund “ ? -> V- ing - When do we use “ gerund “ ? - > after some verbs : like , love , enjoy , hate , mind . (92). Chatting ( whole class ). Listen and repeat in chorus and individually , then copy. Play game Listen to the tape Read the dialogue Work in pairs Report their results in front of class. Answer the questions ( whole class ). Listen and copy form . Then practice. the.

(93) * Form Like , love , enjoy , hate + gerund * Drill : word cue drill - Prepare 5 cards with these cues on them : a. play soccer / volley ball b. watch TV / listen to music c. read books / do homework d. Chat with friends / do the housework e. Cook meal / decorate the house . => What are your hobbies ? I like / love playing soccer and volleyball . - Call on Ss to practice asking and answering - Correct mistakes if any . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue . Production ( 6ms) * Survey. Practice reading dialogue in pairs .. - Ask Ss to copy down the chart and work in groups of three Work in groups to ask their friends and tick on the chart .. Do you like ?. Nam Mai , love like don t like love like don,t like hate hate. - play soccer - washing up - cooking meals performing music gathering broken glasses Retell the main points. - watching TV play badminton - Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends, Do exercises at home. hobbies . Consolidation - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1m): 1. Write about their friend,s hobbies . - Learn vocabulary, main structure Grammar by heart 2. Prepare the next lesson Unit 6: Speak and listen F/ Self- Evaluation:. (93). the.

(94) Period : 33 Week : 11. Preparing date: 31/10/2012 Teaching date: 01/11/2012 UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Lesson 2: Speak and listen. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - ask for favors and respond to favors . offer and respond to assistance . - develop Ss’ speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: Modals, asking for favors, offering assistance, the present/ past simple. 3. Language skills: Listening, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids: Cut out shark , cut out girl / boy , textbook , lesson plan,posters. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendances 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Retell the model sentences. - Two others to go to the board to read again dialouge. - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): * Shark, s attack - Cut out a shark and a school girl / boy from card Play game in two teams - Draw some steps , then stick the cut out girl / boy on the top of the steps , the sharks in the sea . - Draw 5 gaps for the word – favor . A/ SPEAKING ( 16 ms) Pre - speaking ( 4 ms) (94).

(95) - Ask Ss the meanings of the word FAVOR + What do you say to ask for a favor ? Can you help me ? Could you do me a favor ? Can / Could you ………..? + When do you ask for favor ? Need some help + How do you say to respond to favor ? Certainly / Of course / sure No problem + What does the receptionist say ? May I help you ? + What is for ? For offering assistance + another way to offer assistance ? Do you need any help ? / Let me help you . + How do you say to respond to assistance ? Yes . No , thank you . -Ask Ss to copy down the following phrases Asking for favor Responding for favor * Can / Could you * Certainly / of course / sure help me please ? * Could you do * No problem me a favor ? * I need a favor * What can I do for you ? * Can /could * How can I help you ? you ..? * I am sorry . I am really busy Offering Responding to assistance assistance * May I help you ? * Yes / No . Thank you * Do you need any * Yes . That is very kind of help ? you . * Let me help * No . thank you . I am fine . you . I can manage . - Ask Ss to repeat chorally and then individually all the phrases in the chart . While - speaking ( 8 ms): * Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogues - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Correct pronunciation if any . * Use the appropriate phrases to make similar dialogues about some of the following situations with a partner. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback (95). Listen and practice asking and answering the questions -Work in pairs. Listen and copy -Work individually. - Practice in pairs. - Copy down notebooks. on. their. Repeat chorally individually. ,. -Work individually. -Practice the dialogue. Work in pairs - Make similar dialogues. Work in pairs.

(96) Post - speaking (4 ms) : * Situation : A receptionist wants to help a tourist who needs to go to the nearest bank Receptionist : ……………………………? Tourist : Yes . Can you ……………..? Receptionist : Sure . Turn right when you get out of the hotel . Turn left at the first corner .... your right . Touris:…………………… - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make the dialogue and move around the class and help Ss . - Call on some Ss to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Let Ss listen to the song for fun . B/ LISTENING ( 15 ms) Pre - listening ( 4ms): Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words to Ss . * Pre – teach vocabulary - to unite : đoàn kết, hợp nhất, kết hợp ( trans) - peace (n) > < war (n) : chiến tranh , hòa bình - (to) shout out (st) : nói to (action) - hold hand (v) : nắm tay. (action) - … From place to place …: từ nơi này đến nơi khác… + Land: (revision) + World: (revision) + South: (revision) + North: (revision) * Guess the missing words - Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the song - Get them to share with their partners and report their predictions .Then write them on the board . While - listening ( 7 ms): - Turn on the tape 3 times and ask Ss to check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to read their results - Give feedback Children of our land unite Let,s sing for peace , Let,s sing for right . Let,s sing for the love between north and south , Oh, children of our land , unite . Children of the world hold hands . Let,s show our love from place to place . Let,s shout out loud , Let,s make a stand , Oh , children of the world , hold hands . -Turn on the tape once more to check the results again . Post - listening ( 4ms): - Ask Ss to work in groups to learn how to sing the (96). Closed pairs. - Move around the class and to make the dialogues. Practice the dialogues in front of class Listen to a song. Listen and copy down Work in groups to guess the missing words in the song .. Report their predictions.. Listen to the tape and check their predictions Read their answers .. Listen and check the results again.

(97) song + Ss listen to the tape and repeat in chorally . - Call on some Ss from each groups to sing a song. Consolidations ( 2ms): -Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1m) : 1. Learn by heart the expressions to offer assistance and favor and how to respond them . 2. Write the dialogue between you and a tourist who lost money . - Prepare for next lesson Unit 6: Read. Learn how to sing - Some Ss of each group to sing a song. Retell the main points Do exercise at home. F/ Self- Evaluation: Period : 34 Week : 11. Preparing date: 01/11/2012 Teaching date: 03/11/2012 UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Lesson 3: Read. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know the history and aim of the Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union - understand the text about the genaral idea and the details. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: encourage, citizenship, be founded, officially, movement, awareness, aim, principles, personality. 2. Grammar: Past simple, 3. Language skills: Reading, listening, writing, speaking C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , poster of T /F statements , lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to retell the new words . - The whole class sing a song of last lesson. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities Warm up ( 5 ms) helping blind people HCM Y & Y. Students,activities cleaning up Play game. activities. take part in sport Pre- reading ( 10 ms) 1. Set the scene: Chatting (97).

(98) ? Do you know which organizations for the youth? ? Have you ever heard “ HCM Communist Youth Union? ? When was the Youth Union founded ? ? What’s the Youth Union’s activities aim ? 2. Pre- teach vocabulary : - encourage ( v) : khuyến khích - citizentship (n): quyền công dân - be founded (v): được thành lập - offficially (adv) : chính thức - movement ( n) : phong trào - aim ( n): mục đích - awareness ( n): nhận thức - personality ( n): nhân cách - principles ( n): nguyên tắc * Checking vocabulary : Matching 3. Multiple choice 1. HCM Communist Youth Union is an organization for Vietnamese Youth from…….. A. 15 to 30 years of age C. 50 to 60 years of age B. 10 to 20 years of age D. 30 to 55 years of age 2. The Union was founded on ………. A. March 20 1931 C. March 22 1931 B. March 26 1931 D. March 23 1931 3. the aims of the HCM Communist Youth Union is….. A. Buiding good character B. Loving for the nation C. Encouraging good citizenship, soft skills and personal fitness D. All of them While reading ( 15 ms) - Ask Ss to listen and read the text then check prediction - Ask them to correct false statements. - Give feedback. * Answer : 1 A 2C 3D 1. Filling in the missing information. a. The Youth Union was founded in…………. b. In……. the Youth Union was officially named as it is today. c. The Youth Union’s activuties aim to help the young develop…… d. Its aims and principles have been…….. for the young Vietnamese people of today and tomorrow. * Answer : a, March 1931 b, december 1976 d, The guideline c, Their public awareness and form their personality. - Correct the mistakes and give feedback. (98). Work individually Answer the questions. Guess meaning of words Listen and repeat in chorus Copy down Play game Have Ss to predict the answer. Listen to the text Read the text Check predictions Fill the gap Answer Copy down. Read again the passage Groupwork.

(99) 2. Comprehention questions - Ask Ss to read again the passage, work in group and answer the qs a. At what age can one join the Youth Union? b. When was the Youth Union founded ? c. What is the complete name of the youth Union ? d. Can you name some social activities of the Youth Union ? e. What do these activities aim to help ? f. Who established the guidelines for the Vietnamese Youth ? - Call some pairs to ask and answer. - Corect the mistakes and give feedback. Answer:a.One can join the Youth Union from 15 to 30 years of age. b. It was founded in March 26 1931. c. The complete name of the Youth Union, is HCM Communist Youth Union. d. Yes. Such as helping the handicaped, cleaning the Environment, Green Summer Volunteers Campaign . e. These avtivities aim to help th yuong develop their public awareness and form their personality. f. President HCM established the guidelines for the Vietnamese youth .. Answer the questions. Ask and answer.. Copy down. Groupwork Present. Post reading ( 6 ms) - Ask Ss to work in group sumary information about Retell the main points HCM Communist Youth Union ( aims, established year, member quality ) Do exercises at home - Call Ss of each group to present their group’s answer. - Give feedback. Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson Homework ( 1m) - Do exercises in workbook 8 - Prepare for the next lesson : Unit 6 : Write F/ Self- Evaluation:. (99).

(100) Period : 35 Week : 12. Preparing date: 03/11/2012 Teaching date: 06/11/2012 UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Lesson 3 : Write. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - write a letter about a future plan using be going to . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: raise fund, a bank 2. Grammar: Structure with ” be going to” 3. Language skills: writing, speaking, listening, reading C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , board, lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1 m): Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): Ask Ss to read the text about HCM Communist Youth Union and answer some questions. a. At what age can one join the Youth Union? b. When was the Youth Union founded ? c. Can you name some social activities of the Youth Union ? => Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. * Warm up ( 5 ms): Revision of the structure Be going to - Ask Ss the usage of “ be going to “ – to express a Play game future plan . Get Ss to make the sentence : “ I am going to + Verb “ ( The verbs have to begin with a letter from A to Z : Ex: T : I am going to accept their invitation . Listen and copy (100).

(101) S1 : I am going to buy a new bicycle S2 : I am going to clean the floor . S3 : I am going to dust the furniture .. Pre - writing ( 10 ms): Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss . * Pre – teach vocabulary : - to raise fund : gây quỹ ( translation ) - a bank : ngân hàng ( visual ) - natural resources : coal oil , iron .. under the ground or the sea . * Reading the notice - Ask Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y members of the school “ - Ask some questions to check their understanding a. What do members of the Y and Y have to do in the recycling program ? b. What is the purpose of the recycling program ? c. What other programs can members of the Y and Y participate in ? - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions . - Give feedback and ask them to practice in open pairs . * Complete the letter - Ask some questions to set the scene : - Who writes the letter? ( Nga)/To whom does Nga write?(Linh ) - Is Nga a member of Y and Y ? ( Yes ) - What does Nga write to Linh about ? ( She writes about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is going to participate ) - Get Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the letter . - Give feedback : 1. community 2.recycling 3.collect 4. send 5. recycling 6. save 7. raise / earn 8. participating 9. planting 10 . helping - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter and correct mistakes if any . * Reading the dialogue : Set the scene“Hoa talks to her aunt about the Y and Y Green Group, about the activities that she is going to do .” - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her aunt * Checking : Some questions : a. Why does Hoa look happy ? b. What is she going to do in the environment month ? c.What are they doing to earn money for their school (101). Listen and repeat chorally and individually Copy down Read the notice and answer the questions Practice asking and answering the questions in pairs. Listen and answer ( the whole ). Work in pairs to complete the letter .. Read the complete letter . Listen and copy . Read the dialogue Practice asking and answering the questions ..

(102) Y&Y? - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their answers in front of the class . While – writing ( 15 ms) : - Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents . - Get Ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter on poster . Move around the class and help then if they are necessary . Post – writing( 6 ms) : - Choose four letters from 4 group and stick them on the board. Get the whole class to read the 4 letters and correct them . - Give feedback : * Suggested letter Dear Mom and Dad , I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join in the Y & Y Green Group of my school . The green Group is holding an environment month plan We are going to clean the lakes,banks on weekends . We are also going to plant trees and flowers in the parks and water them every afternoon after class . We are planting young trees and plants to sell to other schools . I hope that we can bring more green to the city and earn some money for the school Y&Y . The program is very interesting and useful , is not it ? I am still in a very good health . I will tell you more about the group activities later . With love , Hoa . Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homeworks ( 1 m): Ask each student to help Hoa write a letter to her parents in their notebooks . F/ Self- Evaluation:. (102). Work in groups to write the letter. Stick their letters on the board and correct its mistakes. Read the suggested letter aloud. Listen and copy .. Retell the main points Do exercises at home.

(103) Period : 36 Week : 12. Preparing date: 06/11/2012 Teaching date: 08/11/2012 UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Lesson 5: Language focus. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know or revise the present and its future meaning, gerunds and model verbs: “ may, might. Can, could “ to further practive making sentence with the prompt. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: gerunds and model verbs. 3. Languguage skills : reading, speaking, listening, writing. C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , cassette , chalk , posters , lesson plan. E/ Procedures : 1. Class organization ( 1 m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to read aloud their letter. - Teacher corrects and give them marks . 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. Warm up ( 5ms) : Brainstorming *Possible answers : - Clean up the streets - Help elderly people - Take part in sports Play game - Help handicappied / street children - Collect and empty garbage ….. Presentation and practice ( 31 ms): 1. Present tense with future meaning ( 10 ms) Listen and repeat chorally , a. Pre – teach vocabulary : - a ret home : a place where old or sick people are cared for individually Copy down (103).

(104) - an orphanage : a place where children without parents live - a stadium ( picture ) * Checking : Rub out and remember b. Setting the scene : Introduce the dialogue “ Lan and Mai are members of the Y&Y organization . They are talking about the summer activity program” Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ? Mai : at Dong Xuan Market . Lan : …..(2)…….. we collect ……(3)………? Mai : On January 9 Lan : ………(4)…….. we start and ……(5)…..? Mai : ……..(6) …… 8 am and ……(7) … 5 pm . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to play the role of Lan and mai to practice the dialogue . - Give feedback 1. where do 2. when do 3. an empty garbage 4. what time do 5. finish 6. we start at 7. finish at C. Concept checking : - Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding a. When do we “ where “ ? b. When do we use “ when “ ? c. When do we use “ what time “ ? d. Is the date at present or in the future ? e. What tense do we use in the dialogue ? => We use simple present tense to express an action that happens in the future . - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the Y&Y activity by using the following cues - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue . - Give feedback 2. Gerunds ( 11 ms): * Form : Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving * Survey : - Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their friends and stick on the chart . - Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends, hobbies . Eg : Ba loves playing soccer . He does not like cooking and especially hate washing dishes . .. 3. Modals : may , can , could ( 10 ms) - Ask Ss to repeat the uses of the offering assistance , asking for favors and how to respond . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Give feedback a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ? (104). Play game. Listen carefully. Work in pairs to practice the dialogue. Practice asking and answering to draw the form Copy down . Practice asking and answering the questions about the Y&Y activity . Listen and copy . Work in groups of three or four Report their results . Repeat the uses of the “ Asking for favors / offering assistance and how to respond “. Practice. speaking. the.

(105) B : Can you take me across the road ? C : Could you help me with this math problem ? D : Can you water the flowers in the garden? b / A : May I help you ? B: Do you need any help ? C : Let me help you . D : Yes . That is very kind of you . - Ask them to practice the dialogue in front of the class . Consolidation ( 2ms) : - Retell the main points . Homework ( 1m) : 1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson : Consolidation.. dialogue.. - Retell the main points. Do exercise at home.. F/ Self- Evaluation: Period : 37 Week : 12. Preparing date: 08/11/2012 Teaching date: 10/11/2012 COSOLIDATION. A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to : - practice all structure grammar from unit 3 to unit 6 . - Develop Ss’ four skills. B/ Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: The past simple , used to, present tense with future meaning, … Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing. C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text books, lesson plan, posters . E/ Procedure : 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. Warm up ( 5ms): * Brainstorming Possible answers : - Clean up the streets - Help elderly people - Take part in sports - Help handicappied / street children - Collect and empty garbage ….. Presentation (31 ms):. Play game. (105).

(106) Present tense with future meaning ( 16 ms) Pre – teach vocabulary - a ret home : a place where old or sick people are cared for - an orphanage : a place where children without parents live - a stadium ( picture ) * Checking : Rub out and remember Setting the scene : Introduce the dialogue “ Lan and Mai are members of the Y&Y organization . They are talking about the summer activity program” Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ? Mai : at Dong Xuan Market . Lan : …..(2)…….. we collect ……(3)………? Mai : On January 9 Lan : ………(4)…….. we start and ……(5)…..? Mai : ……..(6) …… 8 am and ……(7) … 5 pm . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to play the role of Lan and mai to practice the dialogue . - Give feedback *Keys: 1. where do 2. when do 3. an empty garbage 4. what time do 5. finish 6. we start at 7. finish at c. Concept checking :- Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding a. When do we “ where “ ? b. When do we use “ when “ ? c. When do we use “ what time “ ? d. Is the date at present or in the future ? e. What tense do we use in the dialogue ? => We use simple present tense to express an action that happens in the future . - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the Y&Y activity by using the following cues - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue . - Give feedback Gerunds ( 15 ms): * Form : Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving * Survey : - Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their friends and stick on the chart . - Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends, hobbies . Eg : Ba loves playing soccer . He does not like cooking and especially hate washing dishes . .. Modals : may , can , could - Ask Ss to repeat the uses of the offering (106). Listen and repeat chorally , individually Copy down Play game Listen carefully. Work in pairs to practice the dialogue. Practice asking and answering to draw the form. Copy down . Practice asking and answering the questions about the Y&Y activity . Listen and copy . Work in groups of three or four Report their results ..

(107) assistance , asking for favors and how to respond . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Give feedback a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ? B : Can you take me across the road ? C : Could you help me with this math problem ? D : Can you water the flowers in the garden? b / A : May I help you ? A : Do you need any help ? B : Let me help you . A : Yes . That is very kind of you . - Ask them to practice the dialogue in front of the class . Consolidation ( 2ms): -Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1m): 1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson .. Repeat the uses of the “ Asking for favors / offering assistance and how to respond “. Practice speaking the dialogue Listen and copy .. Ss copy down.. F/ Self- Evaluation:. Period : 38 Week : 14. Preparing date: 16/11/2012 Teaching date: 22/11/2012 TEST( NO 2 ). A / The aims : I. Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 3 to unit 6 so that they can supplement what they are short of . II. Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test. B/ Steps of the lesson: I. Organization: II. Checking up: III. Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson . - Deliver test papers to Ss . (107).

(108) I/Pick out the word with underlined part is pronounced differently(1m): 1/ a. decide b. wisdom c. wife d. tiger 2/ a. please b. learner c. beach d. meat 3/ a. hold b. habit c. hour d. hope 4/ a. recycled b. asked c. enjoyed d. hired II/ Circle the best answer: A, B, C or D to complete all the sentences (2ms): 1/ “ The lost shoe” is one of the …………. Stories I like best. a. tradition b. traditional c. beautiful d. beauty 2/We must be there....................7.30 and 10.30. a. between b. before c. after d. at 3 /His brother often drives too ................................ a. bad b. fastly c. faster d. fast 4/Peter is very proud....................his school. a. in b. off c. of d. on 5/ My aunt …………..do the housework without modern equipment. a. use to b. used c. used to d .didn’t used to 6/ The Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union was founded on……… a. March 26 1931 b. March 23 1931 c. March 22 1931 d. March 20 1931 7/Nam ‘s hobbies are watching TV and outdoor …………………… a. activity b. activities c. acting d. action 8/ Lee was born in China. Chinese is his………………………… a. foreign language b. mother tongue c. second language d.new language III / Order the following sentences to make a suitable conversation.( 1 m) A. No problem .I’ll help you. B. Could you do me a favor , please? C. Thank you very much. That’s very kind of you. D. Can you remove this motorbike .It’s on the way? E. Sure .What can I do for you? 0-B 1234IV/Rewrite the sentences (2,5ms) 1/ "Can you give me your pen?", Lan said to me. ® Lan asked me……………………………………………………………………….. 2/Those boys are interested in playing badminton. ® They enjoy………………………………………………………………………… 3/My mother said to my sister, "You should work harder on Math and Literature." ® My mother said…………………………………………………………………… 4/My grandmother lived in the countryside when she was young. à My grandmother used……….……………………………………………………… 5/ “Don’t drink much beer” My father said to my brother àMy father told my brother…………………………………………………………… V. Reading(3,5ms) My best friend My name’s John and my best friend is called Pamela. We met thirty years ago when we were both five years old. It was my first day at school and I was very unhappy because I (108).

(109) wanted to meet my mother . Pamela gave me a candy and we became friends immediately. We were together nearly every day until we left school twelve years later. Then I went to university but Pamela didn’t. She got married and had three children. I studied for eight years because I wanted to be an accountant. I had a lot of new friends so I didn’t see Pamela very often. Sometimes we didn’t meet for months but we often talked on the phone. keep in touch: giữ liên lạc get married : lập gia đình True ( T) or false (F) ? 1 ……….... John was happy for the first day at school. 2 ……….... They became friends because Pamela gave John a candy. 3 …………. Pamela got married and had two children. 4 …………. John wanted to be an accountant. Questions: 1.How old were John and Pamela when they became friends? …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………....……………………………………… 2.Why was Jonh unhappy ? …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………....……………………………………… 3.How often did they meet at school? …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………....……………………………………… 4.Why didn’t Pamela go to university? …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………....……………………………………… 5.Did they still keep in touch later? …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………....……………………………………… --- The end---. (109).

(110) Period : 39 Week : 13. Preparing date: 10/11/2012 Teaching date: 13/11/2012 UNIT 7: MY NEIBORHOOD Lesson 1 :Getting started and listen and read .. A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: - know more about Na,s new neighbor B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: close by, serve, a pancake, tasty = dilicious 2. Grammar: the present perfect tenses. 3. Language skills: listening, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , boards , chalk .. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m):- Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. *Warm up ( 5 ms): Getting started - Ask Ss to match the names of places with the suitable pictures - Ask for their meanings to make sure Ss know exactly what they mean * Answers : a. grocery store b. stadium c. wet market d. drug store , e. hairdresser s f. swimming pool *Pre – reading ( 10 ms) : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words . Pre – teach vocabulary - close by (adv) : a short distance - to serve : give sb food or drink - a pancake : banh ran - tasty (a) = delicious (a) * Checking vocabulary : What and where Guiding questions : - Set the scene “ Nam and Na are talking about the place where they live . But Na is new there . “ Questions : a. How long has Nam lived in that neighborhood ? b. Where does Na want to go ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and predict the answers and call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them (110). Play game ( whole class ). Listen and copy . Listen and repeat chorally , individually Copy down Play game Listen to the scene work in groups predict the answers to the guiding questions ..

(111) on the board . While – reading ( 15 ms) : * Ask Ss to read silently the dialogue between Nam and Na then ask them if their answers are correct or not . - Give feedback : a. He has lived there for 10 years . b. Na wants to go to a restaurant . - Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 / 64 individually , then compare with their partners . - Call on some Ss to read their answers and give feedback : a. new b. last week c. tired d. restaurant e. Hue f. pancakes * Answers given : - Give Ss some answers and ask them to make questions. a. Nam has lived here for 10 years . b. Yes. my mother is too tired to cook . c. The restaurant serves Hue food . d. Hue food is very good. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and answering => Questions a. How long has Nam lived here ? b. Is Na,s mother tired ? c. What kind of food does the restaurant serve ? d. What is the food like ? Post - reading ( 6ms): * Write - Ask Ss to write a passage about their neighborhood by answering the following questions a. How long have you lived in your neighborhood ? b. Do you like it ? Why ? c . Is there a restaurant / post – office / market / bank / shop in your neighborhood ? d.How do you do to keep your neighborhood clean ? - Move around the class and help Ss - Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud . - Correct mistakes . Consolidation ( 2ms): -Retell the main points of this leson. Homework ( 1m): 1.Write the complete writing about their neighborhood . 2. Do exercise in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson .Unit 7 : Speak and listen F/ Self- Evaluation: (111). Report their predictions .. Read the dialogue to check their predictions. - Teacher give them marks if necessary. Work individually. Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - T give them marks if necessary. Open pairs -> closed pairs. Write individually. Demonstrate their writings in front of class. Retell the main points Do homework at home.

(112) (112).

(113) (113).

(114) Period : 44 Week : 15. Preparing date: 28/11/2012 Teaching date: 29/11/2012 CORRECTING THE TEST NO 2. I.The aims of the lesson 1. Knowledges + The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in the next lessons + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 4 to unit 6 + Structures: - Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning - “used to” - Prepositions of time - Modals: should, can could, may - Adverbs of manner - Commands, requests and advice in reported speech - Gerunds 2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar 3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful II.Preparations 1.Teacher give points to the tests 2. Students: review from unit 4 to unit 6. III. The stages of the lesson 1.The old lesson check- up(1’) Check ss’ preparations 2.The new lesson Teacher’s activities * Pre-correcting (10’) Give the tests to ss Remark the tests generally through the main mistakes in each part of the test * While- correcting(30’) Go through each part of the test, ask ss to point out the correct answer of each sentence, and explain why. Students’ activities Get and observe Observe and listen carefully Look at each part of the test, point out the correct answer of each sentence, and explain why I. 4 x 0,5= 1,0 m 1. B 2.B 3.C II. 8 x 0,5 = 2,0ms 1.B 2.A 3.D 5.C 6.A 7.B III. 4 x 0,5= 1,0 m 1.-E 2.-D 3.-A IV .5 x 0,5= 2,5ms. (114). 4.B 4.C 8.B 4-C.

(115) 1. Lan asked we to give her my pen. 2. They enjoy playing badminton. 3.My mother said My sister should work hasder on math and Literature. 4.My grandmother used to live in the countryside when she was young. 5.My father told my brother not to drink beer. V. Reading.( 3,5 ms) True or False. 4 x 0,25= 1,0 m 1.F 2.T 3.F 4.T * Post-correcting( 2’) Ques tions. 5 x 0,5 = 2,5 ms Ask ss to tell what they could and could 1.They were both five years old. not do in the test and know the way to 2.Because John wanted to miss his mother . improve the knowlege in the next test 3.They were nearly everyday until theylèft school twelve years later. * Feed- back(1’) 4.Because she got married and had three Remind the thing that ss did well and they children. did badly in the test. 5.Yes, they did. 3. Homework (1’) - Do the test again in the book Listen and tell out - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 7: Getting started + Listen and read Listen and remember F/ Self- Evaluation: BẢNG THỐNG KÊ KẾT QUẢ KIỂM TRA ĐỊNH KÌ MÔN : TIẾNG ANH - KHỐI : 8 LỚP. TSHS. GIỎI KHÁ TB YẾU KÉM SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% 8A 35 19 54,29 10 28,57 5 14,29 1 2,86 0 0,0 8B 36 29 80,56 7 19,44 0 0,0 0 0,0 0 0,0 8C 34 25 73,53 5 14,71 4 11,76 0 0,0 0 0,0 8D 33 26 78,79 5 15,2 2 6,06 0 0,0 0 0,0 8E 35 2 5,71 12 34,29 14 40,00 7 20,0 0 0,0 TỔNG 173 101 58,38 39 22,54 25 14,45 8 4,62 0 0,0 Nhận xét, đánh giá kết quả bài kiểm tra định kì số 2 * Đánh giá : - Kết quả kiểm tra giữa các lớp không đồng đều. - Học sinh trên trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ khá cao 95,38%. - Học sinh dưới trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ 4,62 % - Số lượng học sinh khá, giỏi rơi vào các lớp 8B, 8C, 8D nhiều hơn các lớp khác -Học sinh yếu đa số ở lớp E * Nguyên nhân : - Do học lực học sinh còn yếu. - Công tác coi thi chưa nghiêm túc. (115).

(116) * Giải pháp : - Gv cần thiết kế được nd dành cho đối tượng hs giỏi và hs yếu kém.. Period : 40 Week : 13. Preparing date: 13/11/2012 Teaching date: 15/11/2012 UNIT 7: MY NEIBORHOOD Lesson 2: Speak and listen. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - talk how to send parcels or letters . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: some words of post office. 2. Grammar: 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalk , lesson plan, posters. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Two Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue. - Two others to go to the board to do exercises,Using the present perfect with “since’’ and “for”: 1. The Robinsons / live / Hn / 2001. => 2. They / be / Nha Trang / 2 days. => -> Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. * Warm up ( 5 ms): (116).

(117) * Chatting - Show a letter and ask Ss some questions + What is this ? + Where can I post it to my friend ? + How can I post it ? + How much ? + Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ? + Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?  Lead in the new lesson . A. SPEAKING ( 16 ms) * Pre speaking (4 ms): Pre- teach vocabulary : - air – mail : letter or parcel sent by air - surface mail : letter or parcel sent by bus , train or ship - Parcel ( n): buu pham, buu kien. - charge (v / n ) : le phi, cuoc phi. * Checking : Rub out and remember . * While speaking ( 8 ms) + Reading comprehension - Set the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to Qui Nhon , so she has to go to the post office .” - Give Ss some questions and ask Ss to work in pairs to compare their answers . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the answers a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or surface mail ? Why ? b. What is the weight of her parcel ? c. How much does she pay ? - Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions * Answers : a. Mrs Kim send the parcel surface mail because it is much cheaper . b. Her parcel is five kilograms . c. She pays 19, 200 dongs . ** Practice : - Call on a student to play role of Mrs Kim and practice the dialogue with teacher ( clerk ) - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue . Correct their pronunciation - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class . * Further practice ( 4ms): - Set the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue + Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail - Ask Ss to make the dialogue between Lan and the clerk in the post office . - Elicit and encourage Ss to make the dialogue (117). Play game ( whole class ). Listen and repeat chorally , individually Copy down ( whole class ) Play game Listen carefully . Work in pairs Read the dialogue to fine out the answers .. Practice asking and answering the questions .. Practice the dialogue with teacher . Work in open pairs Work in closed pairs .. Practice the dialogues , using the situations . ( whole class ).

(118) themselves . Expected dialogue Clerk : Can I help you ? Mrs Lan : I want to send a letter to Kontom . Clerk :Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? Mrs Lan : I send it airmail . How much is it ? Clerk : Let me see . Mmm , 15 grams , it is only 1,200 dongs . Mrs Lan : Here you are . Clerk : Thank you . - Get Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs - Give Ss some situations : 2. Postcard / HCM city / airmail / 15 g 3. Parcel / Ca Mau ? air mail / 2 kg 4. Parcel / Buon Me Thuot / surface / 5 kgs . - Divide class into 3 groups , each prepares a dialogue - Call on 2 pairs from each group to practice their dialogue . - Get Ss to work in pairs , practicing three dialogues and move around class to help Ss . B/ LISTENING (15 ms): *Prediction. *Pre – listening ( 4 ms) : - Set the scene “ Na is new in the neighborhood . She is talking to Nam about what she is going to do on the weekend .” - Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and give the answers and fill in the blanks in each advertisement * While - listening ( 7 ms): + Listening task 1 : - Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the answers - Give feedback a. The new comer b. Town Ground c. English speaking contest d . Culture House + Listening task 2 : - Ask Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66 - Get Ss to guess which is true , which is false which has no information - Ask Ss to share their ideas with their friends . - Give feedback - Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and tick in the correct boxes : True ? False or No information + Comprehension questions - Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding of the conversation . - Turn on the tape again . a. Does Na like movies ? b. Why will not she go to see the film “The New comer (118). Work in pairs. Work in groups Work in open pairs Work in closed pairs. Listen and copy. Work individually Work individually. Work in pairs. Listen to the conversation again and tick in the corrects boxes Practice asking and answering the questions. ( whole class ) - Work in pairs.

(119) “? c. Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition ? d. Who will Na go to the soccer match with ? e. What time does the match start ? * Post – Listening (4ms) : - Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends about what Na is going to do this weekend . - Call on some volunteers from each group to tell the whole class about Na . * Consolidation ( 2 ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. * Homework ( 1m): 1. Copy the three dialogues in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson Unit 7: Read. F/ Self- Evaluation:. (119). - Answer the questions. Work in group . Talk about What Na is going to do this weekend. Retell the main points Do exercises at home.

(120) Period : 44 Week : 15. Preparing date: 28/11/2012 Teaching date: 29/11/2012 CORRECTING THE TEST NO 2. I.The aims of the lesson 1. Knowledges + The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in the next lessons + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 4 to unit 6 + Structures: - Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning - “used to” - Prepositions of time - Modals: should, can could, may - Adverbs of manner - Commands, requests and advice in reported speech - Gerunds 2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar 3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful II.Preparations 1.Teacher give points to the tests 2. Students: review from unit 4 to unit 6. III. The stages of the lesson 1.The old lesson check- up(1’) (120).

(121) Check ss’ preparations 2.The new lesson Teacher’s activities * Pre-correcting (10’) Give the tests to ss Remark the tests generally through the main mistakes in each part of the test * While- correcting(30’) Go through each part of the test, ask ss to point out the correct answer of each sentence, and explain why. Students’ activities Get and observe Observe and listen carefully Look at each part of the test, point out the correct answer of each sentence, and explain why I. 4 x 0,5= 1,0 m 1. B 2.B 3.C II. 8 x 0,5 = 2,0ms 1.B 2.A 3.D 5.C 6.A 7.B III. 4 x 0,5= 1,0 m 1.-E 2.-D 3.-A. 4.B 4.C 8.B 4-C. IV .5 x 0,5= 2,5ms 1. Lan asked we to give her my pen. 2. They enjoy playing badminton. 3.My mother said My sister should work hasder on math and Literature. 4.My grandmother used to live in the countryside when she was young. 5.My father told my brother not to drink beer. V. Reading.( 3,5 ms) True or False. 4 x 0,25= 1,0 m 1.F 2.T 3.F 4.T Ques tions. 5 x 0,5 = 2,5 ms * Post-correcting( 2’) 1.They were both five years old. Ask ss to tell what they could and could 2.Because John wanted to miss his mother . not do in the test and know the way to 3.They were nearly everyday until theylèft improve the knowlege in the next test school twelve years later. 4.Because she got married and had three * Feed- back(1’) children. Remind the thing that ss did well and they 5.Yes, they did. did badly in the test. 3. Homework (1’) Listen and tell out - Do the test again in the book - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 7: Listen and remember Getting started + Listen and read F/ Self- Evaluation: (121).

(122) Period : 41 Week : 13. Preparing date: 15/11/2012 Teaching date: 17/11/2012 UNIT 7: MY NEIBORHOOD Lesson 3: Read. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand the passage about a new shopping Mall . - develop Ss reading skill . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Some words of shopping. 2. Grammar: The present perfect tense. 3. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalk , board , posters and lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Ask 2 Ss to go to the board to answer some questions say about contents of the last lesson . - T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. Warm up ( 5 ms): * Guessing the words - Give Ss the definitions and get Ss to find out the words as quickly as possible . (122).

(123) 1. a place where you can buy everything 2. A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit . 3. A place where you can buy books . 4. A place where you can come to eat . 5. A place where you can come to see the movies . 6. A person who comes to the store and buys something. => Lead in the new lesson Pre – reading ( 10 ms) : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss : * Pre – teach vocabulary : - a roof ( picture ) : mái nhà - convenient : thuận lợi - a selection ( a process of choosing carefully) : sự lựa chọn - available : sẵn có để dùng , có thể để dùng - a mall ( many stores , restaurants , even movies theaters are under one roof) : khu thương mại - a resident : cư dân * Checking vocabulary : What and where *. Brainstorming : - Set the scene “ In Nam,s neighborhood , there is a new shopping mall . - Ask Ss to think about the convenience of the mall .  Possible answers : - wide selection of goods - lower prices / buy many things at the same time - have fun or relax while shopping. Play game ( whole class ). Listen and copy. Listen and repeat chorally , individually Copy down . Play games .. Read them aloud and copy .. The convenience of the new shopping mall Work individually Lower prices wide selection of goods *While - reading ( 15 ms) - Ask Ss to read the text silently and compare their or get more information . - Give feedback - Explain the meanings of some phrases rapidly + under one roof + shop in comfort + take their business + offer a wider selection + especially stores + have been concerned about * True / False statements - Have Ss look at the statements in the box and get them to read the text again and decide which statements are true , which are false . Statements True False (123). read the text silently. look at the statements in the box and get them to read the text again and decide which statements are true , which are false ..

(124) 1. A mall is open six days a week . 2. There are more than 50 stores in the mall 3. Everyone in the neighborhood is pleased about the new mall . 4. It will be more comfortable to shop in the mall than in the present shopping area . 5. Some of the stores on Tran Phu Street may have to close . - Have Ss correct the false statements 1. The mall is open daily 2. There are 50 stores in the mall . 3. Not everyone is pleased . The owner of the small stores on Tran Phu Street are not happy . * Comprehension questions : - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in the exercise 2/ 68( Play a game : Lucky flower ) - Using questions in Ex2. Then do language focus 5 . *Post - reading ( 6ms): - Give a situation and ask Ss to discuss it “ Do you want to have a new mall in your neighborhood ? If there is one , what will happen to the residents ? “ - Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class . * Cosolidation ( 2 ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson * Homework ( 1 m): Copy their ideas about there is a mall in their neighborhood. Do exercises in workbook . F/ Self- Evaluation:. (124). Work in pairs. correct the false statements - One by one. - Play a game in two teams. - Ss to answer the questions in the exercise 2( 68) - Some Ss to go to the board and gap fill. Retell the main points Do eercise at home..

(125) Period : 42 Week : 14. Preparing date: 22/11/2012 Teaching date: 24/11/2012. UNIT 7: MY NEIBORHOOD Lesson 5: Write A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - write a notice . - develop Ss’ writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: hardware store, contact……. 2. Grammar: 3. Language skills: writing, listening, reading, speaking. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book. - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. *Warm up (5 ms): * Chatting 1. Have you ever written a notice ? 2. To whom ? 3. What for ? 4. What type ? => Lead in the new lesson . * Pre - writing (10 ms): Introduce the topic of the writing and the scene “ The residents and store owners on Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to discuss the effects of the new mall . * Pre- teach vocabulary : - effects (n) = tac dong , tac dung , hieu qua - contact (v) = lien lac - hardware store = dung cu dong dung trong nha * Guiding questions a. Why are the residents and store owners on Tran Phu street going to hold a meeting ? b. When will they hold a meeting ? What time ? c. Where will they hold the meeting ? - Get Ss to read the notice and answer some questions to check their understanding. - Call on some pairs to practice asking answering (125). Play game ( whole class). Listen and copy . - Repeat in chorus. Work in pairs. Read individually Practice asking and answering the questions..

(126) the questions . - Give feedback a. To discuss the effects of the new mall b. They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8 p.m c. They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao Street , Binh ,s hardware store . - Let Ss know how to write a notice , not write full sentences . * Reading : - Ask Ss to read the passage and ask some questions to check their understanding , get them to use short answers . 1. What is the English Speaking club going to hold ? 2. Where and when will it be held ? 3. What time ? 4. Who is the person contact ? - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . * While –writing( 15 ms) : - Get Ss to write the notice individually - Monitor and help them write - Ask Ss to share with their partners - Check some notices and correct them - Write the model notice on the board Suggested answers : The school English Speaking club Holding A Speaking Contest to celebrate teacher,s day Date : November 15 Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm Place : Hall 204 , Building G Please contact Ms .Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at the above address for more information . *Post – writing( 6 ms) : - Ask Ss to write one notice about their class meeting - Get them to work in group - Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class . - Give feedback . * Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson . * Homework (1m) : 1. Write the completed notice in their notebooks . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepair the next lesson : Unit 7: Language focus F/ Self- Evaluation: (126). Work in the whole class. Ss to read the passage and ask some questions to check their understanding , get them to use short answers . Work in pairs Practice asking and answering the questions.. Work individually Work in pairs Whole class Read the correct notice. Ss to write one notice about their class meeting Work in group. - Retell the main points . Do the homework.

(127) Period : 44 Week : 15. Preparing date: 28/11/2012 Teaching date: 29/11/2012 CORRECTING THE TEST NO 2. I.The aims of the lesson 1. Knowledges + The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in the next lessons + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 4 to unit 6 + Structures: - Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning - “used to” - Prepositions of time - Modals: should, can could, may - Adverbs of manner - Commands, requests and advice in reported speech - Gerunds 2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar 3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful II.Preparations 1.Teacher give points to the tests 2. Students: review from unit 4 to unit 6. III. The stages of the lesson 1.The old lesson check- up(1’) Check ss’ preparations 2.The new lesson Teacher’s activities * Pre-correcting (10’) Give the tests to ss Remark the tests generally through the main mistakes in each part of the test * While- correcting(30’) Go through each part of the test, ask ss to point out the correct answer of each sentence, and explain why. Students’ activities Get and observe Observe and listen carefully Look at each part of the test, point out the correct answer of each sentence, and explain why I. 4 x 0,5= 1,0 m 1. B 2.B 3.C II. 8 x 0,5 = 2,0ms 1.B 2.A 3.D 5.C 6.A 7.B III. 4 x 0,5= 1,0 m 1.-E 2.-D 3.-A. 4.B 4.C 8.B 4-C. IV .5 x 0,5= 2,5ms 1. Lan asked we to give her my pen. (127).

(128) 2. They enjoy playing badminton. 3.My mother said My sister should work hasder on math and Literature. 4.My grandmother used to live in the countryside when she was young. 5.My father told my brother not to drunr beer. V. Reading.( 3,5 ms) True or False. 4 x 0,25= 1,0 m 1.F 2.T 3.F 4.T * Post-correcting( 2’) Ques tions. 5 x 0,5 = 2,5 ms Ask ss to tell what they could and could 1.They were both five years old. not do in the test and know the way to 2.Because John wanted to miss his mother . improve the knowlege in the next test 3.They were nearly everyday until they bft school twelve years later. * Feed- back(1’) 4.Because she got massied and had three Remind the thing that ss did well and they children. did badly in the test. 5.Yes they did. 3. Homework (1’) Listen and tell out - Do the test again in the book - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 7: Listen and remember Getting started + Listen and read F/ Self- Evaluation: BẢNG THỐNG KÊ KẾT QUẢ KIỂM TRA ĐỊNH KÌ MÔN : TIẾNG ANH - KHỐI : 8 LỚP. TSHS GIỎI SL TL%. KHÁ TB SL TL% SL. TL%. YẾU KÉM SL TL% SL TL%. 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E TỔNG Nhận xét, đánh giá kết quả bài kiểm tra định kì số 2 * Đánh giá : - Kết quả kiểm tra giữa các lớp không đồng đều. - Học sinh trên trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ khá cao 70,3%. - Học sinh dưới trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ 25,2 % - Số lượng học sinh khá, giỏi rơi vào các lớp 8B, 8C, 8D nhiều hơn các lớp khác * Nguyên nhân : - Do học lực học sinh còn yếu. - Công tác coi thi chưa nghiêm túc. * Giải pháp : - Gv cần thiết kế được nd dành cho đối tượng hs giỏi và hs yếu kém. (128).

(129) Period : 43 Week : 15. Preparing date: 25/11/2012 Teaching date: 27/11/2012 UNIT 7: MY NEIBORHOOD Lesson 5: Language focus. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - practice present perfect with” for and since” , know and practice comparing with “ like, ( not ) as…… as, ( not) the same, different form……” . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: Present perfect tense, comparing with” like, ( not ) as… as, ( not) the same…… 3. Language skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan. posters. E/ Procedure: 1 . Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): Two Ss go to the board to make the similar dialogue about to send a letter or parcel. - T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. * Warm up : Matching - Stick a poster of infinitives and Past Participles on the board. - Divide the class into 2 teams - Get Ss form 2 teams to go to the board and write each pair of infinitive – past participle be see collected go worked lived do seen eat attended write been written eaten work attend done live collect gone Answers : be – been ; write – written ; go – gone live – lived ; see – seen ; collect – collected do – done attend – attended ;eat – eaten work – worked - Get Ss to repeat in chorus and remember the past participles of irregular verbs . * Presentation : - Set the scene “ Na is new in Nam ,s neighborhood . (129). Play game ( whole class ) write each pair of infinitive – past participle. Repeat chorally , individually , then copy Listen and copy. Work in pairs.

(130) They are talking to each other .” - Give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na , then ask them to complete it Na : How long ….. you … in this neighborhood ? Nam : I ... here …..10 years . Na : Really . It is a long time . * Answers : have – lived / have – lived – for - Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask them to practice in pairs . => Form : have / has + past participle * Use : to talk about something which started in the past and continues up to the present We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “ with the Present Perfect Tense : For + length of time Since + starting point Practice ( 15 ms) * Ex 2 : - Ask Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and decide which is the length of time and which is starting point . - Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For - Go on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since * Ex 3 : - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss to make full sentences . - Correct their pronunciation Example : I / live / here / last week  I have lived here since last week * Ex 4: Ask Ss to complete the conversations - Have them work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback 1. have been 2. hope 3. have lived 4. is 5. want 6. looks 7. have been 8. have seen - Ask Ss to work in closed pairs . Production ( 6ms) * Ex 5 * Game : Pelmanism different cheap expensive long same modern short big small - Show Ss 3 books , a red book and a yellow one which have the same size and a bigger brown dictionary then ask Ss to make comparisons Example : - The red book is the same as the yellow one - The red book is as big as the yellow one - The yellow book is different from the brown dictionary . - The yellow is not as big as the brown dictionary . => Form : The same as … ( not ) as … as / different from (130). Practice in front of class .. Listen and copy .. look at exercise 2 / 69 and decide which is the length of time and which is starting point . - Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For - Go on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since Work individually. Work in pairs. Work in groups. Listen and repeat chorally , individually. Listen and copy. Work in pairs Listen and copy ..

(131) - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise 5 / 70 - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback a. not as big as b. different from c. different Retell the main points from d. the same as e. not as big as f. the same as Do exercise at home g. as long as h. not as modern as i. not as cheap as Consolidation ( 2ms) -Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m) 1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson F/ Self- Evaluation:. (131).

(132) Period : 44 Week : 15. Preparing date: 28/11/2012 Teaching date: 29/11/2012 CORRECTING THE TEST NO 2. I.The aims of the lesson 1. Knowledges + The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in the next lessons + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 4 to unit 6 + Structures: - Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning - “used to” - Prepositions of time - Modals: should, can could, may - Adverbs of manner - Commands, requests and advice in reported speech - Gerunds 2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar 3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful II.Preparations 1.Teacher give points to the tests 2. Students: review from unit 4 to unit 6. III. The stages of the lesson 1.The old lesson check- up(1’) Check ss’ preparations 2.The new lesson Teacher’s activities * Pre-correcting (10’) Give the tests to ss Remark the tests generally through the main mistakes in each part of the test * While- correcting(30’) Go through each part of the test, ask ss to point out the correct answer of each sentence, and explain why. Students’ activities Get and observe Observe and listen carefully Look at each part of the test, point out the correct answer of each sentence, and explain why I. 4 x 0,5= 1,0 m 1. B 2.B 3.C II. 8 x 0,5 = 2,0ms 1.B 2.A 3.D 5.C 6.A 7.B III. 4 x 0,5= 1,0 m 1.-E 2.-D 3.-A IV .5 x 0,5= 2,5ms. (132). 4.B 4.C 8.B 4-C.

(133) 1. Lan asked we to give her my pen. 2. They enjoy playing badminton. 3.My mother said My sister should work hasder on math and Literature. 4.My grandmother used to live in the countryside when she was young. 5.My father told my brother not to drink beer. V. Reading.( 3,5 ms) True or False. 4 x 0,25= 1,0 m 1.F 2.T 3.F 4.T * Post-correcting( 2’) Ques tions. 5 x 0,5 = 2,5 ms Ask ss to tell what they could and could 1.They were both five years old. not do in the test and know the way to 2.Because John wanted to miss his mother . improve the knowlege in the next test 3.They were nearly everyday until theylèft school twelve years later. * Feed- back(1’) 4.Because she got married and had three Remind the thing that ss did well and they children. did badly in the test. 5.Yes, they did. 3. Homework (1’) - Do the test again in the book Listen and tell out - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 7: Getting started + Listen and read Listen and remember F/ Self- Evaluation: BẢNG THỐNG KÊ KẾT QUẢ KIỂM TRA ĐỊNH KÌ MÔN : TIẾNG ANH - KHỐI : 8 LỚP. TSHS. GIỎI KHÁ TB YẾU KÉM SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% SL TL% 8A 35 19 54,29 10 28,57 5 14,29 1 2,86 0 0,0 8B 36 29 80,56 7 19,44 0 0,0 0 0,0 0 0,0 8C 34 25 73,53 5 14,71 4 11,76 0 0,0 0 0,0 8D 33 26 78,79 5 15,2 2 6,06 0 0,0 0 0,0 8E 35 2 5,71 12 34,29 14 40,00 7 20,0 0 0,0 TỔNG 173 119 68,79 39 22,54 21 21,14 8 4,62 0 0,0 Nhận xét, đánh giá kết quả bài kiểm tra định kì số 2 * Đánh giá : - Kết quả kiểm tra giữa các lớp không đồng đều. - Học sinh trên trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ khá cao 70,3%. - Học sinh dưới trung bình chiếm tỉ lệ 25,2 % - Số lượng học sinh khá, giỏi rơi vào các lớp 8B, 8C, 8D nhiều hơn các lớp khác * Nguyên nhân : - Do học lực học sinh còn yếu. - Công tác coi thi chưa nghiêm túc. * Giải pháp : (133).

(134) - Gv cần thiết kế được nd dành cho đối tượng hs giỏi và hs yếu kém.. (134).

(135) Period : 45 Week : 15. Preparing date: 29/11/2012 Teaching date: 01/12/2012 UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - talk about the city life and the country life . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: Not only……. But also……..; comaration. 3. Language skills: Listening, reading, writing, speaking C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3. - T. corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up ( 5ms) : * Chatting - Talk to Ss about life in the city and life in the country by asking some questions 1. Where do you live ? 2. Do you want to live in the city ? Why ? 3. Do you want to live in the country ? Why ? => Lead in the new lesson * Pre -reading ( 10 ms): Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words * Pre – teach vocabulary : - a relative = uncles , aunts cousins - peaceful = quiet and calm (a) - permanently (adv) : its means existing all the time - accessible = co the den gan duoc - medical facilities = cac phuong tien y te * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember * Brainstorming ( Getting started ) - Get Ss to talk about city life and country life . The words in the box of getting started may help you . country life. Chatting ( whole class ). Listen and copy. Listen and chorally Copy down. repeat. Play game Ss to talk about city life and country life.. city life. - Play agame in two teams. (135).

(136)  Possible answers : - tall buildings - beautiful views - plenty kinds of goods - fresh food - polluted air - fresh air - traffic jams - friendly - entertainment - peaceful busy While – reading ( 15 ms): * True / false statements Statements True False 1. Na lives in the city x 2. Na went to a village which has some x relatives lives there . 3. The village is very peaceful and x quiet x 4. Hoa prefers the city life - Turn on the tape and ask Ss to work in groups to predict the true / false statements . - Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write them on the board. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa and compare their ideas - Give feedback and get more information - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue *. Comprehension questions : - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in ex 2 / 73 - Call on some pairs to practice asking answering the questions in front of class . - Give feedback a. Na has been to Kin Lien village b. She was there for the weekend c. to her , the countryside is peaceful and quiet and there is nothing to do . d. There is no libraries , no movies , no supermarket , no zoos … e. Country life is becoming better . Many remote area are getting electricity . People can now have things like refrigerators and TV , medical facilities are more accessible . - Ask Ss to work in closed pairs Post – reading ( 6 ms) : * Discussion - Divide the class into 4 groups . Two groups include Ss who prefer the city life and the others include Ss who prefer the country life . - Ask Ss to work in groups to answer the questions “ Do you prefer the city or the country life ?Why ? “ (136). Work in groups. Work in predict. groups. Read the dialogue compare their ideas. to. ,. Practice the dialogue in pairs Work in pairs - some pairs to practice asking answering the questions in front of class .. Practice asking and answering the questions. Work in groups Demonstrate their ideas.

(137) - Call on 4 pioneers from 4 groups to show their ideas in front of class . before class . Consolidation ( 2 ms): - Retell the main points . Homework ( 1ms): Learn by heart new words and copy two lines for each - Retell the main points . word . – Copy the answers in their notebooks . Do exercises at home. Prepare the next lesson Unit 8: Speak and listen F/ Self- Evaluation:. (137).

(138) Period : 46 Week : 16. Preparing date: 02/12/2012 Teaching date: 04/12/2012 UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Lesson 2 : Speak and listen. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - practice speaking about the changes of a place . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: Comparation. 3. Language skills: Speaking , listening, writing, reading. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , pictures , poster , lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1 .Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up ( 5ms) : - Asks 2 Ss to do exercises : a) Many lakes / rivers / become / dry . => b) Weather / get / worse . => - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms) :. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. * Warm up ( 5ms) Word square - Ask Ss to find out 7 adjectives. E X P E N S I B O A M D N U V E U B O I S V E A I C D R T R U Y L E T L L A T S M R Y H G I U O N O I S Y F B P T F D E L U - Ask Ss to work in 2 teams - Ask Ss to go to the board and circle the word they find - The team which circles more words will win the game Modern – dirty – busy – noisy – tall – expensive – beautiful . A/ SPEAKING (16 ms) Pre – speaking (4 ms)  Setting the scene “ Hoa,s grandfather is 78 “ - Five years ago , she was 73 and she was stronger than she is now . - Ask Ss to make a sentence about her health => Hoa,s grand father is getting weaker + Form : am / is / are + V-ing (138). Work in group Ss to find adjectives.. out. 7. go to the board and circle the word they find. Work in the whole class . Listen and copy.

(139) + Use : used to describe changes with get and become While – speaking ( 8 ms) : - Ask Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and talk to their partners about the changes of the town . The words in the box under the pictures may help you - Write the word prompts on the board so that Ss can speak easily - traffic - > busy - sky -> cloudy - houses -> high - city -> beautiful - trees - > green - Get Ss to work in pairs - Monitor and help Ss speak * Possible answers : - The traffic is getting busier . - There are more tall buildings and houses . - The houses are getting more modern - The town is becoming more beautiful . - The streets are becoming cleaner / larger / noisier Post – speaking ( 4 ms) : - Ask Ss to work in groups and talk about changes in their hometown / neighborhood . - Call on volunteer from each group to show their ideas before the class . Other groups can add in their ideas . B/ LISTENING ( 15 ms): * Pre – listening (5 ms) - Set the scene “ Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the phone . She is coming to visit Lan in Hanoi “ - Ask Ss to predict information in the dialogue . - Call on some Ss to report their predictions * While - listening (10 ms): - Turn on the tape and check their predictions - Let them listen twice and find out the missing words individually . - Ask Ss to share their answers with their partners - Call some Ss to read their results Give feedback 1. that 2. this 3. It is 4. where 5. from 6. coming 7. next week 8. arriving 9. Thursday 10 . late 11. afternoon 12 . speak 13. my 14 . get her. Consolidation ( 2ms) Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1m) Write some sentences , using Present Progressive Tense to describe changes in their school F/ Self- Evaluation: (139). Work in pairs - look at the two pictures on page 73 and talk to their partners about the changes of the town Ss to work in pairs. copy down. Work in group Work individually. predict information report their predictions Listen to the tape to check their predictions Listen again and share their answers with their friends . Read aloud .. their. answers. Work in pairs to practice the dialogue Retell the main points Do exercise at home.

(140) (140).

(141) (141).

(142) Week : 20 Period: 55. Date of preparation:06/01/2013 Date of teaching: 08/01/2013. UNIT 9: A FIRST-AID COURSE LESSON 1:. GETTING STARTED LISTEN AND READ. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know what they would do in the situations which require first - aids. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: The present simple tense. 3. Language skills: Listening , reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: D/Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan. E/ Procedure: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (8’) - Stick some flashcards that have some situations on it. - Give ss some pictures. I. Getting started:. - Lead to the lesson.. 2/ Presentation: (15’). STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES - Observe. - Match the pictures with the right situations. 1. A girl has a burn on her arm: cold water/ ice 2. A boy has a bad cut on his leg: alcohol, sterile dressing 3. A girl has a nose bleed: handkerchief, cotton wool 4. A boy has a bee sting: medicated oil - Listen. - Repeat in chorus and guess the meaning, then write down.. - Write some vocabulary. II. Listen and read: 1. Vocabulary:  concious (adj): tỉnh táo # unconcious  bleed(v): chảy máu  handkerchief (n): khăn tay  wound(n): vết thương  injured (a): bị thương  emergency( n): ca cấp cứu  ambulance ( n): xe cứu thương - Check: what and where. - Go to the boad and write the words in the circles. 3/ Practice: (12’)  Activity 1: - Set the scene: There is an accident at Quang Trung school. A girl fell off her bike and had a (142). - Listen and give the answers..

(143) bad cut on her head. Lan called a nurse. And you will find out what she guides. 1. Is a student hurt at quang Trung school? 2. Is she concious?.  Activity 2:. - Listen and check. - Practice the dialouge in pairs. - Read the dialouge in silent and select the topics covered in the dialouge. a–b–c–e–f. - Let Ss listen again and check the answers. - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Have Ss read the dialogue silently.. 4/ Production: (8’). - Hang the chart with the paragraph on the board. - Work in groups to fill in the gap. 1. fell 2. concious 3. cut There was an emergency at Lan’s school. A student (1) ………………… off her bike and hit 4. bleeding 5. ambulance 6. awake her head on the road. She was (2) ………………… but she cut her head and the (3) ………………… was (4) ………………… badly. Lan telephoned Bach Mai hospital and asked the nurse to send an (5) ………………… To Quang Trung school. Lan was asked to keep the student (6) ………………… while waiting for the ambulance. 5/ Homework: (2’) - Write assignments. - Have Ss: + Learn by heart vocabulary. + Practice the dialogue again. + Prepare “Speak”. IV. COMMENT: ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. Period Period : 56 Week : 20. Preparing date: 07/1/2013 Teaching date: 09/1/2013 (143).

(144) UNIT 9: A FIRST-AIDS COURSE Lesson 2: Speak and listen A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - make and respond to requests , offers , and promises. - know how to listen for details about the activities talking place in an emergency room . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: request, offers, and promises. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, writing, reading. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD. E/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities ● Warm up ( 5 ms):. Ss’ activities. * Net work. Situations Situationswhich whichrequire require first first––aid aid. Group work of 8 – 10 students. *Possible answers : - have a snake bite / have a burn / have a cut / have a bee sting / have a nose bleed ... A/ SPEAKING ( 16 ms) Pre - speaking (4 ms) : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some models sentences . * Set the scene : Ask Ss some qs to elicit the models a. I want you to get me a bandage. How can I say? b. I would like you to come to my party. How can I say? c. I tell my mother that I will surely finish my work before bedtime . How can I say ? - Have Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on the board ( underline the key words ) a. Will you ( please ) get me a bandage ? b. Would you like to come to my party ? c. I promise I will finish my homework before bedtime . => Concept checking - Get Ss to work out the rules for themselves by asking questions . - After formulating the model sentences , elicit some more phrases with the same use from students . * To make a request : Would /can / could / Will + you (please) + V…? *Reponses : (144). - answer questions to elicit the models. - repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on the board ( underline the key words ). - work out the rules for themselves by asking questions T- Ss.

(145) + Sure / Ok / All right . - I am sorry . I can / I am afraid not * To make an offer Will / Won,t you ….? Shall I / can I + V …..? Would you like + to + V …...? What can I do / get for you ? Can I get you ……………..? *Responses : + Yes , please . / That would be nice . - No , thank you . * To make a promise I promise I will / I will not …… I will ……I promise . I promise to …………... *Reponses : I hope . / Good . / I am glad . / Do not forget - Ask Ss to copy down . * While - speaking ( 8 ms): + Matching : - Hang the chart with the statements on the board . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures ( page 82 ) and match the situations with the statements . 1. The girl has a burn on her hand . 2. The girl has a bad fever . 3. The boy has just broken the vase . 4. The boy has a headache . 5. The boy has a snake bite . - Give feedback : 1.a 2. d 3. e 4. b 5. c *Picture Drill : - Identify the situations in the pictures Picture a) -> request Picture b) -> offer / request Picture c) -> offer / request Picture d) -> offer Picture e) -> promise - Ask Ss to work in pairs + Model : Could you give me a bandage , please ? Sure . Here you are - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges in front of class. Post - speaking ( 4 ms): Pair work ( closed pairs ) - Get Ss in turn to practice all the exchanges - Monitor and correct , encourage Ss to make sentences for themselves - Collect their ideas and write them on the boards * Suggested answers : b. A : Can I get you some water / medicine ? (145). - Pairs work. T – Ss - T – Ss - Pairs work copy down. - look at the pictures - match the situations with the statements .. Whole class Group work of 4 / 5 Ss. work in pairs demonstrate the exchanges in front of class . - practice all the exchanges. make sentences for themselves. - practice in front of class .. Group work of 4/5 Ss.

(146) B : Yes, please . c. A : Can I get you some bandage ? B : That would be nice d. A : You must have a fever . Can I get you some medicine / water ? B : No , I am fine . Thank you . e. A : I promise I will not play soccer in the house again. B : I hope so . B/ LISTENING (15 ms) Warm up ( 2ms) Guess from context What action ? - Ask Ss to look at the picture and write out all the verbs describing the actions of the people in it . - Tell Ss the group having the most right verbs is the winner . - Give feedback : to drive , wheel / move / push , weight , wait , lie , stand , lean . = > Lead in the new lesson *Pre- listening ( 3ms): Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words * Pre teach vocabulary : - an eye chart ( using picture ) -> eye sight - a parademic : he takes care of patients but he is not a doctor nor a nurse - a wheelchair ( using picture ) -> to wheel ( to push a wheel chair ) - a stretcher ( picture ) - a crutch -> crutches ( picture ) -> Have Ss copy * Checking technique : What and where * Matching : - Ask Ss to look at the picture in their books again and match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words in the box . - Call on some volunteers from each group to demonstrate in front of class . - Give feedback A -> ambulance D -> eye chart B -> wheelchair E -> scale C -> crutches F -> stretcher While – listening ( 6 ms) : * Order Prediction - Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but leave the words . - Put the words in the table Guess key ambulance 3 wheelchair 2 (146). group having the most right verbs is the winner .. -Repeat in chorus. T – Ss copy down. - look at the picture in their books again and match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words in the box .. T- Ss / individual work listen to a paragraph about the activities taking place in an emergency room which contains the words on the board Groupwork of 4/5 Ss copy and guess the order of the words Whole class. read the statements.

(147) crutches 6 eye chart 4 scale 5 stretcher 1 - Have Ss copy and guess the order of the words - Play the tape and ash Ss to listen - Ask Ss to give their answers and correct *. True / False statements - Stick the chart with the statements on the board : + A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency room + The patient,s head is bandaged + A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient sitting on it . + The eye chart consists of 28 letters ranging in the different size . + The baby,s mother is trying to stop the nurse from weighing her baby . - Ask Ss to read the statements carefully and check if they understand the meaning of the statements - Have Ss work in pairs to decide which of the statements is true and which is false . - Play the tape and have Ss listen ( 2 or 3 times ) - Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback 1. False ( a parademic not a doctor ) 2. True 3. False ( empty wheelchair not with a patient ) 4. True 5 . False ( stop her baby from crying ). Post – listening( 4ms) : * Write it up - Have Ss write the story about the activities in the picture , using the Present Continuous . “ This is the emergency room in a large hospital ….. “ Consolidation (2 ms) - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1m) 1. Let Ss do the exercises ( 3,4 / 56 in the workbook 2. Prepare the next lesson Unit 9: Read Week:20 Period: 57. - work in pairs to decide which of the statements is true and which is false . - read their answers and give feedback. Individual. write the story Continuous . - Some volunteers from each group to demonstrate in front of class . - Retell the main points. do homework at home. Date of preparation: 8/01/2013 Date of teaching: 10/01/2013. UNIT 9: A FIRST – AID COURSE LESSON 3: READ A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - read for the instructions about some more situations requiring first – aid . - know how to use “ in order to , so as to”. (147).

(148) B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: commants 3. Language skills: Reading, listening, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan, chart , picture / drawing , mimes , 4 cardboards . E/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm – Up: (5’) - Ask students to take turns to make and respond to - Pair works. requests, offers and promises with the pictures given. 2. Pre – Reading: (5’) - Explain new words: 1. lie flat (v) 6. revive (v) 2. force (v) 7. overheat (v) 3. elevate (v) 8. minimize (v) 4. lower (v) 9. tissue damage (n) 5. victim (n) - Ask students to match the first-aid correctly (Handouts) Case : FAINTING __ SHOCK __ BURNS First-aid: a. Cool the burns immediately so as to minimize tissue damage. b. Don’t force him/ her to sit or stand. c. Don’t give the victim any food or drink. d. Ease pain with ice or cold water packs. e. Don’t give the victim drugs or alcohol. f. Elevate the patient’s feet, or lower his/her head below the level of the heart. g. Give the victim a cup of tea when he/ she revives. h. Leave the patient lying flat. i. Put the affected part under a running cold tap (If possible). j. Cover the burned area with a thick sterile dressing. k. Don’t overheat the victim with blankets or coats. l. Don’t let the victim get cold. - Ask students to give feedback. - Ask questions to elicit the grammar point. Why should we cool the burn immediately? We should do it so as to / in order to minimize the tissue damage. - Have students practice the questions and answers. - Explain the grammar point: Meaning : để * Form: [ so as to / in order to + V- inf. ] * Usage: To indicate purposes. 3. While – Reading: (15’) - Ask students to read the instructions on p.83 to check (148). - Write.. - Group works.. - Give feedback. - Individual work.. - Pair works. - Listen..

(149) their answers. - Ask students to read aloud the answers. 1. Fainting: h, b, f, l, g. 2. Shock : k, c, e. 3. Burns : a, i, d, j. - Have students read the statements on the page 84 and match three leadings to them. A. Fainting: a, c, e. B. Shock : b. C. Burns : d. 4. Post – Reading: (13’) - Ask students to read the instructions again and fill them in the grid. Case Do Don’t Fainting Shock Burns - Ask students to give feedback. 5. Homework: (2’) - Reread the instructions. - Do the exercises 3,5 /p. 56-57 (workbook). - Prepare next lesson: Unit 9 – Write/ p.83. - Individual work. - Read the answers.. - Pair works.. - Pair works.. - Give feedback.. Take note.. IV. COMMENT: ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 13/01/2013. Week: 21 Period: 58. Date of teaching: 15/01/2013. UNIT 9: A FIRST-AID COURSE Lesson 4: WRITE. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know how to write a thank – you note . - develop Ss’ Writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: 3. Language skills: Writing, listening, reading, speaking. C/ Techniques: (149).

(150) D/Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures. E/ Procedure:. (150).

(151) Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. (151).

(152) 1. Warm – Up: (5’) - Organize game: “Arranging “Arranging a letter” 1/ I am looking forward to hearing from you soon. 2/ I was happy to receive your letter that you sent me on Sunday. 3/ Your friend, 4/ As you said in the letter that you liked Vietnamses dishes, I send you a packet of Vietnamese special food. 5/ Dear Tom, 6/ I hope that you like this present from Ha noi. 7/ Please write me when you receive the parcel. 8/ Nga 2. Pre – Writing: Writing: (10’) - Set the scene: ”Nga was sick and she had to go to hospital. After she left the hospital, she wrote a thankyou note to Hoa. Why and what did she write?” - Have Ss do True/ False predictions. 1. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some candy. 2. Hoa’s gift cheered Nga up. 3. Nga left the hospital on Friday morning. 4. Nga would like Hoa to see her at the hospital on the weekend. 5. Nga is bored now. 6. Nga writes the letter at the hospital. - Ask Ss to give feedback. - Explain vocabulary: + Thank sb for sth: + Cheer sb up = to make sb feel happier + Come over to (v)… : visit sb or a place - Practice new words. - Ask Ss to look at the letter on page 84 and complete the correct form of the verbs. - Call some Ss to give their answers. (1) was , (2) were , (3) helped , (4) came , (5) am , (6) will telephone. - Ask Ss to read the whole letter to check the True/ False sentences predictions. 1. F  flowers. 4. F  at her house. 2. T 5. T 3. F  on Monday morning. 6. F  at her house.. -Individual work Answer: 5 – 2 –4 – 6–7 –1- 3– 8. - Listen to the teacher. - Pair works.. - Give feedback - Listen and write.. - Practice - Pair works. - Give the answer. - Read silently and check the predictions.. - Work in individual. 3. While – Writing: (15’) - Ask Ss to write a thank – you note to a friend, using - Practice. the questions on page 85. - Call some Ss to practice asking and answering the - Pair works. questions. - Ask Ss to join the sentences into a paragraph to make a thank-you note. Suggested letter Dear …, (152).

(153) Thank you very much for the present you sent me on my birthday party last Sunday on January 25. It was very lovely. I loved it very much. Now I am alone and feel tired from studying too much. I want to go out to enjoy the fresh air and relax my mind. Do you want to go on a picnic with me this Sunday? I’ll phone you on Saturday afternoon. I’ll come and pick you up at 7.30 am. I’m looking forward to seeing you. Your friend, (signature) 4. Post – Writing: (13’) - Call one - two students to write their letter on the board. - Correct mistakes if necessary. 5. Homework: Homework: (2’) - Write another letter to a friend for other occasions. - Prepare next lesson: Unit 9 – Language Focus/ p.86. - Write the letter on the board. - Listen. -Take note.. IV. COMMENTS: COMMENTS: -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week: 21 Period: 59. Date of preparation: 14/01/2013 Date of teaching: 16/01/2013. UNIT 9: A FIRST-AID COURSE LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know how to use “ in order to , so as to “ to indicate purpose , Future simple and Modal “ will “ to make requests , offers and promises B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: 3. Language skills: Writing, listening, reading, speaking. C/ Techniques: D/Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures. E/ Procedure:. (153).

(154) Teacher’s activities 1. Warm – Up: Up: (5’) - Ask students to write a thank-you note to a friend, and to invite him/ her to go on a picnic. 2. Exercises: Exercises: (35’) a/ Exercise 1: In order to/ so as to - Ask students to look at the language focus 1 to do matching. - Ask students to give feedback. 1f , 2c , 3b , 4e , 5a , 6d - Have students practice asking and answering. Why do you always keep the window open? I always keep the window open so as to/ in order to let fresh air in. b/ Exercise 2: 2: Future simple tense - Ask students to look at the dialogue to complete it with the correct word or short form. (1) will , (2) will , (3) won’t , (4) Shall , (5) will , (6) ‘ll. - Have students practice the dialogue in pairs. c/ Exercise 3: 3: Modal will or shall to make requests - Ask students to look at the pictures and the given words to make meaningful phrases. a. open the window. d. turn on the TV. b. give it to me. e. pour me a glass of c. answer the water. telephone. f. get me the cushion. - Have students remind of the requests with “Will” - Ask students to complete the dialogues. a. Will you open the window, please? b. Will you give it to me, please? c. Will you answer the telephone, please? d. Will you turn on the TV, please? e. Will you pour me a glass of water, please? f. Will you get me the cushion, please? - Ask students to practice the dialogues. d/ Exercise 4: 4: Modal will or shall to make requests, offers or promises. - Ask students to look at the pictures, and make requests, offers or promises with the words given in the box. - Get students to recognize the situations and ask them to say. The garbage can is overflowing. Somebody should empty it.  Will you empty the garbage can, please? - Ask students to read the answers. b. Will you paint the door, please? I will paint the door tomorrow. c. Will you study harder, please? (154) I will study harder. d. Will you carry the bag for me, please? Shall I carry the bag for you?. Students’ activities - Whole class.. - Pair works. - Give feedback - Pair works.. - Pair works.. - Pair works. - Look at the picture.. - Remind. - Pair works.. - Pair works. - Look at the picture. -Listen and recognize the situations.. - Read the answer..

(155) IV. COMMENTS: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week: 21 Period: 60. Date of preparation: 15/ 01/2013 Date of teaching: 17/ 01/2013. UNIT 10: RECYCLING. LESSON 1: Getting started + Listen & Read A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - know what they should do to protect the environment and save natural resources . They will also be able to understand the structure: S + to be + adj + that – clause. - Developing Skills: listening, reading, speaking. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: environment words. 2. Grammar: modal verb ‘ can’ , present simple. 3. Language skills: listening, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan ,6 flashcards , a chart. E/ Procedures:. (155).

(156) Teacher’s activities 1. Warm – Up: (5’)  Brainstorming: think of ways to reduce the amount of garbage they produce. + reuse plastic bags/ use cloth bags + use tree leaves to wrap things + use garbage to make fertilizer + use used papers to make toys + make vegetable matter to make animal food 2. Presentation: (10’) - Explain new words: + Representative (adj) + Protect (v) + Natural resources (n) + Recycle (v) + Over package (adj) + Contact (v) + Reuse (v) + Reduce (v) + Organization (n) - Ask students: Which organization does this logo. (156). Students’ activities - Group works.. - Answer question. - Pair works..

(157) IV. COMMENTS: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week: 22 Period: 61. Date of preparation: 20/ 01/2013 Date of teaching: 22/01/ 2013. UNIT 10: RECYCLING LESSON 2: SPEAK AND LISTEN A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - practice giving and responding to instructions and listening for specific information about making compost . - develop Ss’ speaking and listening skills. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Voc of recycling. 2. Grammar: infinitive commands, modals: should, can. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD. E/ Procedure:. (157).

(158) Teacher’s activities 1. Warm – Up: (5’) - Ask students to look carefully at the picture then tell them to name as many things as possible. “used papers, old newspapers, books, cardboard boxes, bottles, glasses, jars, plastic bags, food cans, drinking tins, vegetables, clothes, shoes, schoolbags, sandals, fruit peels, rotten fruits, material, cloth bags” 2. Pre – Speaking: (8’) - Ask students to classify the items into groups and put them in the right row. Group Items Paper Used paper, old newspapers, books, cardboard boxes. Glass Bottles, glasses, jars. Plastic plastic bottles, ~ bags, ~ wares. Metal food cans, drinking tins /cans. Fabric clothes, cloth bags, material. Leather shoes, sandals, school bags. Vegetable vegetables, fruit peels, rotten matter fruits. - Explain some new words: + leather (n) + fabric (n). (158). Students’ activities - Team competition.. - Group works.. - Listen and write.. Plastic Leathe r Paper.

(159) IV. COMMENTS: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week: 22 Period: 62. Date of preparation: 21/ 01/ 2013 Date of teaching: 23/ 01/ 2013. UNIT 10: RECYCLING Lesson 3: Read A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - form the passive in the Present Simple . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Voc of recycling. 2. Grammar: Passive form, Present perfect. 3. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing. C/ Techniques : D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart . pictures , drawing . E/ Procedure:. (159).

(160) Teacher’s activities 1. Warm – Up: (5’)  Have students play game: “Jumbled words” 1. vimerentnno  environment 2. lecyrec  recycle 3. clipsat  plastic 4. begraba  garbage 5. suere  reuse 6. mocstop  compost 7. firtelezir  fertilizer 8. curede  reduce 9. ceptrot  protect 2. Pre – Reading: (5’) - Have students do matching prediction. Used things Recycling facts 1. Car tires a. is broken, melted and made 2. Milk into new glassware. bottles b. is made into compost. 3. Glass c. are cleaned and refilled. 4. Drink cans d. are recycled to make pipes 5. Household and floor coverings. and garden e. are brought back for waste. recycling. - Explain vocabulary: 1. tire (n). (160). Students’ activities - Team competition.. - Group works.. - Listen and write..

(161) IV. COMMENTS: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. Week: 22 Period: 63. Planning date: 21/01/2013 Teaching date: 24/01/2013. UNIT 10: RECYCLING Lesson 4. WRITE. A /Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - write a set of instructions, using the sequencing . - develop Ss’ writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: infinitive, Conj: first, next, then, after that, finally. 3. Language skills: writing, speaking, reading, listening. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures. drawing, mime , picture E/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm-up: 5’  Group work (2)  Have Ss play a game:” lucky number” 1 2 3 1. What can we do with plastic bags, plastic bottles? 4 5 6 2. What can we do with vegetable matter? 5: lucky number 3. Which group do food cans or drink cans belong to? 4. Are old school bags or shoes leather? 6. What can we do with old paper?  Congratulate the winner. 2. Pre-writing: 8’ * Activity 1: < New words>  Elicits the new words: - soak (v) (mime) Listen and answer - press (v) (mime)  Individual - wire mess (n) (translation) - mash (v) (mime) (161).

(162) - tray (n) (picture) - scatter (v) (mime  Checking the new words (rub out and remember).  Have Ss practice the new words (rub out and remember) *Activity 2:  Have Ss read the passage and complete it with words given.  Get feedback and correct.  Have Ss review words of sequences when giving instruction Note: First- Next-Then…Finally *Activity 3  Set the scene: In some areas people burn the dry tea leaves to keep mosquitoes away.  Have Ss look at the pictures/94 and describe them..  Listen to the introduction  Take note new words  Read the passage- complete  Group work key: 1.use 2.mix 3.place 4.press 5.wrap 6.wait 7.dry  Review the words  Take note  Listen to the scene  Picture description  Whole class. 3. While-writing:10’  Have Ss write the instructions on how to prepare tea Individual writing leaves (pictures and given words), using words of sequences. Suggested idea: a. First, take the used tea leaves from the tea pot. b. Next, scatter the tea leaves on the tray. c.Then, dry the tea leaves in the sun. d. Finally, put the dry leaves into a pot for future use. 4. Post-writing:6’  Pair work  Have Ss exchange their writing and do peer correction.  Take note mistakes  Collect 2 writings to correct before the class. Suggested activity:  Pair work  Write a set of instructions on how to recycle glass (Ex5/61-Exercise book).  Correct mistakes 5. Homework: 1’  Copy down  Write a set of instructions on how to ……..  Learn by heart the new words Comments: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TEST 15’ I.Choose the best answer :(6ms) 1.It’s is interesting ……………..English . A.learn B.to learn C.learning D.learned 2.Farmers used vegetables matter and animal dung to make…………….. (162).

(163) A.compost B.water C.paper D.newspaper 3.It’s important …………….students attend all the competisions. A.in order to B.that C. to D.x 4.Milk bottles can be ………….after being cleaned . A.recycle B.soaked C. bronken D.reused 5.English is …………..all over the world . A.speak B.spoke C.spoken D.speaked 6. The glass is broken up,………….and made in to new glassware . A.refilled B.melted C.cooked D.recycled I .Change these sentences into passive form: 1.He sends the letter . ……………………………………………………………… 2.Mai watched that film last night . ……………………………………………………………. Week: 23 Planning date: 27/ 01/ 2013 Period: 64 Teaching date:29/ 02/ 2013. UNIT 10: RECYCLING Lesson 5. Language focus. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - form the passive in Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives . B. Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: Passive form, a noun clause: “ It’s + adj + to V”. 3. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , lesson plan, chart , picture / drawing , mimes , 4 cardboards . E/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1.Warm-up:5’  Have Ss play a game” Pelmanism” Break melted Wash Blow Build Make Washed Made Melt blown Built broken  Congratulate the winner and have Ss read the verbs again ACTIVITY 1: <Passive voice of simple present>:10’  Eliciting questions: What do people do with used paper? People recycle old paper to make new one. What is recycled to make new paper ?  Used paper is recycled to make new one by people (163). Student’s activities  Group work (2)  Read the verbs  Whole class.  Listen- answer  Compare two sentences.

(164)  Have Ss compare the difference between two sentences.  Guide Ss to change from active to passive of simple p’  resent Active: S + V + O Passive: S + am/is/are + Vpp………….(+ by O)  Have Ss do L.F 1/p95 Eg: break the glass into small pieces.  The glass is broken into pieces.  Check and correct mistakes ( oral-written).  Identify and take note. ACTIVITY 2: <Passive voice of simple future>:17’  Eliciting questions: What will you do after class?  I will do my homework after class. What will be done after class?  My homework will be done ( by me) after class.  Guide Ss how to change active into passive in simple future and modal verbs. Active: S + will/ modal verbs + V-inf + O Passive: S+ will/modal verbs + be +Vpp….(+by O) Modal verbs: must/can/shall/may/have to… Have Ss do L.F 2/96 Check and correct mistake (oral-written).  Individual- whole class Key: 2. Then the glass is washed with detergent liquid. 3.The glass pieces are dried completely. 4. They are mixed with certain specific chemicals. 5.The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid. 6. A long pipe is used, it is dripped into the liquid, then the liquid is blown into intended shapes.  Pair work  Role play Key: 1.will be shown 2.will it be built 3.will be finished 4.will it be made  Say again. 4.Consolidation:10’  Briefly again how to change active to passive of simple present and simple future.  Have Ss change some sentences into passive voice 1.People speak English all over the world.  English……………………………………………….. 2.They don’t grow rice in Africa. Rice…………………………………………………………. 3.The students will hand the essays next week.  The essays…………………………………………………….. 4.Will they build a new school in this neighborhood?  Will a new school…………………………………………..? 5.Do they teach French in this school? Is French……………………………………………..?. 5.Homework:3’.  Individual- whole class. English is spoken all over the world. Rice isn’t grown in Africa The essays will be handed next week Will a new school be built in this neighborhood? Is French taught in this school?  Copy down. (164).

(165)  Review the structures of passive form.  Do Ex6,7,8,9/p.63 Comments: ............................................................................................................................................. …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …… ............................................................................................................................................. ……. Week : 23 Period: 65. Date of preparation: 28/01/2013 Date of teaching: 30/02/2013. UNIT 11:TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM GETTING STARTED LESSON 1: LISTEN AND READ A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use some expressions to express their interest . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Traveling words. 2. Grammar: I’d like to……? Would you mind + V-ing/ If….. did? 3. Language skills: Listening, reading, writing, speaking. C/ Techniques : D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan. E/ Procedure: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (8’). STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. Kim’s game - Hang up the pictures on the board with the names of the places, then give out the names. I. Getting started:. - Observe, and match the names with the places of interest in Viet Nam. - Lead to the lesson.. - Listen. (165). a. Ngo Mon (Gate) b. Nha Rong Harbor c. The Temple of Literature d. Ha Long Bay.

(166) 2/ Presentation: (15’). - Look at the picture and listen.. - Use the picture to set the sence. II. Listen and read:. - Ask Ss to listen the dialogue and find out “How many people are there in Tim’s family?” - Teach vocabulary using pictures. 1. Vocabulary:  Luggage (n): hành lí  Crop (n): mùa vụ  Corn (n): bắp, ngô  Buffalo (n): trâu  sugar cane (n): mía - Check vocabulary:Matching - Elicit the structures to Ss. 2. Structure: Ex: Would you mind sitting in the front seat? + Would you mind + V-ing…? Ex: Would you mind if I took a photo? + Would you mind if + S + V2/V-ed…? 3/ Practice: (12’).  Activity 1: - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in group of five. 2. Practice the dialogue: - Call some groups to role play..  Activity 2: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make T/F statements. 3. T/F statements: a. T b. T c. F …. In a taxi. d. T e. T f. F …… Rice, corn and sugar canes - Call some Ss to give feedback. 4/ Production: (8’) - Ask Ss to complete the summary using information from the dialogue. Tim is Hoa’s (1)_____. Tim and his family come to (2) _____. Hoa meets them at the(3) _________.They take a (4)________ to Ha Noi. Tim and Shannon are excited about what they see along the (5)_____ to the city: a boy riding a (6)_____ , (7)________, corn and (8)_______. (166). - Listen and answer the question. + There are 4 people: his parents, Shannon and Tim. - Repeat in chorus and guess the meaning, then write down.. - Do as directed. - Listen and take note.. - Practice the dialogue. - Role play. - Work in pairs.. - Give feedback. - Work in group of four. 1. pen pal 2. Viet Nam 3. airport 4. taxi 5. road 6. water buffalo 7. rice paddies.

(167) 8. sugar canes. 5/ Homework: (2’). - Write assignments. - Have Ss: + Learn by heart vocabulary and structure. + Practice the dialogue again. + Prepare “Speak”. IV. COMMENT: ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ Week : 23 Period: 66. Date of preparing: 30/ 01/ 2013 Date of teaching: 31/ 02/ 2013. UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM. LESSON 2:. SPEAK. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - make and respond to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions . - listen and match the places in the box to their correct positions on the map B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Place direction. 2. Grammar: Formal request. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD, a mapped dialogue chart .. E/ Procedure: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (6’). STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. Slap the board - Ask Ss to play game. zoo market museum. - Play game.. restaurant - Listen.. - Lead to the lesson.. 2/ Pre-speaking: (15’). - Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr. Johns and between Hoa and Tim. I. Structure: 1. To make a formal request : (167). - Listen and take note..

(168) Would you mind+V -ing ? Do you mind + V-ing? * Reply: agree disagree + No, I don’t mind. + I’m sorry, I can’t. + No, of course not. + I’m sorry, that is not + Not at all. Possible. 2. To make a suggestion: Do you mind if I + V(bare-inf)? Would you mind if I + V (past)? * Reply: agree disagree + Please do. + I’d prefer you didn’t. + Please go ahead. + I’d rather you didn’t.. 3/ While-speaking: (14’). - Set the sence. - Give Ss a modal dialogue used sub-board. * Modal dialogue: A: Excuse me. Would you mind if I asked you a question? B: Please go ahead. A: I want to visit a market. Could you suggest one? B: I suggest going to Ben Thanh market. A: That sounds interesting. Thank you. B: You’re welcome. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs.. - Listen. - Practice the modal dialogue.. - Work in pairs make a similar dialogue, using the expressions in the box on page 101. - Perform their work.. - Call some pairs to present.. 4/ Post-speaking: (8’). - Give Ss some handouts of exercises. *Use “Would / Do you mind …?” to make these sentences more polite Ex: Shall I sit here? Do you mind if I sit here? 1. Can I move the fridge to the right corner? Would you mind if …………………….. 2. Could I smoke? Do you mind if ………………………… 3. Could you turn on the TV? Wouldyou mind ……………… 4. Can you use your pen? Do you mind ………………….. 5/ Homework: (2’). - Do exercise individually.. 1. Would you mind if I moved the fridge to the right corner? 2. Do you mind if I smoke? 3. Would you mind turning on the TV? 4. Do you mind using your pen?. - Write assignments.. - Ask Ss to + Learn the structure. + Prepare unit 9: Listen.. IV. COMMENT: ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... (168).

(169) ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................ Week : 24 Period:67. Date of preparing: 16/ 02/ 2013 Date of teaching: 19/ 02/ 2013. UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 3:. LISTEN. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - make and respond to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions . - listen and match the places in the box to their correct positions on the map B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Place direction. 2. Grammar: Formal request. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD, a mapped dialogue chart .. E/ Procedure: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (6’). STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. Matching - Have Ss match the words with their meaning. A B 1. bus station a. nhà hàng 2. hotel b. chùa 3. temple c. trạm xe buýt 4. pagoda d. khách sạn 5. restaurant e. đền - Lead to the lesson.. - Match. 1- c 2- d 3- e 4- b 5- a - Listen.. 2/ Pre-listening: (15’) (169).

(170) - Teach vocabulary. I. Vocabulary:  Highway (n): đường cao tốc  Book (v): đặt trước  Bridge (n): cây cầu  Tourist information center (n): trung tâm du lịch - Check vocabulary: Slap the board - Hang up the map and set the scene: The Johns family are going around Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5 places in the map. Look at the map and guess where they go. - Read, listen and take note.. - Do as directed, - Look at the map and guess.. 3/ While-listening: (15’ test)  Activity 1:. - Let Ss listen and match the places to the correct positions. * Match the places in the map to their correct positions a. restaurant b. hotel c. bus station d. pagoda e. temple.  Activity 2:. - Listen and match.. - Listen and make T/F statements. * Key: 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. T. - Ask Ss to listen again and make T/F statements. * True or false 1. The hotel is on the Highway. 2. Shannon is hungry. 3. The bus station is behind the tourist information center. 4. The restaurant is opposite the direction from the pagoda. 5. The pagoda and the temple are on the same road.. 4/ Post-listening: (8’). - Listen and check.. - Give the answer.. 5/ Homework: (2’). - Write assignments.. - Ask Ss to + Learn the vocabulary. + Prepare unit 9: Read.. IV. COMMENT: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ (170).

(171) Week : 24 Period: 68. Date of preparation: 19/ 02/ 2013 Date of teaching: 20/ 02/ 2013. UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 4:. READ. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - get the information from simple tourist advertisements . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: tourist vocabulary. 2. Grammar: Ed/ ing participles. 3. Language skills: Reading, speaking, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart . pictures , drawing . E/ Procedure:. TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (6’) Kim’s game. STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. - Give out some pictures of Viet Nam, then put away.. - Call out the name. Nha Trang Da Lat Sapa Ha Long Bay. - Listen.. - Lead to the lesson.. 2/ Pre-reading: (14’) (171).

(172) - Teach vocabulary. I. Vocabulary:  Resort (n) : khu an dưỡng, khu nghỉ mát  offshore island (n): hải đảo  accommodation (n): chổ ở  waterfall(n): thác nước  tribe – tribal(n) bộ tộc  World Heritage(n) di sản văn hóa thế giới Ex: Ha Long Bay is a World Heritage Site  magnificent cave: hang động hùng vĩ - Check vocabulary: R.O.R. - Listen, guess the meaning and read.. - Do as directed.. 3/ While-reading: (15’)  Activity 1:. - Read the brochures in silence. - Work in group to check the topics mentioned about the resorts. - Exchange the sub – boards.. - Ask Ss to read the brochures in silence. - Give them handout (Ex1/104) - Ask Ss to exchange the sub – boards. NT DL SP Caves x Flights to Hn x Hotels x x Local transport x x x Mini- hotel Mountain slopes x Railway x Restaurants Sand beaches x Tourist x x x attractions Types of food Villages x Waterfalls x World Heritage. HLB x x x. x x. - Work in groups. x.  Activity 2: - Set the scene: these people want to spend their coming summer vacation in Viet Nam. Help them find a suitable place. a. Where should Andrew go? b. Where should Mary go? c. Where should John go? d. Where should Joanne go? e. Where should Donna go? - Ask Ss to give feedback.. a. He should go to Sa Pa. b. She should go to Nha Trang. c. He should go to Nha Rong Harbor. d. She should go to Ha Long Bay. e. She should go to Da Lat. - Give feedback.. 4/ Post-reading: (8’). - Ask Ss to answer some questions.. - Answer some questions.. 1. Where do you go when you want to see caves?. 1. Ha Long Bay. 2. How can you go to other places from Sapa?. 2. by bus or by train. 3. Where can you visit Oceanic Institute .. 3. Nha Trang (172).

(173) 5/ Homework: (2’). - Write assignments.. - Have Ss: + Learn vocabulary by heart. + Read the brochures and do the tasks again. + Prepare “Write”.. IV. COMMENT: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ Week : 24 Period: 69. Date of preparation: 20/ 02/ 2013 Date of teaching: 21/ 02/ 2013. UNIT 11: TRAVELLING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 5:. WRITE. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know how to write a narrative , using a guided composition . - develop Ss’ Writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: The simple tense; Conjunctions; adverbs of time. 3. Language skills: Writing, reading, speaking, listening. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters. E/ Procedure: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (6’). STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. Ordering. - Ask Ss to look at the picture and read the passage in 3 minutes. - Put away the passage and ask Ss to order the sentences. - Correct and lead to the lesson.. 2/ Pre-writing: (14’) (173). - Observe and read. - Order the sentences in page 106. - Listen..

(174)  Activity 1: - Teach vocabulary. I. Vocabulary:  canoe (n): xuồng  paddle (n): mái cheøo o (v): cheøo  overturn (v): lật úp  rescue (v): cứu hộ  stumble (v): sẩy chân  strangely (adv): lạ - Check: Slap the board - Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out which tense is used..  Activity 2: - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and ask them to order the events.. - Listen, guess the meaning, then take note.. - Do as directed. - Read and find out the tense. Past simple - Look at the pictures and order the events. d – b – e – h – a – f – c –g. - Call Ss to give feedback. - Give feedback.. 3/ While-writing: (15’). - Write the story again in groups. - Ask Ss to write the story again in groups. - Hang up the sub – board. She had a Math exam on Friday and she got up late. She realized her alarm clock didn’t go off. As she was leaving it started to rain heavily. Uyen tried to run as fast as she could. Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell. Her schoolbage dropped into a pool of water and everything got wet. Strangely the rain stopped as she got to her classroom. Luckily Uyen had enough time to finish her test.. 4/ Post-writing: (8’). - Check their writing and give mark.. - Pay attention.. 5/ Homework: (2’). - Write assignments.. - Have Ss: + Learn vocabulary by heart. + Rewrite the passage. + Prepare “Language focus”. IV. COMMENT: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ (174).

(175) (175).

(176) Week : 25 Period: 70. Date of preparing: 24/02/2013 Date of teaching: 26/02/2013. UNIT 11: TRAVELLING AROUND VIET NAM. LESSON 6:. LANGUAGE FOCUS. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use Present and Past participles to describe things and people and the requests with “ Would / Do you mind if …..? and Would / Do you mind + V-ing …? “ B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: - ed and –ing participle - Would / Do you mind + V-ing………….? - Would / Do you mind if I……………? 3. Language skills: Writing, reading, speaking, listening. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Pictures , cardboards . gap – fill chart … E/ Procedure:. TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES. STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. 1/ Warm-up: (7’) Matching - Ask Ss to look at the picture and match the correct activities.. - Look at the picture carefully. Read a book Walk up the stairs Carry a bag Talk to Miss Lien Stand by the table Play chess. 2/ Exercises: (28’)  Exercise 1: (p. 108) - Ask Ss some questions. What is the boy doing? Who is the boy? - Elicit to make sentence using –ing participles. I. –ed and –ing participles: 1. -ing participle The boy reading a book is Ba. Present participle + Form: V –ing + Use: used as an adjective to qualify a noun with active meanings - Ask Ss to do task 1. 1. The woman carrying a bag is Miss Lien. 2. The boy talking to Miss Lien is Nam. 3. The man walking up the stairs is Mr. Quang (176). - Answer. The boy is reading a book. The boy is Ba. - Pay attention and take note.. - Work individually.

(177) 4. The girl standing by the table is Lan. 5. The girls playing chess are Nga and Hoa. - Call some Ss to give feedback.. - Give feedback. - Listen and take note..  Exercise 2: (p. 109) - Give example and elicit structure. 2. –ed participles The old lamp made in China is five dollars. -ed participle + Form: V –ed/ cột 3 + Use: used as an adjective to qualify a noun with passive meanings - Ask Ss to make sentences. 1. The box / paint in green / $1. 2. The doll / dress in pink / $2. 3. The flowers / wrap in a yellow paper / $1. 4. The toys / keep in a box / $10. 5. The toy car / recycle from plastic / $2..  Exercise 3, 4: (p. 109, 110). - Make the sentences. 1. The box painted in green is $1. 2. The doll dressed in pink is $2. 3. The flowers wrapped in a yellow paper is $1. 4. The toys kept in a box is $10. 5. The toy car recycled from plastic is $2. - Remind the structure.. - Ask Ss to remind the structure of request with “mind”. - Ask Ss to make request and response in pairs. 3/109. b. Would you mind putting out your cigarette? – Not at all. c. Would you mind waiting for a moment? – I’m sorry I can’t d. Would you mind getting me some coffee? – I’m sorry, that is not possible. 4/110 a. Do you mind if I sit down? – Please do b. Would you mind if I smoked? – I’d rather you didn’t. - Call some pairs to give feedback.. - Work in pairs.. - Give feedback.. 3/ Consolidation: (7’) - Ask Ss to choose the correct option. 1. Would you mind _____ the window? a. closing b. to close c. about closing d. closed 2. Would you mind if I _____ the phone? a. use b. will use c. used d. using 3. The road ______ down to the sea is very rough. a. going b. goes c. to go d. gone 4. I couldn’t find a guide-book ____ in English. a. writes b. written c. writing d. write 5. Passengers_____ to Cairo, please go to Gate 4. a. flying b. fly c. will fly d. are going to fly. 4/ Homework: (3’). - Choose the correct option. 1. a 2. c 3. d 4. b 5. a. - Write assignments.. - Have Ss: + Redo these exercises. + Prepare for the third test.. IV. COMMENT: (177).

(178) Week : 25 Period: 71. Date of preparing: 26/02/2013 Date of teaching: 28/02/2013. CONSOLIDATION 3 A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 9 to unit 11 so that they can supplement what they are short of . (to do the test well ). B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: 3. Language skills: Listening, writing, speaking, reading. C/ Techniques: D/ Teching aids: Lesson plan, posters . E/Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm – Up: (5’) - Ask Ss to make requests, using Do/ Would you mind to complete the dialogue Friend: had a bad cut on her hand Mother: need to turn off TV 2. Exercises (35’) a. Exercise 1: Passive form - Ask Ss to review structure passive form. S + tobe + V-ed/ III + by O. S + was/ were + V-ed/ III + by O. S + will/ shall/can …. + V-ed/ III + by O. - Ask Ss to give examples for each structure. Ex: The door is painted. - Give some sentences, ask Ss to rewrite the following sentences. 1. My father bought this car 2 years ago. 2. They have to speak English in class. 3. I will see that film. 4. They will finish this work next week. 5. He painted the gate 2 days ago. 6. She clean the living room every morning. - Call some Ss to write the answer. b. Exercise 2: Ed- Ing participle - Ask Ss to give example for structure. Ex: The girl standing over there is my sister. That pen is two dollars made in Japan. - Ask Ss rewrite the following sentences by using Ed(178). Students’ activities - Pair works.. - Review.. - Give examples. - Do exercise.. - Write the answer. - Give examples.. - Do exercise..

(179) Ing participles. 1. The man is Mr. Minh. He is reading book. 2. The girls are Nga and Lan. They are skipping rope. 3. That ruler is five dollars. It is made of metal. 4. The boys are the volunteer group of Quang Trung school. They are planting the trees on the hill. 5. That dress is cheap. It is made in Viet Nam. - Call some Ss to write the answer. c. Exercise 3: Do/ Would you mind.....? - Ask Ss to review. + Do/ Would you mind – V-ing …….? + Would you mind + if + V-ed/II ………………? + Do you mind + if + V-inf ………..? - Ask Ss to give example for structure. Ex: Would you mindturning off TV? Do you mind if I turn on the radio? Would you mind if I use your computer? d. Exercise 4: Adjectives + V-ing/ noun clause - Ask Ss to review. It’s + Adj + to-inf S + tobe + Adj + that + noun- clause - Ask Ss to give example for structure. Ex: It’s difficult to do this exercise. I am very happy that you will visit me tomorrow. 3. CONSOLIDATION (3’) Remind the structure.. - Write the answer. - Review.. - Give examples.. - Review.. - Give examples.. - Review.. 4. HOMEWORK: (2’) - Learn by heart the structure. Take note. - Prepare for test 45’. IV. COMMENTS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------_________________________________________________________________. Week : 25 Period: 73. Date of preparation: 25/02/2013 Date of teaching: 28/02/2013 (179).

(180) UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD GETTING STARTED LESSON 1: LISTEN AND READ A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - aware of how to make accept and decline invitations . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Voc about traveling. 2. Grammar: Progressive tenses with always. 3. Language skills: Listening, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan , Pictures , chart E/ Procedure: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (8’) Kim’s game - Ask Ss to look at the pictures of some country with their name then rub out the names. I. Getting started:. STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES - Observe, then play game. a. b. c. d. e. f.. - Ask Ss the question: Which country do you want to visit? - Lead to the lesson. 2/ Presentation: (15’)  Activity 1: - Set the scene: Mrs. Quyen is going to The USA for a vacation. She is ringing her friend, Mrs. Smith, to tell her about her tour. - Explain vocabulary: II. Listen and read: 1. Vocabulary:  (to) come on a tour: đi du lịch theo đoàn  (to) include (v): bao gồm  (to) come over (v): ghé qua  (to) have a business meeting: có buổi họp  (to) pick someone up (v): đón (ai)  abroad (adv): ở nước ngoài - Check vocabulary: “Matching”  Activity 2: - Have Ss predict the correct option to complete the sentences. 1. Mrs.Quyen and her husband will stay in San francisco for ( three / four) nights. 2. They will have dinner at Mrs.Smith’s house on (Wednesday evening / Thursday evening). (180). The United States of America Australia Thailand Britain Canada China. - Answer the question. - Listen.. - Listen. - Repeat in chorus and guess the meaning, then write down.. - Do as directed. - Predict..

(181) 3. Mrs.Smith will pick Mrs.Quyen up at (six / seven ) o’clock. - Check the prediction. - Play the tape for Ss to check their predictions. 1. three 2. Wednesday evening 3. seven - Pay attention and take note. - Introduce the structure. 2. Structure: * Invitations and replies: a) Would you like …..? (Ex:Would you like to come and stay with us while you’re in town?) - That’s very kind of you, but… b) Then you must come over for dinner one night. - Yes, we’d love to. 3/ Practice: (12’)  Activity 1: - Practice in pair. - Have Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. - Complete in groups of four in 3’. - Ask Ss to complete Mrs. Quyen’s schedule. DATE Mon. 25 TUE. WED. THU. 28 26 27 SCHEDULE Coming Going Having Leaving to San out dinner San Francisco with Francisco . the . - Give feedback. Smiths - Get feedback. - Answer the questions in  Activity 2: groups. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue to answer the questions. a. No, they won’t. because they are coming on a tour , and their accommodation is included in the ticket price, so they will stay at a hotel. b. No, he won’t. Because he will have a business meeting in the evening. - Give the answer. c. Mrs. Smith will pick her up at her hotel. - Call some Ss go to the board to write the answer. 4/ Production: (8’) - Ask Ss to play lucky number game. - Play game. 1. Mr. Thanh is a ______. 2. Would you like to visit _______. Yes, I’d love to. I like to visit the Great Wall. 3. The Big Ben tower is in ______. 4. Lucky number! 5. Lucky number! 6. San Francisco is a state of ______. 5/ Homework: (2’) - Have Ss - Write assignments. + Learn by heart vocabulary and structure. + Practice the dialogue again. + Prepare “Speak”. IV. COMMENT: ........................................................................................................................................................... Week : 26 Period: 74. Date of preparing: 03/ 03/ 2013 Date of teaching: 05/ 03/ 2013 (181).

(182) UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD LESSON 2:. SPEAK. I/. Objectives: By the end of the leeson Ss will be able to: - know the way to talk about planning a tour and get acquainted with word relating to the topic B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (6’). STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. Net work - Ask Ss to play game to review some countries in the world they know and have learnt. The United States of America Japan Some countries Thailand Canada - Lead to the lesson.. Australia. - Play game.. - Listen.. 2/ Pre-speaking: (15’). - Listen, read and take note.. - Explain vocabulary. I. Vocabulary:  itinerary (n): lộ trình  gym(n): phòng tập thể dục  brochure (n): tờ rơi quảng cáo  sightseeing(n): nơi tham quan  gallery (n): phòng trưng bày - Check: What and Where - Ask Ss to read the brochures in page 113, 114. - Give modal dialogue. S1: Which flight should we take? S2: The Flight 835 at 10.00 S1: What time shall we arrive Boston? S2: 4.00. Would that be OK? S1: Great. Where shall we stay? S2: The Revere Hotel because it has a gym. S1: Which places should we visit? S2: I think we should visit Boston University and Havard Medical School. S1: That’s a good idea!. - Do as directed. - Read carefully. - Pay attetention and repeat.. (182).

(183) 3/ While-speaking: (14’). - Ask Ss to speak in pairs to complete the itinerary. * Model: Depart Los Angeles: flight 835 at 10.00 on Monday. Arrive Boston: at 4:00 Accommodation: Atlantic Hotel Sightseeing: Boston University, Museums & Art Galleries. Depart Boston: Flight 710 at 10:00 on Thursday, 22 - Call some pairs to present their dialogue.. 4/ Post-speaking: (8’). - Give the scene: You are from Boston to Hanoi and some brochures, then ask Ss to make the dilogue again to get mark. From Boston hours ) Days Flight Mon-Sun. To Ha Noi ( + 10. Departure Arrival 8.00. Mon, Sat, Sun 22.00. 17.00 8.00. Mon, Thur, Sun 1.00 11.00. 819 112 213. 5/ Homework: (2’). - Practice in pairs.. - Present. - Make the dialogue. Depart (Boston) ………………………………………… … Arrive (Ha Noi) ……………………… Accommodation: ………………………………………… Sightseeing: ………………………………………… ……… Depart (Ha Noi): Flight 11 at 9.00 on Sunday, 7. - Write assignments.. - Ask Ss to + Practice the dialogue at home. + Prepare unit 9: Listen.. IV. COMMENT: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. (183).

(184) Week : 26 Period: 75. Date of preparing: 4/ 03/ 2013 Date of teaching: 6/ 03/ 2013. UNIT 12: A AVACATION ABROAD LESSON 3:. LISTEN. I/. Objectives: By the end of the leeson Ss will be able to: - know the way to talk about planning a tour and get acquainted with word relating to the topic B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (6’). STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. Chatting - Have Ss listen a weather forecast program, and find out what aspects of weather forecast are mentioned.. - Listen and find out. + weather + temperature. - Lead to the lesson.. - Listen.. 2/ Pre-listening: (15’). - Draw a mind map about “Weather forecast” to teach vocabulary.. - Pay attention, read and take note.. - Check vocabulary: “Rub out and remember” - Have students remins the numer from 1 to 35. - Ask Ss to guess the information in the table.. - Do as directed. - Remind. - Guess the information.. 3/ While-listening: (15’). - Play the tape for students 2 times, and ask Ss to check (184). - Listen carefully and check..

(185) the gaps with missing information. Temperature City. Weather. Low 1.Sydney ___dry__,___windy___ ___20_ _ 2.Tokyo ____dry____,_____wind __15__ y_ 3.LonDon ____humid__,__cold___ _____ 3__ 4.Bangkok ___warm__,_____dry__ ___24_ __ _ 5.New ____windy____,___clou __8___ York dy _ 6.Paris ____cool_____,___dry_ __10__ __. High __26__ __22__ _ ___7__ _ ___32_ _ __15__ ___15_ _. 4/ Post-listening: (8’). - Ask Ss to make questions and answers in pairs. A: What is the weather like in Sydney today? B: It will be dry and windy. A: How about the temperature? B: The low will be 20 and the high will be 26 degrees. - Call some pairs to present their dialogue.. 5/ Homework: (2’). - Ask Ss to + Learn the vocabulary. + Ask Ss to give the weather forcast in Dam Rong + Prepare unit 12: Read.. - Work in pairs.. - Present the dialogue. - Write assignments.. IV. COMMENT: ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. (185).

(186) Week : 26 Period: 76. Date of preparation: 6/ 03/ 2013 Date of teaching: 8/ 03/ 2013. UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD LESSON 4:. READ. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - Read the postcard from Mrs Quyen to her children to understand the general and the details - Obtain knowledge about some scenic sprits in USA B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : past progressive with when and while 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures:. TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1/ Warm-up: (6’). STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES. Networds - Ask Ss to list as much as possible. San Francisco Chicago USA’s famous places. - List the name of some states of the USA. NewYork. Washington - Lead to the lesson.. - Listen.. 2/ Pre-reading: (14’). - Hang on some pictures of some scenic spots in the USA and ask Ss to match them correctly.. - Observe and match. 1. Hawaii 2. San Francisco 3. Mount Rushmore 4. Chicago 5. New York. - Teach vocabulary. I. Vocabulary:  volcano (n): núi lửa  lava (n): dung nham  overhead (adv): phía trên đầu  pour out (v): phun trào  carve (v) : khắc  prison (n): nhà tù. - Listen, guess the meaning and read.. (186).

(187) - Do as directed..  Wharf (n): cầu cảng - Check vocabulary: R.O.R. 3/ While-reading: (15’).  Activity 1: - Ask Ss to read the texts silently to do the task 1. Places a. Hawaii b. New York c. Chicago d. Mount Rushmore e. San Francisco.. What she did and saw Went swimming, visited Kilauea Volcano. Went shopping, bought lots of souvenirs. Saw Lake Michigan Saw the heads of 4 American Presidents. Visited Fisherman’s wharf, the Napa Valley winegrowing area and the Alcatraz Prison.. - Do the task in groups of four.. - Give feedback.. - Get feedback..  Activity 2: - Ask Ss to read the postcards again to answer the questions. - Ask Ss to write the answers on the board. a. She went there by plane. b. She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz. c. It is the mount where the heads of four American are carved into the rock; and it can be seen from more than 100 km away. d. It is also called “The Windy City”. e. She went shopping.. - Read the postcards again and answer the questions in groups. - Give the answers.. 4/ Post-reading: (8’). - Elicit grammar fron the postcards.. - Pay attention and take note.. * Past progressive: 1. The lava was pouring out when we flew overhead. S + was/were +V- ing + (O), when +S + V(ed/ 2) 2. While Dad was visiting the Statue of Liberty, I went shopping. While S + was/ were +V-ing +(O), S +V (ed/ 2). 5/ Homework: (2’). - Have Ss: + Learn vocabulary by heart. + Read the posters again and do Language focus 2. + Prepare “Write”.. - Write assignments.. IV. COMMENT: ............................................................................................................................. (187).

(188) ............................................................................................................................. Week : 27 Period: 77. Date of preparing: 10/ 03/ 2013 Date of teaching: 12/ 03/ 2013 UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 5 : Write. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - how to write a postcast B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : past progressive with when and while 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): - take part in the game - T guides Ss to play “Brainstorming” Activities on holiday: sight seeing, ……… - list all things to do on Pre – writing (10 ms): - T asks: Have you ever sent a postcard to your friend or holiday relative? - answer What do you write on a postcard? - T introduces the lesson - listen - T asks Ss to do the first exercise - do the exercise 1. Complete the postcard Mrs. Quyen sent from the USA. - T calls some Ss to read the post card aloud then write the answer on the board - T comments and gives the corrections - give the answer (1) in (2) people (3) weather (4) visited (5) her (6) nice /lovely, (7) bought (8) for (9) heaviness, (10) soon. - T reminds Ss how to write a postcard - listen and notice While writing (15 ms): 2. Imagine you are a tourist on vacation in a certain place/trip in Vietnam. Write a postcard to a friend ………… - T explains way to write a postcard by asking Ss to pay - listen and notice attention to the information in exercise 2 - T asks Ss to write a postcard - write the postcard - T calls some Ss to read their postcard - read their postcard - T comments (188).

(189) Post – writing ( 6ms): - T reminds Ss way to write a postcard. Answer: 1. well – good 6. spend – spent 2. friendship – friendly 7. to play – playing 3. wind – windy 8. bottle – bottles 4. visit – visited 9. are – is 5. his – her 10. buying – to buy Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m) Write the postcard again Correct errors in the postcard Dear Nam, We’re having a well time on CatBa Island. The people are very friendship and helpful. The weather has been sunny and wind. In CatBa town, I visit my aunt, Mrs. Lien and his children. I spend the whole morning to play with them. I bought lot of souvenirs and two bottle fish sauce. Shopping here are wonderful. There are a lots things to buying. See you soon.. - listen and notice. - take note. Retell the main points. Do exercises at home. IV. COMMENT: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. (189).

(190) Week : 27 Period: 78. Date of preparing: 12/ 03/ 2013 Date of teaching: 14/ 03/ 2013. UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 6: Language focus A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : Practice in using Past progressive with While,When and progressive tenses with “always” to complain. Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 12. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : - past progressive - past progressive with when and while - progresssive tenses with always 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5ms): - T prepares some cards with verbs of actions. Whole class - One of Ss from each team goes to the front ,picks up one card and mimes. Ss of the other team guess what the mime represents and say what s/he was doing at 10,00 last Sunday. Team work Language focus 1 ( 12 ms): Model sentences Teacher – Ss 1. Ba was taking a shower at 8 o'clock last night 2. They were talking to each other at that time * Form: - Work individually S + was/ were + V-ing… Use: To indicate an action that was in progress at a point of time in the past * Picture Drill: Look at the pictures. Say what each person was doing at - Look at the picture and do exercises eight o’clock last night. 1. Hoa/have dinner - Work in pairs 2. Bao/ read a comic - go to the board to do 3. Nga/ write a letter exercises. 4. Na/ walk with her dog 5.Lan and her gradma/ talk to each other (190).

(191) Ex.a. Ba was taking a shower at 8 o’clock last night. - Ask ss to work in pair to do exercise. - Have Ss compare with a partner Answer key: b. Hoa was having dinner at 8 last night. c. Bao was doing his homework at 8 last night. d. Nga was writing a letter at 8 last night. e. Na was walking at 8 last night. f. Lan was talking to her grandma at 8 last night Language focus 2 (10 ms): Model sentences The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came The phone rang while Nga was eating Form: Main clause + Adv clause * Past progressive when Past simple * Past simple while Past progressive ->Key to LF2: a-C b-F c-E d-B e-D f-A Language focus 3 ( 9 ms): Model sentence : Bao is always forgetting his homework be adv V-ing… * Form:S + to be + adv( always) + V_ing … The present progressive tense with “always” The progressive tenses are used with always to express a habitual action( usually bad habit as a complaint) Ask ss to do language focus 3 P.120 -> Key : b. Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella c. Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing the bus d. Nam is always watching T.V late f. Na is always talking on the phone g. Liem is always going out Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homeworks ( 1m): - Redo all exercises - Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12. - Prepare for next lesson Unit 13: Getting started and listen and read. - Pairwork. Copy down Individual. Pay attention copy down some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange .. Teacher –Ss. Pay attention work in pairs ,. Individual. Retell the main points of this lesson. Copy down homeworks. IV. COMMENT: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ (191).

(192) Period : 47 Week : 16. Preparing date: 04/12/2012 Teaching date: 06/12/2012 UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Lesson 4: Read. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - understand the text about one of the social problems . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Some words of the city and country. 2. Grammar: 3. Language skills: reading, listening, writing, speaking. C/ Techniques : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson. -T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 1 m):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. * Warm up ( 5 ms): * Jumbled words - Write the words with disordered letters on the board . + Fulentipl -> plentiful + taneru -> nature + loofd -> flood + roestdy -> destroy + viroped -> provide + suertl -> result + ciliestial -> facilities - Ask them to write the correct words on the board and repeat chorally , individually => Lead in the new lesson . * Pre- reading ( 10 ms): - Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss . * Pre - teach vocabulary : - rural (adj ) : something deals with the countryside - urban ( adj ) > < rural - strain (n) = su qua tai ( dan so ) - typhoon (n) = storm (n) - drought (n) : hot and dry weather for a long time -( to )struggle = dau tranh - migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place to another especially in order to find work . - (to) increase = tang len , tang them , Gia tang. (192). Work in group. Listen and copy down. Listen and repeat chorally , individually , then copy down ..

(193) * Checking vocabulary : What and where *. Brainstorming : - Ask Ss to think of the difficulties of farmer s, life . Possible answers : droughts / the weather / hard work / no vacations / lack of clean water / electricity / insects destroy harvests .. - Ask Ss to work in groups to guess how farmers deal with difficulties - Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write them on the board . Difficulties of farmer s, life. While - reading ( 15 ms): - Let Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently to check their predictions . - Answer “ What do many farmers do to solve their problem ? “ => They have to move to the city so that they can get well – paid jobs . - Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class . * Gap- filling : - Ask Ss to work in pairs o complete summary , using the information from the passage . - Call on some volunteers to report their results - Give feedback 1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural 5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals 9. problem 10 . world - Call on some Ss to read the complete passage aloud *Finding the words - Ask Ss to read the text again and work with their partners - Call them to report their results - Give feedback a. rural b. plentiful c. increase d. strain e. tragedy f. urban Post – reading ( 6ms) Discussion - Give a situation : If you were a Minister , what would you do for farmers ? - Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss * Suggested answers : - build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside - build schools , hospitals - provide clean water , electricity , facilities - build factory . - Call on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their ideas (193). Play game. Work individually. Work in groups to guess how farmers deal with difficulties report their predictions and write them on the board . Demonstrate in front of class listen to the tape and read the text silently to check their predictions - Work individually. - read the text in front of class . work in pairs o complete summary , using the information from the passage . Listen to the tape and read the text to check their predictions Answer the question Read the text aloud . Work in pairs Read their results . Read the complete summary . Read the text again and do the exercise 2 / 75 Read the complete results ..

(194) before the class . Work in groups to discuss Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1 m): Show their ideas before 1. Write 5 things that government should do for the rural class . areas . 2. Do exercises in workbook . Retell the main points 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 8: Write Do exercises at home F/ Self- Evaluation:. (194).

(195) Period : 48 Week : 16. Preparing date: 06/12/2012 Teaching date: 08/12/2012 UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Lesson 5: Write. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - write a letters to their friends about their neighborhood . - develop Ss’ Writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: some words of the city and country. 2. Grammar: The form of the letter. 3. Language skills: writing, reading, speaking, listening. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Asks two Ss to answer the qs 1-2 in the book page 76 - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms). Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. *Warm up ( 5 ms): * Revision - Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in the correct order . - Prepare 6 cards with 6 outlines on them . - Call 6 Ss to hold them and stand in a random order - Ask some other Ss to rearrange them in the correct order . - Write the answer on the board and ask Ss to copy . 1. Heading - Writer,s address / Date - Dear ………... , 2. opening 3. Body 4. closing Pre- writing ( 10 ms) : - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - Give feedback While- writing ( 15 ms) - Ask Ss to write letters to friends about their neighborhood (195). Work on the whole class . Listen and copy down. Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions Work individually Write letters.

(196) - Let them write individually . - Have them compare with their partners and correct if they can . * Suggested letter : ( Writer,s address) ( Date ) Dear ...., I live in ….. , a small town . My family has a large house with four rooms and a small garden . My sister and I share one bedroom . From the bedroom window , I can see a beautiful park with green tress , flowers and a pond . we do not live far form my school so I usually walk there . In my neighborhood , there is a swimming pool and a beautiful park . On the weekend , I often go swimming with my friends . Early in the morning , I always jog with my sister around the park . But the thing I like best in my neighborhood is the public library near my school . There I not only can study and read books but also watch video and learn how to use the computer . Do you have a library like that in your neighborhood ? Is there anything interesting in the place where you live ? Write to me. I would like to say goodbye now. I am looking forwards to hearing from you soon. Love , ( Signature ) Post - writing ( 6 ms): * Correction - Choose some letters to correct before class and ask them to read them aloud . Consolidation (2 ms) - Reteel the main points of the letter. Homework ( 1m) 1. Write their letters on their notebooks 2. Prepare the next lesson Unit 7 : Language focus F/ Self- Evaluation:. (196). Compare with their partners. write letters to friends about their neighborhood. - Works individually.. Exchange correct .. their. writings. to. Listen and copy . Choose some letters to correct before class and ask them to read them aloud . - Retell the main points. Copy down homeworks..

(197) Period : 49 Week : 17. Preparing date: 09/12/2012 Teaching date: 11/12/2012 UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Lesson 6: Language focus. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use the present progressive tense to talk about future actions and changing with “ become/ get” and the comparative. - develop Ss’ listening skill. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: some words of the city and country. 2. Grammar: the present progressive tense to talk about future actions and changing with “ become/ get” and the comparative. 3. Languuage skills: reading, listening, writing, speaking. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids : Text book , cards , cassette , lesson plan, posters , radio , CD. E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms) : - Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to talk about the changes of their town or their villages in five years ago. - T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up : * Matching - Prepare eight cards with phrases on them - Write eight verbs on the board ( play , do , watch , go , clean , have , phone , speak ) - Divide the class into 2 teams - Hand out each team 8 cards - Ask Ss to stick the cards with phrases besides the suitable verbs - The team which is faster is the winner * Answers : - play table tennis - do my homework - watch a program - go to a violin lesson - clean the house - have a meeting - phone my aunt , Mrs Hang - speak to Mom => Lead in the new lesson . Language focus: A. The present progressive to talk about future (197). Work in group Ss to stick the cards with phrases besides the suitable verbs . Work in pairs to practice the dialogue Look at the board. Work in pairs. - Ss repeat. - S + to be + Ving + O..

(198) actions. ? Repeat the model sentences of the present progressive. - T explains about the present progressive with future meaning. Ex1: T explains about the ship information. - Ship name: ten tau. - Destination: noi den. - Time of the departure: gio khoi hanh. - Status: tinh trang. - Delayed: tri hoan. - Revised time: gio sua lai. - Origin: noi xuat phat. B/ Show the chang with “ get” and “ become”. * Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to describe changes with “ get “ and “ become “ * Drill : Prepare six cards of cues a. The boys / get / tall b. The old men / become / weak c. It / become / dark d. The weather / get / cold e. The students / get / better f. The school yard / become / cleaner - Model first two cues , then whole class repeat chorally , then some Ss read out individually - Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in class can remember the structure . C/ Comparative and superlative adjectives - Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and superlative adjectives * Comparative : Short adj - er + than + object More long adj + than + object * Superlative : The + short adjective - est The most + long adjective * Irregular adjectives good/ well – better – the best bad – worse – the worst many – more – the most little – less – the least * Ex 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make comparisons between the city and the country . Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city - Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences they have made . - Give feedback (198). Ss listen carefully and copy. Ss read and make the dialogue.. whole class repeat chorally , then some Ss read out individually Asks Ss to retell the main structure grammar about the forms of comparative and superlative adjectives . - One by one.. Ss work in pairs to make comparisons between the city and the country .. - Each Student read aloud one of the sentences they have made . - Ss to play the roles of Lan and Aunt Hang to practice the dialogue . - Retell the main points - One by one.. - Retell the main points - Do exercise at home..

(199) Consolidation ( 2 ms): - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m): 1. Copy down the completed dialogue in their notebooks 2. Do exercises in work book and exercise 2 page 78 in text book 3. Prepare the next lesson . F/ Self- Evaluation:. (199).

(200) Period : 50 Week : 17. Preparing date: 11/12/2012 Teaching date: 13/12/2012 CONSOLIDATION 1. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to: - grasp knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of - practice all structure grammar from unit 1 to unit 8 . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: Tenses, verb forms, compairision, direct and indirect speech. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work,… D/ Teaching aids: -Text books, lesson plan, posters . E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms):. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. * Warm up ( 5ms): - Chatting about daily routine */ Consolidation : - Ask Ss to repeat the tenses they have learnt in the first semester and write on the board 1.1. The tenses : - Present Simple - Past simple - Present progressive - Present perfect - Simple future - Have Ss retell the usages and form of each tenses and give exemples. - Get Ss to distinguish among tenses - Comment and give marks 1.2. The form of the verbs - Modal verbs : can , could , may might - Gerund ( V- ing ) => used after some verbs such as like / dislike / hate / love / enjoy and prepositions - Have Ss to repeat and copy , then give examples with each one . 2. Exercises : - Using the posters with some exercises to show . 2.1. Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets + Ex 7/ 43 ( workbook ) : Infinitive or Gerund (200). Play game Repeat the tenses they have learnt . Listen and copy , then give some more examples. Listen and copy Repeat and copy .. - Observe the poster.

(201) + Ex 5 / 46 ( workbook ) : Past simple or Present perfect - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of lass - Ask some Ss to go to the board to write them on the board - Give feedback 1.2 Comparison - Comparative - Superlative - Like - (not) as …….. as - (not) the same as - different form 1.2 Direct and indirect speech - Commands - Requests - Advice => S + told + O +(not) to + V ….. 2. Exercises : - Ex 7 / 48 ( workbook ) : Comparison - Ex 3 / 33 ( workbook ) / Ex 6/ 51 ( workbook ) + Have Ss work in pairs to do all the exercises + Call on some pairs to practice in front of class + Give feedback Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of some Structure grammar . Homework ( 2ms): 1. Redo all the exercises and copy 2. Prepare the test : - Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets . - Complete the conversation - Read the passage carefully , then answer the questions below - Supply the correct tense form of the verb in the brackets - Listening comprehension F/ Self- Evaluation:. (201). Work in pairs to the exercises and exchange their answers with their friends .. Listen and copy. Repeat and give some more examples. Work in pairs Demonstrate in front of class . - Retell the main points. - do exercises at home.

(202) Period : 51 Week : 17. Preparing date: 13/12/2012 Teaching date: 15/12/2012 CONSOLIDATION 2. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - understand and remember all the old knowledge to practice (Commands, requests and advice in reported speech) B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Voca of Unit 6, 7 2. Grammar: Command, requests and advice in reported speech. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniquues : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work, D/ Teaching aids: Text books, lesson plan, posters . E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up: 3. New lesson ( 44 ms):. Teacher’s activities  Warm up ( 5ms): - Do exercises that T gives out - After Ss finish, T checks and gives marks  Presentation ( 10 ms) - Ask Ss to repeat the reported speech: Commands, requests and advices in reported speech * Commands, requests : S + Asked/ told + O + (not) V * Advice: S + said (that) +S + should (not) + V - Ask Ss to give some examples.  Practice (20ms) - Have Ss to do the following exercise . Ex 1: Rewrite the following commands and request in reported speech a. “Please take these books to my classroom” She told me b. “ Can you buy me some soap on your way home? “My mother asked me c. “Please turn on the radio for me” Ba told Lan d. “ Cuold you do the washing up for me? “ Van’s mother asked her e. “Can you make me some drink?” He asked Lan f. “ Please clean up the room before you leave” Her mother asked her - Call some Ss to write answer on the board. - Get Ss to comment and correct mistakes - Give correct answer . * Answer key: (202). Students’ activities Do exercises - repeat. - copy down. - Do exercises - Work individually. - write answer on the board. comment and correct mistakes.

(203) a. She told me to take those books to her classroom b. My mother asked me to buy her some soap on my way home c. Ba told Lan to turn on the radio d. Van’s mother asked her to do the washing up for her e. He asked Lan to make him some drink f. Her mother asked her to clean up the room before she left - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the next exercise. EX2: Rewrite Mr. Lam’s advice in reported speech a. Mr. Lam said “Lien should spend more time in learning English” b. Mr Lam said “Lan should practice speaking English every day” c. Mr Lam said “ Thien should learn more new words by heart” d. Mr Lam said “Binh should make a list of new words in alphabetical order” e. Mr Lam said “ Van should learn the meaning of the new words in her mother tonger” f. Mr Lam said “ Thu should practices reading aloud short stories in English” - Ask Ss to compare the answer with other pairs. - Call some Ss to write the answer on the board. - Comment and correct the mistakes. * Answer key: a. Mr Lam said that Lien should spend more time in learning English. b. Mr Lam said that Lan should practice speaking English every day c. Mr Lam said that Thien should learn more new words by heart d. Mr Lam said that Binh should make a list of new words in alphabetical order e. Mr Lam said that Van should learn the meaning of the new words in her mother tonger f. Mr Lam said that Thu should practices reading aloud short stories in English Production ( 6 ms) - Ask Ss to do exercise 3 EX3. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms a. I’ll lend you the book when I’ve finished (read) ……… it b. Do you ever go (swim) ……… in the sea? c. They suggested (have) …… dinner in an Indian restaurant. d. Would you like (go) ….. out for a drink? e. Would you mind (close) ……… the window? (203). Copy down Rewrite sentences. the. - compare the answer with other pairs. - write the answer on the board.. - Copy down. - do exercise 3 - Work individually. - write answer on the boad..

(204) f. I nearly missed (catch) …… the bus Consolidation ( 2 ms) - Retell the contents of the lesson - T asks Ss to answer in dividually  Homework ( 1m) - Learn by heart the structures and redo Exs - Review The rest of all knowledge from U1 to U 8. - copy down. - Retell the contents - do exercise at home. F/ Self- Evaluation:. (204).

(205) Period : 52 Week : 18. Preparing date: 19/12/2012 Teaching date: 20/12/2012 CONSOLIDATION 3. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - grasp the knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: . 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniquues : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work, D/ Teaching aids: Text books, lesson plan, posters . E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up: 3. New lesson ( 44) ms):. Teacher’s activities. Ss’ activities. Warm up ( 5ms) - Play game: “ Nought and Crosses” old cheap small expensive big beautiful big hot old Practice ( 36 ms) - ask Ss to do the following exercise I/ Choose the best answers ( 8 ms): 1-She is not…… to drive a car. A. old enough. B. enough old. C. enough 2- Is she going to…… you this summer ?. A. visit. B. visits. C. visiting 3- A person who can not speak and hear is called a….. A. mute B. blind. C. deaf-mute 4- Each year, ……destroys home and injures children. A. match. B. kitchen. C. fire 5- You have to do it……. A. himself. B. ourselves. C. yourself 6- They enjoy……… jokes. A. telling. B. to tell. C. tell - Call Ss to write the answer on the board. - Corrrect the mistakes II/ Match A with B ( 9 ms): - Have Ss do exercise in pair.. (205). - Play game. - Do exercise. work in pair. - Copy down. write the answer on the board.

(206) A B 1. why don’t you a. humorous, kind take a taxi? b. because I don’t have enough 2. telephone money directory c. a telephone you can carry out Do exercise 3. mobile phone d. a book containing the names, 1……… 2…… 3…… 4……… - Call Ss to answer and correct it. - Ask Ss to read the passage and answer the questions III/ Read the following passage, then answer the questions( 10 ms) My name’s Nam. I’m fourteen year olds. I’m a student. I live at 24/2B Tran phu Street. I live with my parents and a younger sister. I’m tall and thin. I have short black hair. I have two close friends. Ba and Bao. Questions: 1. What does he look like? ................................ 2. Where does he live? ...................................... 3. Who does he live with? ................................. 4. Who are his close friends? ............................ - Call some Ss to answer qs and write down on the board. - Get Ss to complete the dialouge IV/ Complete the dialogue ( 9 ms) Tom: it’s going (1.............. rain tomorrow Sue: How (2)................... you know? Tom: Well, there (3)...................some cows lying on that field over there Sue: So what? What (4)...............that mean? Tom: It just means it’s (5).............to be wet Sue: Good gracious. I don’t believe that! Tom: Well, it (6)........true Sue: How can we tell it’s going to (7)…………… fine? Tom: Certain birds (8)……………… high in the sky and begin to sing Sue: Could that (9)........... true, do you think? Tom: Yes, scientists say they (10)…………… learn a lot from studying how animals behave - Call ss to answer and correct the mistakes. Consolidation ( 2 ms) - Retell th main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m)- Redo and review the exercises F/ Self- Evaluation:. (206). Correct mistakes read the passage. answer the questions. write the answer on the board. complete the dialouge. correct the mistakes. copy down.

(207) Period : 53 Week : 18. Preparing date: 20/12/2012 Teaching date: 21/12/2012. CONSOLIDATION 4 A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - grasp the knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: Reported speech, comparision, asking for favor and offering assistance, verb form. 3. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniquues : Brainstorming, Question-Answer, Grid, Pair work, Group work, D/ Teaching aids: Text books, lesson plan, posters . E/ Procedures: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up: 3. New lesson ( 44 ms): ’. Teacher s activities Warm up ( 5ms) * Play game -T asks and ask Ss to answer quickly 1. Could you do me a favor ? 2. I need a favor. 3. Can you help me ? 4.Would you like to go for a walk? 5.Thank you very much. 6. Can I help you ? 7. Do you need any help ? - Have Ss do exercise in pairs Practice (36 ms) I/ Rewrite the following sentences ( 13 ms): 1 Ba said to Khanh " Can you work harder, please ? ". Ss’ activities play game. reply. do exercise in pairs. Ba asked…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………… dicuss the sentences 2. My father said to me " You should live better" My father said ………………………………………………………………… ………………………… (207).

(208) 3.Minh said to his sister " Please buy me a newspaper" Minh told……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………… 4 Jill is more intelligent than Bill. (as…..as) Bill isn't ………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………… 5 Your hair is black. My hair is black, too. (the same) Your hair color ..................as………………………………… 6 The film was so boring, but I thought it was interesting. (different from) The film was quite……………………..what………………………………… ………………… 7 He has worked for this company for ten years. He started…………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….. 8 Lan last visited her mother 2 months ago. Lan has not ………………………………………………………………… ……………………………… 9 I went to the dentist's. I had a decaying tooth. (because) I went ………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………. 10 It's dangerous to leave medicine around the house. Leaving ………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………… - Compare the answer with other pair. - Call Ss to write the answer on the board. - Ask Ss to do exercise in group of 4. II/ Write in the blank one suitable word ( 12 ms): 1 ………………………..is a person who live next to your house. 2 ………………………..are people don't talk much in public.. Compare the answer. write the answer on the board Group work.. Do exercise. copy down. Work individually write the answer on the board. 3 ………………………..are people who often make others laugh. 4 ……………………….can't speak and hear. 5 You can put foods in the …………………………to keep Retell the main points do the exercises at home them longer. 6 ……………………….is your father's or mother's mom. (208).

(209) 7 In the ……………………..…….there are marks and results of your studying. 8 You learn ……………………..form your language of mother or father. 9 ……………………..is an organization for boys in America. 10 ………………………..is a place where you can buy everything under one roof. Give feed back. -Have Ss to correct the form. III/ Give the correct form of the words( 11 ms) 1 My doctor advised me ………………..cigarettes. (not smoke) 2 He advised me …………………warm clothes. (wear) 3 In my country students have to……uniforms to school. (wear) 4 The boys stopped ……………..soccer because of the rain. (play) 5 They stopped their work………………..soccer. (play) - Call Ss to do exercise on the board. - Give feed back Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m) - Redo the exercises F/ Self- Evaluation: Period : 54 Week : 19. Preparing date: 20/12/2012 Teaching date: 27/12/2012. TEST EXAMINATON A / The aims : I. Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 1 to unit 8 so that they can supplement what they are short of . II. Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test. B/ Steps of the lesson: I. Organization: II. Checking up: III. Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson . - Deliver test papers to Ss . I.Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest.(1,0 m) 1 .A. decided B. stopped C. started D. needed 2. A. neighbor B. receive C. weight D. great 3. A. cloudy B. windy C. dry D. rainy (209).

(210) 4. A. right B. feeling C. musis D. give II. Choose the best answer and underline it.(3,0ms) 1.He is not ( old enough / older enough/ enough old ) to join the army. 2.They ( didn’t work / haven’t worked/aren’t working) in that factory since last Monday. 3. His brother doesn’t enjoy ( to play / playing/ plays ) badminton. 4. Hai ( has learnt/learnt/learns ) English since 2006. 5. You ( have/ has to / should) listen to English conversaition on TV 6. I always brush my teeth ( on/at/in ) the morning. 7. I haven’t seen you ( in/ for/ since) along time 8. Hoa cut (herself/ himself/ his self). 9. She asked me ( to open/ openning/ openned) the window? 10. The sun ( rise/ rises/ rose) in the east. 11. He used( work/to work/worked) for a foreign company. 12.She is not as beautiful ( as/ like/so) her sister. III.Find the mistake and circle it.(1,0m) 1. I used to swimming in this river when I was a little boy. A B C D 2. The picture she bought last week is different with mine. A B C D IV.Complete the sentences with the suitable word in the box.(1,0m) Drought urban migrant remote 1. In the areas affected by………………, there is not enough water for people’s need . 2.A person who moves from one place to another to live orwork is a………………. 3.Many young farmers moved to the ……………… areas for job . 4.Some …………………….areas in the country are getting electricity . V.Read the text and answer the questions. When Na was twelve, my family moved to the city. At first, everything was strange and difficult to her. Life in the city is always busy and the people are often in a hurry. Lots of bikes, motorbikes, cars and buses coming from every direction scared her. Now she get sused to the life in the city. The traffic is busier than in the country. She is no longer afraid of crossing the road. However, she doesn't really like to live in the city. She prefers to live in the countryside. Questions.(2,5ms) 1.Where did Na move to? …………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Was the life in the city busy? …………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. How is the traffic in the city? …………………………………………………………………………………………… 4. What scared her? …………………………………………………………………………………………… 5.Does she like to live in the city ? …………………………………………………………………………………………… VI.Rewrite the following sentences with the same meaning( 1,5 ms) (210).

(211) 1. Your house is bigger than my house. ->My house isn't…………………………………………………………………………. 2. “ Please turn off the TV, Nam” his sister said. -> Nam’s sister told him………………….…….………………………………………….. 3. He started learning English 2 years ago. -> He has ..................................................... ………………………….………………… -----THE END -----. ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ 1( NĂM HỌC : 20012 – 2013) MÔN : TIẾNG ANH – LỚP 8 -------------------------------------------------I.(0,25 x 4=1 m) 1.B 2.B 3.C 4.A II.(0,25 x 12=3,0 ms) (211).

(212) 1. old enough 2. haven’t worked 3. playing 4. has learnt 5.should 6. in 7. for 8. herself 9. to open 10. rises 11. to work 12.as III. ( 0, 5 x 2= 1m) 1. A 2. C IV..(0,25 x 4=1 m) 1.drought 2.migrant 3.urban 4.remote V. (0,5 x 5= 2,5 ms) 1.She moved to the city. 2. Yes, It was 3. It is busier than in the country. 4. Lots of bikes, motorbikes, cars and buses coming from every direction scared her. 5.No, She doesn’t . VI. ( 0,5 x 3= 1,5 ms) 1. My house isn't as big as your house. 2. Nam’s sister told him to turn off the T.V. 3. He has learnt English for 2 years. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------. (212).

(213) Period Period :60 Week : 21. Preparing date: 15/1/2013 Teaching date: 17/1/2013 Lesson 1 : Getting started and listen and read.. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - know what they should do to protect the environment and save natural resources . They will also be able to understand the structure: S + to be + adj + that – clause. - Developing Skills: listening, reading, speaking. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: environment words. 2. Grammar: modal verb ‘ can’ , present simple. 3. Language skills: listening, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan ,6 flashcards , a chart. E/ Procedures: 1.Class organizaton (1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance. - Ask: Who’s absent to day? 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3. - T. corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms) : getting started - Ask Ss to think of ways to reduce the amount of garbage they - Answer. produce . - Deliver posters to Ss , dividing them into 4 groups - Tell Ss to put the posters on the board after they finish and the team Play game having the most good ideas is the winner . - Give feedback Explain the words: Use cloth bags, use tree leaves to wrap things, make garbage into fertilizer, make vegetable matter into animal - Listen and repeat food… - Copy down - Ask students to work in pairs:. (213).

(214) A: We should use .............. B: Yes, that ‘s right. * Preteach vocabulary T: present new words -(to) recycle: tái chế (Situation) -(to) reduce: giảm (Antonym) -(to) reuse: tái sử dụng (Visual) -(to) throw: ném (Visual) -(to) contact: liên lạc (Translation) -(to) overpackage: gói kỹ (Situation) - Check by matching. 3./ Presentation the dialogue: Listen and read P.89. Miss Blake T: Set the scene: A representative from Friends of the Earth, Miss Blake, is talking to the students of Quang Trung school. Friends of the Earth shows people how to protect the environment and save natural resources  True/False predictions 1. Friends of the Earth is an organization to help people make friends with each other. 2. Miss Blake asks the students to remember 3 things: reduce, reuse, recycle. 3. We cannot reuse things like envelopes, glass, plastic bottles and old plastic bags. 4. Miss Blake says that we should use cloth bags. -ask sts to predict -T gets feeback1.. -plays the tape and ask sts to check the prediction. -Get feedback 2. -call some group read aloud. -show the questions. * Comprehension questions a, What does Miss Blake mean by reduce? b, What things can we reuse? c, What does recycle mean? d, Where can we look for information on recycling things? Answer key: a/ Reduce means not buying product which are overpackaged b/ We can reuse things like envelopes, glass, plastic bottles and old plastic bags c/ Recycle means not just throwing things away. Try and find another use for them. d/ We can look for information on recycle things by having a contact with an organization like Friends of the Earth, going to the local library, or asking your family and friends or scientific society. Give model sentences: I am pleased that you want to know more - Have Sts read again in choral and individual. . Concept check: Meaning: Form: S + tobe + adj + that – clause. Use: Adj followed by a noun clause Practice - Give the cues |She / happy / I passed my exam.. (214). work in pairs. Listen and repeat copy down. pay attention listen to the tape while reading the dialogue. practice the dialogue ( pairs). -Read through the statements -Predict True or False. -Listen and read the dialogue listen to the tape check T or F. -read aloud. -Read the dialogue for more details amd find the answers. -Answer the question in pairs.. copy down. Find the sentence from the dialogue. Read in choral then individual. Translate the model sentences..

(215) | They / sure / he will come here. | It / good / we reduce the garbage. 4. Consolidation (5’) - Ask Sts to retell the meaning of 3 word: 3R and the form. 5. Homework (5’) - Learn by heart new words and form; - Write 3 sentences using the cues and the new form.. practice Make sentences from the cues retell do exercise at home. Period Period : 61 Week : 22. Preparing date: 20/1/2013 Teaching date: 22/1/2013 UNIT 10 : RECYCLING Lesson 2: Speak and listen. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - practice giving and responding to instructions and listening for specific information about making compost . - develop Ss’ speaking and listening skills. B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: Voc of recycling. 5. Grammar: infinitive commands, modals: should, can. 6. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD. E/ Procedure: 1.Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms) : - Asks Ss go to the board to write the names of the things they have just seen from memory . => T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): ’ Teacher s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5 ms): Kim,s game * Possible answers : Used paper , old newspapers , books , Whole class cardboard boxes , bottles , glasses , jars , plastic bags , food cans , drinking tins , vegetable matter , clothes , shoes , Team work school bags … (215).

(216) A/ SPEAKING * / Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some new words to students . * Pre-teach vocabulary : - Fertilizer (n) : Farmer often use this thing to make their plants or trees grow well . -> to fertilize - Compost (n) : What do you call the fertilizer made from spoiled food , leaves , vegetable mater ? -> compost heap - Fabric (n) = material - Leather (n) : What are the shoes made of ? + Have Ss copy in their notebooks .  Checking technique : Bingo * Dictation list : - Tell Ss they are going to listen to the words for items and put them into the right groups . - Draw the table on the words and put them in the right columns . - Model some words . - Read the words aloud , slowly and jumble them up - After listening , ask Ss to work in pairs and give their answers . - Read the words again and correct Group Items Paper used paper (old newspaper ,cardboard boxes Glass ( bottles , glasses , jars ) Plastic (Plastic bags , plastic bottles ) Metal ( food cans , drinking tins ..) Fabric Clothes ( cloth bags , material ) Leather ( shoes , sandals , schoolbags ) Vegetable Fruit Peels ( vegetable , rotten fruits ) matter While – speaking : Mapped dialogue : - Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board . - Elicit the exchanges from students - Have some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange . - After fishing the dialogue , ask a good pair to demonstrate the whole dialogue . a. Open pairs : - Ask some pairs to practice in front of class . b. Closed pairs : - Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list (216). listen and repeat copy down. play game. pairwork Individual Pair work work in pairs and give their answers .. some each. pairs. practice. exchange before going on to another exchange .. practice in front of class.

(217) - Monitor and correct . A B Which group ( do clothes ) Put ( them ) in fabric belong to ? What can we do with We can ( recycle them and ( those clothes ) ? make them into paper or Is/are (fruit vegetable shopping bags . matter)? That is right What will we do with We make ( it into compose (it ) ? and fertilizer our field . )  Post speaking : B/ LISTENING : Multiple choice - Tell Ss they are going to listen to an expert who gives the instructions to make compost . - Ask Ss to open their books and read the multiple choice questions - Have them guess the answers - Turn on the tape 2 or 3 times , Ss listen and do the exercise - Get Ss to give their answers and correct Answers : a. A b. B c. A d. B - Have them copy Consolidation ( 2m ): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1m) 1. Copy down the dialogue , replacing the information . 2. Do the exercises in the work book. 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 10 : Read. Teacher –Ss. work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list. Pair work. open their books and read Ss to open their books and read the multiple choice questions. Retell the main points Do exercise at home. (217).

(218) Period Period : 62 Week : 22. Preparing date: 21/1/2013 Teaching date: 23/1/2013 UNIT 10: RECYCLING Lesson 3: Read. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - form the passive in the Present Simple . B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: Voc of recycling. 5. Grammar: Passive form, Present perfect. 6. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing. C/ Techniques : D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart . pictures , drawing . E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1 m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson. - T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities *Warm up ( 5ms): (218).

(219) Word square E N V I R O N M E N T N B C G A R B A G E R V E D R D O P P U R E E J U E Y I L A R S C L U S E D P A P E R Y O S T N O T S E D E C P R O T E C T R U U L E A B R C A I B C S E R E C E E N C A E E K D E E E F G H G I J L - Tell Ss the topic about the environment and there are 12 hidden words . - Divide the class into 4 groups . - Ask Ss to write their answers on a piece of paper and hand in when they finish - Tell Ss the group with the most right words is the winner . Answer key : environment , garbage , pure , used paper , protect . envelope , dust , green tree , can , plastic , paper bag , reduce ,reuse , recycle * Pre – reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . 1. Pre- teach vocabulary : - tire (n) : using picture - pipe (n) : using drawing - deposit (n) : khoan tien gui vao mot tai khoan - to refill = to fill something empty again - to melt >< to freeze - Get Ss to copy in their notebooks . * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember * Open prediction - Tell Ss they are going to read a page in a newspaper giving some recycling facts to protect the environment . - Ask them to look at the board and guess what they are going to read . + What do people do with used things ? + What can they make from them ? - Call on some Ss to read their guesses on the board Car ties -> ………….. Milk bottles ->…………… Glass -> ………….. Drink cans -> ………….. Household and garden waste -> ……… …. While – reading( 15 ms) 1. Grid (219). Play game. Group work of 4 teams. write their answers group with the most right words is the winner .. Pay attention. listen and copy down T – Ss Read Whole class. Individual.

(220) - Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it - Ask Ss to open their books and read the text . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of recycling facts mentioned in the text . - Call on some Ss to write the information in the grid on the board . Answer Key : Used things Recycling Facts Car tires are recycled to make pipes and Milk bottles floor recoverings Glass are cleaned and refilled (with Drink cans milk ) Household and is broken up , melted and made into garden waste new glassware are brought back for recycling is made into compost . * Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions . - Get them to compare their answers with their friends . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . - Give feedback a. People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles . b. The glass is broken up , melted and made into new glassware . c. The Oregon government made a new law that there must be a deposit on all drink cans . The deposit is returned when people bring the cans back for recycling . d. Compost is made from household and garden waste . e. If we have a recycling story to share , we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265 456. *Post – reading ( 6ms): - Ask Ss to look at their books and complete the sentences to make a list of recycled things . - Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud . => The sentences they have read are the passive . Passive Form in the present Simple S + am/ is / are + Past participle - It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the verb - How to change an active sentence to a passive voice : Active S V O Passive eg :. I. S. + be + PII love. by O you (220). copy down. write Whole class Pair work. work in pairs to answer the questions some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions .. copy down. Pair work look at their books and complete the sentences to make a list of recycled things .. pay attention copy down.

(221) Individual You. are loved. by me. Have Ss copy  Change these sentences into the passive 1. Lan like pop music . 2. They play table tennis every day Do exercise 3. We do these exercises in the notebooks . Pairwork 4. He feeds 5 chickens . 5. She buy a lot of food . - Call on some Ss to read their completed sentences in front Read the sentences of class . - Give feedback 1. Pop music is liked by Lan . 2. Table tennis is played every day read their completed 3. These exercises are done in the notebooks by us . sentences in front of class . 4. Five chickens are fed by him 5. A lot of food is bought by her . Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Retell th main points Homework( 1m) 1. Copy down all the passive sentences in their note books . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . do exercise at kome 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 10: Write Period Period :63 Preparing date: 22/1/2013 Week : 22 Teaching date: 24/1/2013 UNIT 10: RECYCLING Lesson 4: Write A /Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - write a set of instructions, using the sequencing . - develop Ss’ writing skill. B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: 5. Grammar: infinitive, Conj: first, next, then, after that, finally. 6. Language skills: writing, speaking, reading, listening. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures. drawing, mime , picture E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book. - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Warm up ( 5 ms):. (221). Students,activities.

(222) Period : date: 27/1/2013 Week : 23. Period Period : 64. Preparing. Teaching date: 29/1/2013 UNIT 10: RECYCLING Lesson 5 : Language focus. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - form the passive in Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives . II. Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: 5. Grammar: Passive form, a noun clause: “ It’s + adj + to V”. 6. Language skills: Reading, speaking, listening, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , lesson plan, chart , picture / drawing , mimes , 4 cardboards . E/ Procedure: 1.Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms) :- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson. And then T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): ’ Teacher s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5 ms) * Questions game - Call on a student to go to the board and give him or her a Play game job name - Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking yes-no Individual questions - The chosen student can only answer yes or no - Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a point and take the place of the last chosen student . Example questions : - Do you get a big salary ? - Do you wear uniform ? Language focus * The passive forms ( 16 ms) Teacher – Ss 1.1 Passive Form in the Present Simple Pay attention S + am / is / are + past participle => It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the verb Order the pictures * Work with a partner read the instructions - Ordering pictures : Group work + Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures to put them in the correct order according to the instructions + Call on some groups to give their answers . (222).

(223) + Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6 - Writing : rewrite the sentences + Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form compare their writing + Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to the Pair work board and write their sentences + Correct and give feedback 1.2 Passive Form in the Future Simple Teacher – Ss S + will / shall + be + past participle. copy down - Have Ss copy down - Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in the gaps , using the Passive - Call on Ss to give their answers and correct 1. … will be shown 2. Will … be built …..? 3. … will be finished …. 4. Will … be made … ? * Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause ( 15 ms) 2.1. It + be + adjective + to infinitive Example : It is very difficult to speak English well *Complete the sentences - Ask Ss to open their books and complete the dialogues - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and correct 2.2 . S + be + adj + that / noun clause Example : We are delighted that you passed the English exam . - Get Ss to copy . *Complete the letter - Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words . A B Key 1. relieved (a) a. xin chuc mung 1.d 2. Congratulation b. trong cho 2.a 3. Look forward to c. xac nhan lai 3.b 4. confirm (v) d. nhe nhom 4. c - Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary - Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box - Get some Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct. * Exercises: 0. are delighted 1. was happy 2. am relieved 3. is afraid 4. Are … sure … 5. am certain - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud . (223). Individual. Whole class Complete the sentences Pair work. Teacher – Ss Complete the letter Whole class. pairwork. copy down read the complete letter aloud Retell the main points.

(224) Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Do exercise at home Homework ( 1m) 1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,s grandparents are delighted that he passed his English exam ……” 2. Do the exercises in the workbook .. Period Period : 65 Week : 23. Preparing date: 28/1/2013 Teaching date: 30/1/2013 UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Lesson 1 : Getting started and listen and read (224).

(225) A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use some expressions to express their interest . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: Traveling words. 2. Grammar: I’d like to……? Would you mind + V-ing/ If….. did? 3. Language skills: Listening, reading, writing, speaking. C/ Techniques : D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3. - T. corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): ’ Teacher s activities Students,activities * Warm up ( 5 ms) : Jumbled words - Write the topic “ Places of interest “ on the board Team work. Places of interest. Ha long bay Nha Rong harbor - Ask each team to connect the words to make the right phrases for places of interest and write them on the board as fast as possible => Ngo Mon Gate , Ha long Bay , The Temple Literature , Nha rong Harbor . * Getting Started : - Ask Ss to open their books and match the names with the pictures - Call on some Ss to give their answers a. Ngo Mon Gate b. Na rong Harbor c. The Temple Literature d. Ha Long Bay - Call some Ss to read the proper names aloud . Pre- reading ( 10 ms) Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . * Pre- teach Vocabulary : - Crop (n) : something such as grain , rice , fruit … is grown in one season . - Sugar cane (n) : cay mia ( It is used to make sugar ) - Water buffalo (n) : con trau - forty – minute drive : The drive takes 40 minutes Form : A / an Adj ( number ) – N + N Ex : a3 – month vacation / a thirteen – year – old – boy * Checking vocabulary : Bingo +. Guiding questions : - Set the scene and put the chart with questions on the board a. where does Hoa meet The Jones ? b. Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet Nam? c. How do they travel to Ha Noi ? (225). play game. Individual. read the proper names aloud Listen and copy Teacher – Ss individual and choral copy down Whole class pay attention answer the questions Pair work.

(226) d. What do they see along the road to Ha Noi ? e. What would Tim like to do ? - Ask Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes - Have Ss listen to the tape while reading the dialogue - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions - Call on some pairs to give their answers - Feedback : a. Hoa meets The Jones at the airport b. Yes , it is . c. By taxi d. They see a boy riding a water buffalo , rice paddies , corn and sugar cane fields e. He would like to take a photo . While – reading ( 15 ms) - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False - Read the sentences aloud and call on some Ss to answer , then have them correct the false sentences and get them to write in their notebooks . a. T b. T d. T e.T c. F -> … in a taxi f. F -> … Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are grown around Ha Noi . - Call on some groups of five to practice the dialogue in front of class - Correct their pronunciation Post – reading ( 6 ms) Discussion - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the situations mentioned below . * to express interest : - I,d like you to meet my parents …. - It is nice to meet you …. - It is great to be in Viet Nam . - I would to sit with Tim ….. * to express a request : - Would you mind sitting in the front seat … - Would you mind if I took a photo ? Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework (1 m) : 1. Learn by heart new words and some structures to give some examples . 2. Do the exercises in the workbooks .. think about the questions listen to the tape while reading the dialogue work in pairs to answer the questions. listen to the tape and say out True or False. some groups of five to practice the dialogue in front of class. read the dialogue again , discuss with them and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the situations mentioned below . Individual. - Retell the main points of this lesson. - copy down homeworks.. UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Lesson 2: Speak and listen A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to: - make and respond to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions . - listen and match the places in the box to their correct positions on the map (226).

(227) B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: Place direction. 5. Grammar: Formal request. 6. Language skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD, a mapped dialogue chart .. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up (5 ms): - Asks Ss go to the board to write the names of the things they have just seen from memory . => T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5 ms) : What does it say ? - Choose a student and ask him / her to go to the front of the Play game class with his / her back to the board so that he / she can not see what is written on the board . Whole class - Write the information on the board . - Ask the rest of the class try to help the student guess what is written on the board by asking questions until he / she says out right the words on the board . Example : Yes, I do . Ss ask : Do you like your teacher ? Or Every day Ss ask : How often do you have a shower ? A/ SPEAKING ( 16 ms) Pay attention * Pre- speaking (4 ms) : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some structures 1. Pre- teach structures : - Set the scene : Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr. Jones and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue and elicit the Teacher – Ss sentences from Ss . Model sentences : 1. A : Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi? B : No problem . pay attention 2. A : Would you mind if I took a photo ? B : Not at all . => Used to make and respond to formal requests Form : 1. Would you mind / Do you mind + verb- ing …? 2. Would you mind if I + Verb ( in Past simple) …? Do you mind if I + Verb ( in Present simple ) ..? copy down Responses :  Agreement: No , I do not mind . / No , of course no . / Not at all . / (227).

(228) Please do . / Please go head .  Disagreement : I am sorry , I can not / I am sorry , it is impossible I,d prefer you did not . / I,d rather you did not . - Get Ss to copy and give some more examples with suggested words */ While – speaking ( 8 ms): - Ask Ss to work in pairs + Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the exchanges + Close pairs : get the whole class to practice all the exchanges - Give feedback Mapped dialogue You Tourist officer Excuse me ! Yes ? I would like to visit a market. Would you Not at all . mind suggesting one ? How about goping to Thai Binh Market ? That sounds It opens from about interesting . Thank 5 am to 8pm . you . You are welcome . + Open pairs: Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. + Closed pairs : have Ss open their books and use the information / 101 to practice other dialogues . Group 1 : Markets Group 2 : Museums Group3 : Restaurants Group 4 : Stamps Group 5 : Zoo and Botanical Garden * Post – speaking ( 4ms): - Call on some volunteers from each group to practice in front of class . - Rewrite the completed dialogues in their note books B/ LISTENING ( 15 ms) * Warm up (3 ms): Quiz : what is this place ? - Ask questions and call the student who puts his / her hand up first to answer - Tell Ss each place consists of 3 questions ; 3 points for the first question , 2 points for the second question , 1 point for the third question . a. What is this place ? 1. it is called the city of Eternal Spring . 2. It has a lot of waterfalls and lakes . 3. You can find the most kinds of flowers here . b. What is this place ? 1. It is a seaside resort . 2. It has a very big monument of Buddha . 3. It has an Oceanic Institute (228). give some more examples with suggested words Pair work. make the dialouge Pair work. Teacher – Ss Pair work some volunteers from each group to practice in front of class .. practice in front of class . rewrite in the notebook. Play game. Answer the questions Individual.

(229) c. What is this place ? 1. It is a mountainous resort . 2. It has tribal villages . 3. Sometimes it has snow . d. What is this place ? 1. It is recognized as a World Heritage Site by UNESSCO. 2. It has a lot of caves . 3. It contains of a lot of islands . *Key : a. Da Lat b. Nha Trang c. Sa Pa d. Ha Long Bay => Lead in the new lesson . * Pre- listening (3 ms): Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words +. Pre – teach vocabulary : - Highway ( n) - Tourist information center (n) +. Set the scene: “ The Jones family are going around Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5 places in the maps . Listen to them and match the places to the correct positions on the maps “ - Have Ss guess their correct positions on the map - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board. * While – listening (7 ms): - Ask Ss to list the places on the maps . - Play the tape 2 or 3 times - Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends . - Call on some Ss to read their answers and give the correct answers Answer key : a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station d) pagoda e) temple - Play the tape once more to check the answers ( pause at some important paragraph ) * Post – listening ( 2ms): - Have Ss repeat chorally while listening to the tape . - Correct their pronunciation Consolidation ( 2ms) -Retell the main points of this lesson. * Homework( 1m) : 1. Do the exercises in the workbook . 2. Prepare the next lesson Unit 11: read. Period : date: ....................................... Preparing (229). Teacher – Ss. Pay attention. Pay attention. Read prediction list the places on the maps. compare their answers read their answers. copy down repeat chorally listening to the tape Retell the main points Do exercise at home. while.

(230) Week : date: ........................................ Teaching. UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Lesson 3: Read A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - get the information from simple tourist advertisements . B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: tourist vocabulary. 5. Grammar: Ed/ ing participles. 6. Language skills: Reading, speaking, reading, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart . pictures , drawing . E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5 ms): - Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson. -T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson ( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up ( 5ms): Word square Tourist sites. A D D Y R E S O R T D C A T G B E A C H K N L R Y S A P A E B U A I M K S A P C A H T B V B I P J I C A V E S L D K I T H L N L A K E C T A M O U N T A I N R D A N H A T R A N G E A G G E F G X C U L *Answer Key : resort , beach , Sa Pa , caves , lakes mountains , Nha Trang Bach Ma , Ha Long , Da lat , Tribe Seaside , The citadel Pre- reading ( 10 ms) : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . * Pre – teach vocabulary : - accommodation (n) : a place to live , work or stay in - giant (adj ) = huge / very big - slope (n) (230). Team work find 13 hidden words write them on a piece of paper .. Individual Listen and repeat.

(231) - jungle (n) = a very thick forest - limestone (n) = da voi - florist (n) : a person who sells flowers - to import >< to export + Checking vocabulary : What and where While – reading ( 15 ms): * Grid : Read advertisements about the resorts and check (v) the topics mentioned in the grid - Call on some Ss - Ask Ss to read the o give their answers + Nha Trang : Flights to Ha Noi , railway , hotels , local transport , tourist attractions . + Da Lat : Hotels , local transport , waterfalls , tourist attractions + Sa Pa : Hotels , local transport , mountain slopes tourist attractions , villages . + Ha Long Bay : World Heritage , tourist attractions , sand beaches , railways , hotels , caves , locals transport . - Have Ss copy down * Matching : put the poster on the board and ask Ss to match the words or phrases in Column A to column B A B 1. Nha Trang a. tribal villages , mountain 2. Da lat climbing 3. Sa Pa b. The place where President Ho 4. Ha long Chi Minh left Viet Nam in 1911. Bay c. Swimming and sunbathing . 5. Nha Rong d. Oceanic Institute Harbor e. Flower gardens . - Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to connect the words Answer Key : 1. d 2.e 3.a 4.c 5.b + Grid : Get Ss to open their books , read the text on page 105 and check (v) the boxes . - Monitor and correct . */ Post – reading (6 ms) : Role play - Tell Ss to ask and answer questions using the information in the text . + Write the model on the board . A : Where should ( Andrew ) go ? B : He should go to ( Sa Pa ) . A : Why ? B : Because ( he studies tribes and he likes mountain – climbing ) - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice speaking . - Monitor and correct - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . Consolidation (2 ms): (231). copy down. read the advertisements. work in pairs to compare their answer Whole class. Individual. match. open their books , read the text on page 105 and check (v) the boxes .. ask and answer questions using the information in the text. Pair work Teacher – Ss Pair work practice in front of class ..

(232) -Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework ( 1m) : 1. Redo the exercises and copy in their notebooks . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 11: Write Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Retell the main points Do exercise at home. Preparing Teaching. UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Lesson 4: Write A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - know how to write a narrative , using a guided composition . - develop Ss’ Writing skill. B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: 5. Grammar: The simple tense; Conjunctions; adverbs of time. 6. Language skills: Writing, reading, speaking, listening. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters. E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up (5ms): - Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book. - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson( 39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5ms) : Which word ? - Get Ss to study the definition of a narrative by a gap fill Group work of 4/5 Ss - Put the missing words on the board and have Ss study first :written – climax – attention – brief – events - Show the chart and ask Ss to ill in the gaps with the go to the board and write the words in the box . words as fast as possible . - Ask Ss of each group to go to the board and write the words as fast as possible . - Explain the definition in Vietnamese Answer key : 1. events 2. written 3. climax 4. attention 5. brief Pre- writing ( 5ms): Introduce the topic of the writing and some new Listen and repeat words to Ss . 1. Pre – teach Vocabulary copy down (232).

(233) - canoe (n) : using picture - to paddle (mime ) -> paddle (n) - to hire : thue muon - to overturn : lat up / lat do - to rescue = to save somebody ,s life from danger + Get Ss to copy down . * Checking vocabulary : Slap the board *. Ordering statements : Setting the scene “ Last week , while on vacation in Da lat , The Jones family had quite an unforgettable adventure on Xuan Huong Lake . What did they do and what happened to them ? “ - Ask Ss to read the first part of the story / 105 and rearrange the sentences / 106 to complete the story . - Get some Ss to read the story aloud for the class and correct pronunciation errors . - Give feedback : c -> a -> g ->d -> f -> b -> e While – writing ( 15 ms) 1. Explanation : - Have Ss look at the pictures / 106 – 107 and guess the meaning of the new words . - Explain the meanings of these words + to stumble : truot chan / + to go off : vang ra + to realize : nhan ra - Get Ss to copy 2. Ordering pictures :Ask Ss to look at the pictures again and rearrange the events in the correct chronological order to make it a story. - Call on some Ss to give their answers and correct . - Give feedback : d -> b -> e -> h -> a -> f -> c -> g 3. Write – it – up : - Ask Ss to use the pictures already rearranged and the given words to write the story about Uyen . - Monitor and help Ss with words or structures while they are writing . * Notice : The past simple tense is often used in a narrative . - Ask them to exchange their writings to correct for each other . - Call on some Ss to read their story aloud for he class - Give feedback : Uyen had a day to remember last week . she had a math exam on Friday but she got up late . She realized her alarm clock did not go off . As he was leaving home , it started to rain heavily . Uyen tried to run as fast as she could . Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell onto the road . Her school bag went into a pool of water and everything got wet . (233). Play game Pay attention. Teacher – Ss read the story aloud Whole class. look at the pictures guess the meaning of the new words .. look at the pictures again rearrange the events in the correct chronological order. Whole – class Individual Individual read the story aloud.

(234) Strangely , the rain stopped as she got to her classroom . Luckily , Uyen had enough time to finish her exam . Post – writing ( 6ms) - Call on some Ss to demonstrate the completed story in front of class . - Copy the story in their notebooks . Consolidation ( 2 ms) -Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework (1m) 1. Learn by heart all new words and copy in their notebooks . 2. Work in groups of 4 writing a story to tell the class in the next lesson . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ demonstrate the completed story in front of class . Individually Retell the main points of this lesson. do exercises at home. Preparing Teaching. UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Lesson 5: Language focus A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - use Present and Past participles to describe things and people and the requests with “ Would / Do you mind if …..? and Would / Do you mind + V-ing …? “ B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: 5. Grammar: - ed and –ing participle - Would / Do you mind + V-ing………….? - Would / Do you mind if I……………? 6. Language skills: Writing, reading, speaking, listening. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Pictures , cardboards . gap – fill chart … E/ Procedure: 1. Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance . 2. Checking up (5ms): - Call Ss to read the narrative which they have done at home. - Correct mistake and give marks 3. New lesson( 39 ms) Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5ms) * Memory game - Ask Ss to look at the pictures / 109 carefully for 20 Whole class seconds and close their books . Team work (234).

(235) - Tell them the team having the most right words is the winner Answer Key : box , lamp truck , flowers , elephant , bear , rabbit * Language focus 1 : * Pre-teach : - Ask Ss to open their books and look at the picture / 108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard . What are they doing ? “ - Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct . T : What is Mr Quang doing ? Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs . T : What is Miss Lien doing ? Ss : She is carrying a bag . T : ( Nam ) Ss : ( standing next to Miss Lien / talking to Miss Lien ) T : ( Ba ) Ss : ( sitting under the tree / reading a book ) T : ( Lan ) Ss : ( standing by the table ) T : ( Nga and Hoa ) Ss : ( playing chess )  Model sentences : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang. open their books again , g through the words and correct . Whole class Teacher – Ss. Choral -> individual. work in pairs to say who each person is , using the information above .. Whole class. ( present participle phrase ) Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle Use : A present participle can be used as an adjective to qualify a noun with active meaning - Have Ss copy * Practice : - Ask Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is , using the information above Example : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang - Correct and feedback 2. Language focus 2 : * Pre –teach : Matching - Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the picture / 109 to do the matching A B Key 1. box a. wrap in 1. f 2. truck b. dress in 2. c 3. lamp c. recycled from 3. e 4. doll d. keep in 4. b 5. flowers e. made in 5. a 6. toys f. paint 6. d (235). Individual. Pair work. look at the picture / 109 agai and answer the questions :. some pairs to practice asking an answering the questions.

(236) - Where is the old lamp made in ? - What color is the box painted ? - What is truck recycled from ? - What color is the doll dressed in ? - What are the flowers wrapped in ? - Where are the toys kept ? => Ask “ How much is the old lamp made in China ? Model Sentences : The old lamp made in China is five dollars . ( past participle phrase ) Form : Regular verb + ed Past participle Irregular verb Use : a past participle can be used as an adjective to qualify a noun with passive meaning . - Have Ss copy * Practice : - Ask Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions and answer 1. T : How much is the box painted green ? St: The box painted green is one dollar - Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the questions ( Using the information in the matching ) - Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class . * Language focus 3 : + Presentation : - Ask Ss to repeat the models sentences : Would you mind if + Verb ( in Past simple tense …) ? Do you mind if + Verb ( in present simple tense …) ? Do you mind / would you mind + verb – ing …? + Agreement : No , I do not mind . / No , of course not . / Not at all . / Please do . / Please go ahead . - Disagreement : I,d prefer you did not . / I,d rather you did not . => Meaning : Xin ban cam phien … - Get Ss to copy . b) Practice : Cardboard Drill - Prepare 4 cardboards with cues including checks (v) and crosses (x) a. move / car (v) c. get / coffee (x) b. put out / cigarette (v) d. wait / moment (x) Model : T : Would you mind moving your car ? Ss : No , of course not . - Call on 2 or 3 Ss to repeat it and correct . + Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate in the class. + Closed pairs : Get the whole class to practice - Go on until the last cue (236). Teacher – Ss. Choral -> individual. Teacher – Ss Individual -> choral. look at their books , listen to the questions and answer Teacher – Ss. + Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate in the class.. Whole class use the right words in the box t fill in the gaps .. Teacher – Ss Pair work Individual Whole class. work in pairs , playing the roles Listen and correct their mistakes ..

(237) *. Language focus 4 : + Gap fill - Put the gap – fill chart on the board . - Ask Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in the gaps . turned off – explain – telling – ask 1. Would you mind …… me something about it ? 2. Do you mind if I …… you a question ? 3. Would you please …. this new word to me ? 4. Would you mind if I ….. the television ? Answer Key : 1.telling 2.ask 3.explain 4. turned off + Ordering pictures - Ask Ss to write the numbers and look at the pictures , listen to the situations and order the pictures ( 1-> 6 ) 1. turn on the stereo 2. watch TV while eating 3. sit down 4. postpone the meeting 5. turn on the air – conditioner 6. smoke - Ask Ss to give their answers 1.d 2.f 3.a 4.c 5.e 6.b - Get Ss to work in pairs , playing the roles to demonstrate the exchanges based on the models below the pictures . Listen and correct their mistakes . *Consolidation ( 2ms): -Retell the main points of this lesson. * Homework ( 1m): 1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson .. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Individual. write the numbers look at the pictures , listen to the situations and orde the pictures playing the roles. Retell the main points Do exercise at home. Preparing Teaching. COSOLIDATION A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 9 to unit 11 so that they can supplement what they are short of . (to do the test well ). B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: 5. Grammar: 6. Language skills: Listening, writing, speaking, reading. C/ Techniques: D/ Teching aids: Lesson plan, posters . E/Procedures: (237).

(238) 1.Class organization: - Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up: -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson:. Teacher’s activities. Students,activities. I / Supply the correct form of the verbs : ( 2,5 ps) 1. Would you mind if I ( take ) …………… a photo ? 2. Would you mind ( help ) ……………… her to finish her homework ? 3. Do you mind if we ( get ) ……………. a taxi to town ? 4. The cars ( make ) ……………… from Japan are the best . 5. The man ( talk ) ………………… to your teacher is my uncle . II / Rewrite these sentences as directed : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. Can I use your pen ? => Do you mind ………………? 2. Could you turn off the TV ? => Would you mind ……………….? 3. They built that bridge five years ago . => That bridge ……………. 4. The children eat all the vegetables and meat . => All the vegetable ……… III / Complete the sentences with the suitable word or phrase : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. Run ( fast / fastly ) and you can catch the bus . 2. Hung promised to try ( him / his ) best in learning English . 3. I prefer walking to ( riding / ride ) a bicycle . 4. It is a ( thirty – minute / thirty – minutes ) drive from here to the city center . IV / Complete the sentences , using the given words or phrases : ( 1,5 ps ) 1. Last year class 11 A / have / terrible experience. 2. One weekend / they decide / go / a picnic / Cuc Phuong National Park . 3. They / get out of / bus / lunch / because everybody / very hungry .. Period 70. Test( no 3 ) A / The aims : (238).

(239) I. Teaching points : Students will be able to II. Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test. B/ Steps of the lesson: I. Organization: II. Checking up: III. Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson . - Deliver the test papers to Ss . I / Supply the correct form of the verbs : ( 2,5 ps) 1. Would you mind if I ( take ) …………… a photo ? 2. Would you mind ( help ) ……………… her to finish her homework ? 3. Do you mind if we ( get ) ……………. a taxi to town ? 4. The cars ( make ) ……………… from Japan are the best . 5. The man ( talk ) ………………… to your teacher is my uncle . II / Rewrite these sentences as directed : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. Can I use your pen ? => Do you mind ………………? 2. Could you turn off the TV ? => Would you mind ……………….? 3. They built that bridge five years ago . => That bridge ……………. 4. The children eat all the vegetables and meat . => All the vegetable ……… III / Complete the sentences with the suitable word or phrase : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. Run ( fast / fastly ) and you can catch the bus . 2. Hung promised to try ( him / his ) best in learning English . 3. I prefer walking to ( riding / ride ) a bicycle . 4. It is a ( thirty – minute / thirty – minutes ) drive from here to the city center . IV / Complete the sentences , using the given words or phrases : ( 1,5 ps ) 1. Last year class 11 A / have / terrible experience. 2. One weekend / they decide / go / a picnic / Cuc Phuong National Park . 3. They / get out of / bus / lunch / because everybody / very hungry . V / Listen .You are going to listen to Lily talking about her self . You are going to listen twice . Check (v) the correct box for True or False ( 2,0 Ps ). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8. Statements True False Lily comes from China English is important to her as she will need it for her future job She started learning English when she was eighteen . She has a problem with listening . She can understand people when they speak fast . She does not find English difficult to learn . She wants to be an English teacher . She loves English songs , but she does not hope to become a singer .. Tapescrift : Hi ! my name is Lily . I come from China . I am a student , a university student . I am eighteen years old . I am studying English as a foreign language . English is important to me because I will need ot for my job in the future . I began learning English when I was very young – at the age of eight . I think that my biggest problem is (239).

(240) listening . People speak very quickly , so I can not understand them . English is really hard for me to learn , but I like it . I want to be an English teacher ; or I hope to become a singer one day because I love English songs very much . The end period 70. TEST (45min) ENGLISH 8 (No 3) I.)Circle the best answer: (3ps). 1.I open my book in ……………….. to read. a) as b)order c)so. 2.You should cool the burn……………………….. a)immediately b)immediate c)immediating. 3.What time ………………. Lan be here.? a)is b)shall c)will. 4. She will be here ………………… three hours. a)for b)in c)on. 5. Do you want to listen ………………….. the radio.? a)at b)to c)for. 6. Thank you very much for the commics you ………………..me last week. a)send b)sending c)sent . II.)Choose one of two options to complete the following sentences : (3ps) 1.The glasses ( breaking / broken )last night are mine. 2. I ( glad /am glad )that you want to know more about the subject . 3. Would you mine if I ( turn on / turned on ) the T.V ? 4. The boy ( punished / punishing ) by the teacher is Nam. 5. Do you mine ( opening the window /open the window ) ? 6. They will be ( finished / finishing ) before lunar new year. III / Supply the correct form of the verbs : ( 2 ps) 1. Would you mind ( help ) ……………… her to finish her homework ? 2. Do you mind if we ( get ) ……………. a taxi to town ? 3. The cars ( make ) ……………… from Japan are the best . 4. The man ( talk ) ………………… to your teacher is my uncle . IV / Rewrite these sentences as directed : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. The children eat all the vegetables and meat . => All the vegetable …………………………………………………………… 2.He will build a new house there.=> A new house ……………………………………………………………………. (240).

(241) Period : Week :. Preparing date: ...................................... Teaching date: ....................................... UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 1 : Getting started and listen and read. A / Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to : - aware of how to make accept and decline invitations . B/ Language contents: 4. Vocabulary: Voc about traveling. (241).

(242) 5. Grammar: Progressive tenses with always. 6. Language skills: Listening, reading, speaking, writing. C/ Techniques: D/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan , Pictures , chart E/ Procedure: 1.Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3. - T. corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up( 5ms) : * Guessing game ( Getting started ) - Show the pictures to Ss , one by one , and ask Ss to Individual guess what country it is . - Feedback : a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand d) Statue e) Canada f ) Japan +. Chatting : guess what country it is . T :Where do you want to visit among these countries? Ss: …………………….. T : Why ? Ss : …………………… Pre- reading ( 10 ms): Teacher – Ss Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words . Pre – teach Vocabulary : - to include : bao gom , gom co - to come over : to come to Someone,s house to visit Whole class for a short time - to pick so up : to come and get so in your car to drive him / her to a place Teacher - abroad (adv ) = in a foreign country -> to be / go / travel / live abroad Play game * Checking Vocabulary : Rub out and remember * True / False Prediction - Set the scene “ Mrs Quyen is going to the USA for Pay attention a vacation . She is ringing her friend , Mrs Smith , to tell her about the trip . “ - Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the statements a. Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in work in pairs to decide if the San Francisco . statements are true or false . b. Mrs Smith invite Mrs Quyen and her husband to stay with her while they are in town . c. Mrs Quyen does not accept Mrs smith,s invitation because she wants to stay with a Vietnamese friend (242).

(243) of hers . d. Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for 3 days . e. Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs Smith,s place for dinner one night . f. Mr Thanh ; Mrs Quyen,s husband , goes abroad for a business meeting . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false . - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . While – reading (15 ms) * Checking predictions : - Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while reading the dialogue . - Call on some Ss to correct the false statements . 1. False -> Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from Ha Noi 2. True 3. False -> … because her accommodation is included in her tickets price . 4. True 5. False -> Only Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs Smith ,s . 6. True +. Grid : Complete Mrs Quyen ,s schedule - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs to complete the grid with the information taken from the dialogue . - Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the information in the grid on the board . Date Mon 25 Tue 26 Wed 27 Thu 28 Schedule coming Going Having Leaving to San out dinner San Francisco with Francisco the Smiths - Have Ss copy +. Comprehension Questions - Ask Ss to look at their books and answer the questions . - Let Ss compare their answers with their partner. - Call on some Ss to answer - Give feedback and correct Answer key : a) No , they won,t . Because they are coming on a tour , and their accommodation is included in the ticket price , so they will stay at the hotel . (243). Pair work. read their predictions and write them on the board . open their books , listen to the tape. Teacher – Ss. read the dialogue complete the grid go to the board to write Individual. Whole class Pair work answer the questions compare their answers with their partner. - Pair work.

(244) b) No , he won,t . Because he will have a business meeting in the evening that day . c) Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel . - Get Ss to copy . Post – reading ( 6ms):  Grammar Awareness - Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the statements indicating the following situations 1. Making an invitation 2. Accepting an invitation 3. Declining an invitation 4. Making a complaint - Call on Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy . 1. Would you like to come and stay with us … ? .. you must come over for dinner one night . 2. Ye , we ,d love to but we will only be in town for three nights . 3. That is very kind of you but we are coming on a tour .. 4. Oh . Dear . He is always working. Consolidation (2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homework (1m): 1. Learn by heart new words and structures to give some more examples . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 12 : Speak and listen. Period : Week :. read the dialogue again and pick out the statements indicating the following situations Whole class Pair work give their answers and have Ss copy. - Retell the main points of this lesson. Do exercise at home.. Preparing date: ...................................... Teaching date: ....................................... UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 2: Speak and listen. I/. Objectives: By the end of the leeson Ss will be able to: - know the way to talk about planning a tour and get acquainted with word relating to the topic (244).

(245) - listen to the weather reports and get acquainted with some structures and words used in the weather reports B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): - T asks Ss play “jumbled words” about the name if cities - take part in the game in America. - write on the board + Ewn rkyo + cgohaic + wonshaingt + Sol ngaegel A/ SPEAKING ( 16 ms) Pre – speaking ( 4ms): - listen - T introduces some ways to do exercise - look at their books and listen - T asks Ss to look at the brochures and flight information - T introduces some new words - listen and repeat, then copy + via + rate per night + single/ double down + facilities + gym + business center While – speaking ( 8 ms): - T guides Ss to complete your itinerary - complete the itinerary -How many flights a week? -Can you take from Los Angeles to Boston? -Which flight do you take everyday of the week? -Which of hotel is cheaper? - listen and answer -How much is a double room in Revere Hotel? -How about Atlantic Hotel? -Where can you visit? - T gives a model and hangs on the board  Where shall we stay? The Revere Hotel is very expensive but it has a gym - practice in pair  Where should we visit? I think we should visit Harvard Medical school & Art Gallery  What time should we leave Los Angeles? There is a daily flight at ten am. Would that be O.K? - practice in pair - T calls Ss to practice the model - pair work - T calls some pairs to check - T gives comment. (245).

(246) Post – speaking ( 4ms): - T asks Ss to practice with a situation Make a plan for their summer holiday by filling the - free practice information in their itinerary. - Departure: (Hue ). . . . . - Arrive: ( Ho Chi Minh city). . . . . . . - Accommodation: ( hotel ). . . . . . - T calls some Ss to check and gives marks B/ LISTENING ( 15ms): Pre – listening (4ms): - T asks Ss to write “net words” - list the words Weather. - T asks Ss to ask and answer the questions about the weather + What’s the weather like today? + What’s the weather like in spring?/ Summer …..? + What do you usually do in summer? - T asks modal and asks Ss to work in pair - T calls some pairs to check - T introduces the lesson - T asks Ss to read all the adjectives in the box - T remarks the way to talk about the temperature + Minus degree, zero degree, degree centigrade. While – listening (7 ms): - T guides Ss to do the exercise - T plays the tape once - T plays the tape (three times) - T asks Ss to compare the answers - T calls some Ss to give the answers - T plays the tape again and gives the correction. Answer keys. CITY WEATHER TEMPERATURE LOW HIGH 1. Sydney Dry - windy 20 26 2. Tokyo Dry - windy 15 22 3. London Humid - cold -3 7 4. Bangkok Warm - dry 24 32 5. New York Windy - cloudy 8 15 6. Paris. Cold - dry 10 16 Post – listening ( 4ms): - T asks Ss to play game: which is the best weather forecast? - T devides class into small group to make weather report about some bog cities in VN - T calls some Ss to check and comments (246). - answer It’s hot/ cool/ It’s cool/…. I go swimming - pair work - practice in pair - listen - read - take note - look at the table and guess - listen for information - listen and do the exercise - pair work. - give the answer. - work in pair - practice in pairs - group work Retell the main points Do exercise at home.

(247) Consolidation ( 2ms) -Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework (1 m) Rewrite the answers; learn by heart the new words. Period : Week :. Preparing date: ...................................... Teaching date: ....................................... UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 3: Read. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - Read the postcard from Mrs Quyen to her children to understand the general and the details (247).

(248) - Obtain knowledge about some scenic sprits in USA B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : past progressive with when and while 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary 3. New lesson (39 ms):. Teacher’s activities Warm up ( 5 ms): - T guides Ss to play “hang man” game N E W Y O R K Pre – reading (10 ms): - T asks: do you remember Mrs. Quyen? What plan did she have? - T introduces the lesson - T asks Ss to look at the pictures and guess which places she visited - T calls some Ss to give the answer - T introduces some new words and their meaning + lava + volcano + pour out + Fisherman’s wharf + Napa valley + carve + “The windy city” + on the shore of + State of Liberty + be situated + the Empire State Building - T calls some Ss to read the words While – reading ( 15 ms): 1. Write what Mrs. Quyen did and saw ….. - T guides Ss to do the exercise - T asks Ss to read the post cards carefully - T asks Ss to do the exercise - T asks Ss to correct the answers with their friends - T calls some Ss to give the answer - T comments Answer key: a. Hawaii -> went swimming, visited Kilauea Volcano. b. New York -> went shopping and bought lots of souvenirs. (248). Students’ activities - take part in the game - answer - listen - look at pictures and guess - give the answer - listen and repeat, then copy down - read the words. - read the postcards. - do exercise - compare - give the answer.

(249) c. Chicago -> saw Lake Michigan. d. Mount Rushmore -> saw the heads of American Presidents carved into the rocks. e. San Francisco -> visited Fisherman’s Wharf, the Napa Valley wine growing area and the Alcatraz prison. 2. Answer the questions. - T asks Ss to read the postcards again to answer the questions - T calls some pairs to give the answer. - T comments and gives the correction Answer key: a. She went there by plane. b. She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz. c. On Mount Rushmore ,there are the heads of American Presidents carved into the rocks. d. It’s “ The Windy City” e. She was shopping while her husband was visiting the Statue of Liberty. c. Post – Reading ( 6ms): - T calls some Ss to read aloud the postcards. Copy down. read then work in pair - practice in pairs. copy down. - read aloud. - T check Ss’ pronunciation - T asks: What do you know about the famous places in - answer in pair the U.S.A ? Can you tell some famous places ? Consolidation ( 2ms) Retell the main points of the lesson. Retell Homework (1 m): Reread the postcards; rewrite the exercises; learn by heart the new words. Do exercise at home Prepare for the nex lesson Unit 12: Write. Period : Week :. Preparing date: ...................................... Teaching date: ....................................... UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 4 : Write. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - how to write a postcast B/ Language contents: (249).

(250) 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : past progressive with when and while 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): - T guides Ss to play “Brainstorming” - take part in the game Activities on holiday: sight seeing, ……… Pre – writing (10 ms): - list all things to do on - T asks: Have you ever sent a postcard to your friend or holiday relative? What do you write on a postcard? - answer - T introduces the lesson - T asks Ss to do the first exercise - listen 1. Complete the postcard Mrs. Quyen sent from the USA. - do the exercise - T calls some Ss to read the post card aloud then write the answer on the board - T comments and gives the corrections (1) in (2) people (3) weather - give the answer (4) visited (5) her (6) nice /lovely, (7) bought (8) for (9) heaviness, (10) soon. - T reminds Ss how to write a postcard - listen and notice While writing (15 ms): 2. Imagine you are a tourist on vacation in a certain place/trip in Vietnam. Write a postcard to a friend ………… - listen and notice - T explains way to write a postcard by asking Ss to pay attention to the information in exercise 2 - write the postcard - T asks Ss to write a postcard - read their postcard - T calls some Ss to read their postcard - T comments Post – writing ( 6ms): - listen and notice - T reminds Ss way to write a postcard. Answer: 1. well – good 6. spend – spent - take note 2. friendship – friendly 7. to play – playing 3. wind – windy 8. bottle – bottles 4. visit – visited 9. are – is 5. his – her 10. buying – to buy Retell the main points Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. (250).

(251) Homework ( 1m) Write the postcard again Correct errors in the postcard Dear Nam, Do exercises at home We’re having a well time on CatBa Island. The people are very friendship and helpful. The weather has been sunny and wind. In CatBa town, I visit my aunt, Mrs. Lien and his children. I spend the whole morning to play with them. I bought lot of souvenirs and two bottle fish sauce. Shopping here are wonderful. There are a lots things to buying. See you soon.. Period : Week :. Preparing date: ...................................... Teaching date: ....................................... UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 5: Language focus. A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : Practice in using Past progressive with While,When and progressive tenses with “always” to complain. (251).

(252) Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 12. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : - past progressive - past progressive with when and while - progresssive tenses with always 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5ms): - T prepares some cards with verbs of actions. - One of Ss from each team goes to the front ,picks up one Whole class card and mimes. Ss of the other team guess what the mime represents and say what s/he was doing at 10,00 last Team work Sunday. Language focus 1 ( 12 ms): Model sentences Teacher – Ss 1. Ba was taking a shower at 8 o'clock last night 2. They were talking to each other at that time * Form: - Work individually S + was/ were + V-ing… Use: To indicate an action that was in progress at a point of time in the past * Picture Drill: - Look at the picture and Look at the pictures. Say what each person was doing at do exercises eight o’clock last night. 1. Hoa/have dinner - Work in pairs 2. Bao/ read a comic 3. Nga/ write a letter - go to the board to do 4. Na/ walk with her dog exercises. 5.Lan and her gradma/ talk to each other Ex.a. Ba was taking a shower at 8 o’clock last night. - Ask ss to work in pair to do exercise. - Pairwork - Have Ss compare with a partner Answer key: b. Hoa was having dinner at 8 last night. c. Bao was doing his homework at 8 last night. Copy down d. Nga was writing a letter at 8 last night. e. Na was walking at 8 last night. Individual f. Lan was talking to her grandma at 8 last night (252).

(253) Language focus 2 (10 ms): Model sentences The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came The phone rang while Nga was eating Form: Main clause + Adv clause * Past progressive when Past simple * Past simple while Past progressive ->Key to LF2: a-C b-F c-E d-B e-D f-A Language focus 3 ( 9 ms): Model sentence : Bao is always forgetting his homework be adv V-ing… * Form: S + to be + adv( always) + V_ing … The present progressive tense with “always” The progressive tenses are used with always to express a habitual action( usually bad habit as a complaint) Ask ss to do language focus 3 P.120 -> Key : b. Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella c. Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing the bus d. Nam is always watching T.V late f. Na is always talking on the phone g. Liem is always going out Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homeworks ( 1m): - Redo all exercises - Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12. - Prepare for next lesson Unit 13: Getting started and listen and read. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Pay attention copy down some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange .. Teacher –Ss. Pay attention work in pairs ,. Individual. Retell the main points of this lesson. Copy down homeworks. Preparing Teaching (253).

(254) UNIT 13: FESTIVALS Lesson 1 : Getting started and listen and read A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - talk about the rice cooking festival and to understand the rice cooking festival in VN. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : - Passive form - Compound adjective ( N + V-ing) 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organizaton ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Two others to retell the main structure grammar and give some examples - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Ss’ activitives * Warm up : Getting started ( 5 ms): * Chatting Group work of 4/5 Ss 1.Tom likes swimming and sunbathing. Where should he go ? Why ? -Some groups to give their 2. David is interested in ancient cities  ? answers and correct 3.Huckleberry likes mountain-climbing  ? 4. Oliver is keen on pottery  ? 5. Robinson is fond of crowed places  ? Presentation ( 10 ms) Pre-teach Vocabulary - fetch (v) ®i lÊy, mang vÒ - Repeat in chorus. - yell (v) hÐt to cæ vò - urge (v) thóc giôc - rub (v) xo¸ T – Ss - participate (v) tham gia - award (v) tÆng thëng Whole class - teamate (n) đồng đội - competition (n) cuéc tranh tµi Team work - judge (n) Gi¸m kh¶o - go to the board and write their * Checking vocabulary: What and where. words. Practice ( 15 ms) * Listen and read : P.121 Individual work Pre- questions 1.How many competitions in the rice-cooking festival? T – Ss 2. Do all team members go to the river to fetch water? listen to the dialouge then answer the questions. Rice-cooking festival (254).

(255) Water fetching To fetch water. Fire making To make fire. * Matching : The grand prize The starting position The husk a piece of bamboo The council leader. Rice-cooking To cook rice. Groupwork of 4/5 Ss T – Ss. Mét mÈu tre Vá trÊu Gi¶i nhÊt Chủ tịch hội đồng giám kh¶o §iÓm xuÊt ph¸t. Answer key: a. F b. F c. T d, F e. F f. T Production ( 6 ms) * Talk about the rice cooking festival: - Three competions - The way to fetch the water to cook rice - The way to make fire - The rice cooking contest - The way to decide the winner of the contes Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homeworks ( 1m): Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook -Prepare well for the next period : Unit 13: speak and listen. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Pair work guess the meaning of the words of phrases by matching.. work in pairs or in groups to talk about the rice cooking festival.. - Retell the main points. - Listen and homeworks.. Preparing Teaching (255). copy. down.

(256) UNIT 13: FESTIVALS Lesson 2: Speak and listen A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - make up a dialogue and talk about preparations for another festival - listen to the conversation and fill in the gaps B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue of unit 13. - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5ms): * Brainstorming decorate/ clean/ paint the house/ the room- buy cakes, Whole class candies, drink, food, fruits - Cook special meals/ make cakes/ get/ buy new dress Team work - Write/ send postcard to friends, relatives A/ SPEAKING Presentation ( 5 ms) 1. Pre teach vocabulary: - Pomergranate (n) Qu¶ lùu Teacher – Ss - Peach blossoms (n) Hoa đào Listen and repeat in chorus. - Dried waterlemon seeds (n) H¹t da - Marigolds (n) : Cóc v¹n thä copy down - Sticky rice balls : b¸nh tr«i - Spring rolls : B¸nh tÕt , chả giò. * Checking up: Rubout and remember Individual Practice ( 25 ms) * Ordering : (Speak P.123) Pair work AF BG CH DJ EJ work in pairs and give their answers * Make mini dialogue Task 1: Decide who is going to do which S1. We are having a class festival next week. I'm -Make a dialogue. going to buy asome flowers Work in pairs S2: I'm going to decorate the room with…… Some pairs practice each exchange S3:Great, I'm going to…………. before going on to another S4. I'm going to…… exchange . Task 2: A day before the class festival S1: Have you bought flowers S2: Ye, I bought them yesterday. What about Teacher –Ss (256).

(257) decorating the room S3: …………………. B/ LISTENING ( 12ms) 1. Gap fill : (Listen 1) Answer key a. Mr Robinson/ flower market b. traditional c. dried watermelon seeds d. make 2. Complete the notes : Things to do Mr Go to the flower market to buy Peach Robinson blossoms and a bunch of marigolds Mrs Go to Mrs Nga's to learn how to make Robinson spring rolls Go to the market to buy candies and a Liz packet of dried watermelon seeds Consolidation ( 2 ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homeworks ( 1m): - Learn by heart vocabulary - Do the exercises 3, 4 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period Unit 13 : Read. work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list - Listen and Gap fill Pair work open their books and complete the notes. Individual. Retell the main points of this lesson. Copy down homeworks. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching. UNIT 13: FESTIVALS Lesson 3: Read A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : (257).

(258) form the passive in the Present Simple B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson. -T corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): * Chatting 1. When is Christmas held every year ? Whole class (December 24th ) Team work 2. Do you celebrate Christmas ? Pre reading ( 10 ms) * Vocabulary - spread (v) (spread -spread) : Lan réng Teacher – Ss - design (v) ThiÕt kÕ - perform (v) performance (n) BiÓu diÔn, buæi biÓu Individual diÔn - The patron saint (n) Th¸nh b¶o hé - Listen and repeat in chorus. - a Carol (n) bµi h¸t gi¸ng sinh - Jolly (adj) = happy and cheerful (adj) vui tÝnh. * Checking up: Matching. While reading (15 ms) Pair work - Ask Ss to work in pairs to predict the information work in pairs and give their * True/ Fasle statements : answers 1. Christmas is an important festival in every country in the world Make a dialogue. 2. The custom of decorating a tree first appeared in Europe Work in pairs 3. The leaders of the church were unhappy with Christmas carols when they were first ferformed 4. Sending Christmas cards was an American's idea Teacher –Ss - Have Ss to listen the passage. - Ask Ss to read th passage in silence -> Answer key : 1. F (not every but many countries in the world) - Listen and Gap fill 2. T 3. T 4. F (an Englishman's) Pair work * Complete the grid : (Read 2 P.126) (258).

(259) Christmas Place of Date specials origin The Christmas Riga early 1500s tree The Christmas England mid 19th card century Christmas no 800 years carol information ago Santa Claus USA 1823 * Comprehension questions: a, How long ago did the Chrismas tree come to the USA? b, Why dis the Englishman have someone design acard? c, When were Chrismas songs first performed? d, Who wrote the poem A Visit from Saint Nicholas? e, What is Santa Caus based on ? - Have Ss work individually to answer the questions. - Get Ss to compare the answer with partner. ->Key : a. More than a century ago b. He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends c. 800 years ago d. An American professor named Clement Clarke Moore e. On the description of Sain Nicholas in frofessor Moore's poem * Reporting : Eg: On Christmas people often decorate a tree and they send cards to relatives and friends… Consolidation (2 ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homeworks ( 1m): - Learn by heart vocabulary - Let students do the exercises in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ open their books and complete the notes.. Individual Answer the questions compare. Copy down. Report. Retell the main points Copy down homeworks. Preparing Teaching (259).

(260) UNIT 13: FESTIVALS Lesson 4: Write A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - completing a report about the rice – cooking festival. - writing a report about a festival they joined recently B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book. - Teacher corrects and give them marks 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5 ms): * Brainstorming: - fetching- water Whole class - making- fire Team work - cooking- rice - Six people take part in the rice cooking festiaval Teacher – Ss - Fire is made in the traditional way…. Pre writing ( 10 ms) * Gapfill (write 1) Individual 1. rice-cooking 6. traditional 2. one/a 7. bamboo Listen and repeat in chorus. 3. water-fetching 8. six 4. run 9. separate 5. water 10. added *Comprehention questions :(The answers to the Individual questions below can help you) 1. What does this report show? 2. Where was it held ? work in pairs and give their 3. How many competitions were there ? answers . 4. What do each team do in each contest 5. How was the festival ? 1. Name of the festival -Work in pairs 2. Where was it held ? 3. How long did it last ? 4. Activities, competitions ? Teacher –Ss 5. How were the ativities organized ? 6. How many people took part in each activity ? 7. What did you think about the festival ? (260).

(261) While writing ( 15 ms) * Write : Write the similar report on a festival you joined recently. - Write the report on a festival This report shows how the school festival was held Ss to open their books and The festival was held in the schoolyard. There were two complete the notes. competitions: volleyball and jug of war In the volleyball game, the were six students in each team and each class had a volleybal team. The played against each other and the 8C team had most points got the grand prize. Individual There were ten students who took part in the jug of war Each class had a team and the 9B team won all the others got the first prize. The school festival was wonderful. it made all the compare with their friends. students love their school and study better. Post writing ( 6ms) * Correction - Ask Ss to correct the mistakes of some writing Ss have Correct the mistakes done. Consolidation ( 2ms): - Retell the main points of this lesson. Retell the main points of this Homeworks ( 1m): lesson. - Learn by heart vocabulary - Let students do the exercises in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period Unit 13: Language Copy down homeworks focus. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching (261).

(262) UNIT 13: FESTIVALS Lesson 5: Language focus A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - Practice in using Passive form : be + past participle and Reported speech , and revising compound words and reported statements. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids: textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up ( 5ms): Net work : Preparations for Tet Whole class Passive form: Be + Past participle - Elicit Ss to give structure Teacher – Ss - Have ss to match the tense with the form of passive form. Match - Call 2 Ss to go to the board and match. - Ask Ss to comment Work individually - Correct mistakes and give answer key Matching: Tenses Form 1. Present simple a. Was/were + V.pp Copy down 2. Past simple b. Have/has been + V.pp 3. Future simple c. Is/are/am + V.pp 4. Present perfect d. will/shall be + V.pp Answer key: 1 c. 2a 3d 4b - Get Ss to do the exercise - Look at the books and do * Language focus 1 ( 7 ms): exercises - Ask Ss to do exercise 1 on page 128. - Call Ss to write answer on the board - Work in pairs - Have Ss to comment - Give answer key - Some Ss to go to the board to a. were performed b. was decorated/ put do exercises. c. is made d. will be held e. was awarded f. was written * Language focus 2 ( 6 ms): - Individual (262).

(263) - To jumble : lén xén, lµm lÉn lén - Ask Ss to do exercise 2 on page 128 - 129. - Call Ss to write answer on the board - Have Ss to comment - Give answer key 1. jumbled 2. broken 3. broken 4. scattered 5. pulled * Compound nouns (8 ms): - Elicit and explain the phrase word A rice cooking festival (article) (noun) (V-ing) (noun) - To form compound adjective: noun + V-ing * Language focus 3: - Ask Ss to do exercise 3 on page 130. - Call Ss to write answer on the board - Have Ss to comment - Give answer key Answer key: a. A fire-making contest b. A bull-fighting festival c. A car-making industry d. A flower-arranging contest e. A rice-exporting country f. A. clothes-washing machine * Reported speech (10 ms): * Model sentences : He said "I'm a plumber" -> direct speech  He said he was a plumber -> reported speech Changes: 1. Tenses: Direct speech Indirect-reported speech present simple past simple will / must / can would / had to / could 2.Pronouns: Depend on the Subject of the main clause 3. Advs of time: This  that / now  then / here  there today  that day / tomorrow  the next day Yesterday  the day before / ago  before * Language focus 4 : Transformation drill - Ask Ss to do exercise 4 on page 130. - Call Ss to write answer on the board - Give answer key b. He said he could fix the faucets c. He said the pipes were broken d. He said new pipes were expensive e. He said Mrs Thu had to pay him then Consolidation ( 2ms): (263). Individual work in pairs and give their answers . some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange . Teacher –Ss Pair work do exercises.. Individual Pay attention Copy down. Do exercise 4. Retell the main points.

(264) - Retell the main points of this lesson. Homeworks ( 1m): Copy down homeworks - Redo all exercises - Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12. - Prepare for next lesson. Period : Preparing date: ...................................... Week : Teaching date: ....................................... REVISION A/ The aims: I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using Passive form : be + past participle and Reported speech , and revising compound words and reported statements. Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 13 - Develop Ss’ four skills. II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters . B/ Steps of the lesson: I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up: -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. III. New lesson:. Teacher’s activities * GRAMMAR: * Passive form: Be + Past participle Matching: Tenses Form 1. Present simple a. Was/were + V.pp 2. Past simple b. Have/has been + V.pp 3. Future simple c. Is/are/am + V.pp 4. Present perfect d. will/shall be + V.pp * Compound nouns : A rice cooking festival (article)(noun) (V-ing) (noun) - To form compound adjective: noun + V-ing * Reported speech : Model sentences : He said "I'm a plumber" ->direct speech He said he was a plumber -> reported speech Changes: 1. Tenses: Direct speech Indirect-reported speech present simple past simple will / must / can would / had to / could 2.Pronouns: (264). Students,activities. Individual. Teacher – Ss Work with a partner Pair work - Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures to put them in the correct order according to theinstructions - Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form.

(265) Depend on the Subject of the main clause 3. Advs of time: This  that / now  then / here  there today  that day / tomorrow  the next day Yesterday  the day before / ago  before Have Ss copy Read the following passage and choose the item (a, b, c, or d) that best answers each of the questions about it. Hi! I’m Dean. I’m from England. My favorite time of the year is Christmas, which is on 25 December. That’s when Christians celebrate the birth of Christ. In the middle of December we send a lot of cards to our friends and family, here and abroad. Then we get a big tree and decorate it with lights and other things. On Christma Day, we give each other presents. We have one enormous meal with turkey, and after that, we have Christmas pudding. 1. When is Christmas held? a. On 25 December / b. In the middle of December c. In the middle of the year / d. no information 2.Christmas is held because Christians want to__. a. have a good time/ b. celebrate the birth of Christ c. visit their friends and family / d. decorate big trees 3. What does the word ‘decorate’ in line 5 mean? a. make something look nicer/ b. paint something c. make something look worse / d. buy something 4. On Christmas Day, people_____ . a. give each other presents / b. have an enormous meal with turkey / c. have Christmas pudding d. all are correct 5. Which of the following is not true? a. Dean is English. b. At Christmas, people get big trees and decorate it. c. Dean prefers Halloween to Christmas. d. In the middle of December, people send a lot of Christmas cards to their friends and family. *Work with a partner - Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary - Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box - Get some Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct. - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud . * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson. * Homework : (265). Pair work. Teacher – Ss Individual Whole class. Pair work. Teacher – Ss Whole class Ss to read the letter and match the words Individual Ss to give their answers Read the letter aloud Ss to read the complete letter aloud Listen and copy ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box work in pairs.. - Retell the main points of this lesson..

(266) 1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam ,s - Copy down homeworks. grandparents are delighted that he passed his English exam ……” 2. Do the exercises in the workbook .. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - seek information about a language game to complete a summary B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3. - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Ss’ activitives Warm up ( 5 ms) * Getting started : Matching Group work of 4/5 Ss a. The Pyramid -Some groups to give their b. Sydney Opera House answers and correct c. Stonehenge Presentation ( 10 ms) * Vocabulary - Repeat in chorus. - Clue (n) : Manh mèi - Rule (n) : luËt ch¬i * Presentation dialogue : T – Ss (Listen and read – P.131-132) - Asks sts to open their books and read the dialogue on listen to the dialoge then page 131, 132 while listening to the tape answer the questions - Plays the tape. - Checks if sts' guesses are right or not Groupwork of 4/5 Ss (266).

(267) - Have sts to copy statements in the right order * Gapfill : (Listen and read 2 P.132) - Ask Ss to write a story using the information from the dialogue . 1. game 2. place 3. clue 4. Vietnam 5. American 6. Gold 7. right 8. was * Set the scene: " Nga , Nhi and Hoa are playing a language game called guessing game. How does this game work? Rearrange the statements in the right order of the game" - Puts the statements chart on the board. - Asks sts to read the statements and put them in the right order. - Calls on some pairs to go to the board and write their answers - wonder (n): kú quan - gold gate bridge: cÇu cæng vµng - clue (n): gîi ý Practice ( 15 ms) Sts to open their books and read the dialogue on page 131, 132 while listening to the tape * Ordering sentences : How to play the guessing game? 1. B asks questions to find out what it is 2. A thinks of a famous person or place 3. B wins if he/she can guess the correct answer 4. A gives B a clue 5. B loses if he/she can't guess the correct answer 6. A only can answer "yes" or "no" ->Key: 2 - 4 - 1 - 6 - 3- 5 *Grammar : Model sentences: I don't know how to play it * Form: S + V + question word + to infinitive... * Use: Reduced form of an indirect question Ex: I don't know how can I play it how to play it Please tell me where I can go during the visit where to go A B Eg: I don't know how I can play it to play it Answer key: b. Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets c. Nga pointed out where to buy sourvenirs d.Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to H.An e. Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit * Guessing game : (267). T – Ss Pair work. - Asking sts to read the summary again Order the sentences - Asks some sts to give their answers. - Pay attention. - Answer - Copy down.

(268) Teacher: It is a wonder and it is in Asia - Play game St:(guess) Teacher : yes/ no * Consolidation: - Retell the main points ò thí leson. - Retell the main points. * Homeworks: - Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period Unit 14 : Speak and Do exercises at home listen. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 2: Speak and listen A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - get more information about some wonders of the world by practicing with his or her friends. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Ask Ss to go to the board to say how to play game “ 20 questions” - Call some pairs to play game “20 questions” - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms) - T asks Ss play “Net works” about famous places all over the world - take part in the game Famous places. - write on the board (268).

(269) A/ SPEAKING ( 16 ms) Pre – speaking ( 3 ms): - T introduces the lesson - T guides Ss to do exerciser 1 1. Think of 10 famous places. ……... - T asks Ss to make question about ten places as example - T asks Ss to work in group to ask and answer While – speaking( 11 ms): - T calls some Ss to give the answer - T comments and give the suggestions 1. Is Phong Nha cave in the Southern Viet Nam ?-. No 2. Is PETRONAS Twin Towers the tallest building in the world ?- Yes 3. Is the Great Barrrier Reef a World Heritade Site ?- No 4. Is the Great Wall in the China in the southern of the country ?- No 5. Is the Empire State Building USA in California ? No 6. Is Hue Citadel in an ancient town ? No. 7. Is Ha Long Bay one of the world Wonders ? Yes. 8. Is Eiffel Tower in German ? No. 9. Is Big Ben in England ? Yes 2. Talk about your classmates’ answers with your partner. - T introduces new structure: Indirect question with If/ whether Ex: T: Is Ha Long Bay in the Northern Viet Nam? -> Yes, it is. S: Is Big Ben in Paris? -> No. ( Hoa answers ) T: I asked Hoa if Ha Long Bay was in the Northern of Viet Nam. And she said . . . . . Structuers  Form : S + asked + O + If / whether + S + V .  Usage : to report the yes/ no question. Present simple -> past simple. - T asks Ss to report 10 questions which they have just set - T calls some Ss to check - T comments 1. I asked Nam if Phong Nha cave was in Southern VN and he said that it wasn’t. 2. I asked Hoa if PETRONAS Twin Towers was the tallest building in the world and she said it was. 3. I asked Tuan if the Great Barrrier Reefis a World Heritade Site and he said that it wasn’t. . . . . . Post – speaking ( 2ms): - T asks Ss to copy all the sentences which they practiced with their partner B/ LISTENING ( 15 ms) Pre – listening ( 4 ms): (269). - listen and notice. - make questions. - work in group. - give the answer. Pay attention. Copy down. - listen and notice. copy down. Listen and repeat - copy down.

(270) - T introduces the lesson and some voc + jungle + crystal- clear water + coral sea + snorkel - T asks Ss to read the advertisement to get the main ideas While – listening ( 9 ms): - T asks Ss to listen to the tape to correct the mistakes - T plays the tape once - T plays the tape (three times) - T asks Ss to compare the answers - T calls some Ss to read the mistakes and give the correction - T plays the tape again and gives the correction. Answer keys: 1. the Coconut Palm Hotel 2. the rainforest. 3. (077) 6924 3927. Post – listening( 2ms): - T reminds Ss the content of lesson - T asks Ss: How many people are there in the dialogue? What are they talking about? Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m): - Learn by heart the new words; - Reread the dialogue; - Prepair the next lesson Unit 14 : Read Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ listen to the tape - listen and repeat, then copy down - read for information - listen for information - listen and do the exercise - pair work - give the answer Answer the questions Retell the main points Do exercises at home. Preparing Teaching. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 3: Read A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - get some knowledge about the wonders of the world . - Read for details about the wonders of the world . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): Call some Ss to change some direct speech into indirect speech. - Give feedback and give marks (270).

(271) 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Warm up ( 5ms) : Hangman. Students’ activities 1 2 Play game 3. 5 6 4 7 8 - Have Ss guess the letters one by one - For each wrong guess , draw a line from 1 to 8 . Ss lose the game if they guess wrong 8 times . Words:Coral, Crystal – clear, Snorkel, Relaxing C- O- RA-L Pre- reading ( 10 ms) : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words . 1. Pre –teach vocabulary : - to compile ( translation ) - to claim = to say something is true - to honor = to show respect - a god (male ) -> goddess ( female ) - religion (n) -> religious (adj ) - royal (adj ) ( situation ) * Checking vocabulary : Slap the board 2. True - False predictions : - Put the chart on the board Statements Guess Read 1. An Egyptian man compiled a list of F what he thought were the seven wonders of the world . 2. The only surviving wonder is the T Pyramid of Cheeps in Egypt . 3. Today , we can still see the Hanging F Gardens of Babylon in present – day Irag . 4. Angkor Wat was originally built to T honor a Hindu God . 5. The Great wall of china first was not in T the list of the seven wonders of the world . 6. In the early 15th century , the Khoner F King chose Angkor Wat as the new capital . - Ask Ss to work in groups to decide if the statements are T or F . - Collect and write their predictions on the board . While – reading ( 15 ms): (271). Whole class. Teacher – Ss. Listen and repeat in chorus Copy down. Whole class Predict. Groupwork.

(272) - Turn on the tape 2 times and ask Ss to read the text / 134 to check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to correct the false statements . 1. False : A Greek man named Antipater did it . 3. False : The only surviving wonder is the pyramid of Cheops in Egypt . 6. False : In the early 15 th century , the Kh, mer King chose Phnom Penh as the new capital . * Multiple Choice : Complete the sentences - Ask Ss to choose the best answers to complete the sentences . - Put the answers chart on the board . - Read the statements aloud and make hand gestures to show the missing words . - Have Ss choose A , B , C or D . - Correct and get Ss write the right answers in their notebooks . a) C - the Pyramid of Cheops b) A - Hindus c) D - was part of a royal Khmer city a long time ago . d) B - chose Phnom Penh as the new capital . Post- reading ( 6ms): * Grid - Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it . - Ask Ss to read the text again and fill in the grid with the information taken from the text . Wonders of the world Country 1.Hanging gardens of Babylon Irag 2 ……… 3 ……… 4 ……… 5 ………. - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Correct the mistakes , and write the correct answers in their notebooks . Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m): 1. Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 14 : Write Period : Preparing date: ...................................... Week : Teaching date: ....................................... UNIT 14 : WONDER OF THE WORLD Lesson 4: Write (272). Complete the sentences. Correct and write Individual. Copy down Individual Whole class. Pair work Whole class Retell the main points Do exercises at home.

(273) A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - write a letter to a friend about a place they have visited . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Call some Ss to change some direct speech into indirect speech. - Give feedback and give marks 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): * Guessing games : " Wonders of the world " - Have Ss think of one of the wonders of the world and write Play game it on a piece of paper . - Call on a student to the front of the class with his / her paper . Whole class - Get the rest of the class ask him / her yes-no questions to guess the wonder . - The student having the right guess will take the place of the last student . Pre- writing ( 10 ms): Introduce the topic of writing and some new words to students . Listen and repeat 1. Pre – teach vocabulary : chorus - a ranger = a person who takes care of a park copy down - Edge = mep , ria - a canyon ( translation ) - Breathtaking (adj ) = very exciting , impressive - Temperate (adj) ( translation ) - Stone Age : thoi ki do da => Have Ss copy Play game * Checking vocabulary : What and where 2. Insertion : Complete the letter Read the letter - Ask Ss to read the letter Tim sent to Hoa about his trip to the grand Canyon / 135 Cpmplete the letter - Tell Ss to complete the letter by inserting the letters of the missing sentences ( A , B , C and D ) - Call on some Ss to read their completed letters in front of class. - Give feedback and correct 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A Pay attention While – writing ( 15 ms) : (273). in.

(274) - Set the scene “ Imagine you have visited a place recently . write a letter to a friend of yours and tell him / her about this place . “ - Hang the board with the outline . - Ask Ss to write the letter in their notebooks - Monitor and help Ss if necessary . - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Collect some Ss, writings to correct common mistakes . - Give feedback and correct . Dear Mai , I am writing this letter to you that you have just returned from a trip to Ha long Bay with my family . The sight was extremely magnificient It took us five or six hours by car to get there from Hanoi . We spent more than a week there . The weather was perfect . It was sunny , cool and windy . Wee enjoyed walking along the seaside at night very much . It was really interesting when we knew about the legenda of Ha Long bay . We really want to come back there when we have time next year . How are you getting with your study at home ? Where are you going for your holiday ? Let me know . Your friend , Lan - Have some Ss read the complete letter aloud . Post - writing ( 6ms): * Interview - Ask Ss to use the outline on the board and the information in their letters to make an interview . + Call on a student to stand up to answer the questions : 1. Where have you just visited ? 2. How far is it ? 3. How did you get there ? 4. What is it like ? / Is it beautiful ? 5. How about the weather ? 6. How did you feel ? - Have Ss play in turn the role of an interviewer and interviewee . - Monitor and correct . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate their interview. Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m): 1. Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one . 2. Rewrite the letter in their notebooks . 3. Do the exercises in their workbooks . 4. Prepare the next lesson Unit 14 : Language focus (274). Write the letter Read the letter. copy down. Whole class make an interview. Answer the questions. Role play demonstrate interview. Do exercises at home. their.

(275) Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching. UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 5: Language focus A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to : - report what people ask and answer about one of the world cultural Heritage of Vietnam B/ Language contents: 1. Vocbulary : 2 Grammar: - Passive forms - Indirect questions with if and where - Question words before to infinitives 3. Language skills: Reading, speaking, writing, listening C/ Techniques: Bingo, matching D/ Teaching aids: charts, posters E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): gives a sentence and has Ss change into the passive voice: - We visited Mrs. Quyen yesterday. - Mrs. Quyen was visited yesterday - Give feedback and give marks 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms) -T has Ss remind the passive form in the past simple. Remind - Ss give the form: S + V-ed/ v3 + O S + was/ were + P.P (+ by O)  Language focus 1: Complete the sentences. Use the passive form of the verbs in the Paiwork box -T. has Ss look at the exercise and choose the right verbs in the box for the gaps in sentences -Ask Ss to complete the sentences with the right passive form of Complete the sentences the verbs -Call on some Ss to give their answers -Give feedback and correct (275).

(276) Answer key: a/ was completed b/ was constructed c/ was designed d/ was presented e/ was reached  Language focus 2: Yesterday, Nga and Nhi talked about My Son, one of the World Cultural Heritages of Viet Nam. Report the questions Nhi asked Nga. Example: a/ Do you know My Son, Nga?  Nhi asked Nga if/ whether she knew My Son *Answer key: b/ Nhi asked Nga if/ whether My Son was in Quang Nm province c/ Nhi asked Nga if it was far from HaNoi d/ Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at My Son e/ Nhi asked Nga if many tourist visited My Son every year f/ Nhi asked Nga if Nga wanted to visit My Son one day  Language focus 3: Nga answered Nhi’s questions. She then gave Nhi some additional information. Use the words to write the information that Nga gave to Nhi -Set the scene “Yesterday, Nga and Nhi talked about My Son, one of the world cultural Heritage of Vietnam. Beside answering some of Nhi’s questions, Nga gave her some additional information about My Son” -T asks Ss to report what Nhi asked Nga, using reported speech -T calls on some Ss to resay the use of the Indirect yes/ no questions on the board -Model the first question and ask Ss to listen -T calls on one student to read the question, another student read the reported sentence -T gives feedback and corrects if necessary -T goes on asking Ss to do the rest questions orally with the same steps -T calls on some Ss to go to the board and write the reported sentences -T corrects and asks Ss to write the right answers in their notebooks a/ tell/ how/ go there Nga told Nhi how to go there  S + V+ question word + to-inf *Answer key: a/ Nga told Nhi how to go there b/ Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets c/ Nga pointed out where to buy souvenirs d/ Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to Hoi An (276). Copy down pay attention. Doexercise n pairs. pay attention. Report the sentences. write the sentences on the board. Copy down. Complete the sentences.

(277) e/ Nga told what to do there during the visit  Language focus 4: Complete the passage. Use either to-infinitive or the bare Copy down infinitive form of the verbs in brackets. 1. I want to go out at weekend To-infinitive 2. She enjoys swimming very much V-ing 3. He can speak many language Modal verbs bare inf *Concept check 1. Forms: S + V + To-inf Use: Most of the verbs in English are followed by a to-inf 2. Form: S + V + V-ing 3. Form: S + Modal verbs + bare inf Use: Modals: can, could, will, would, shall, should, may, might, must -T shows the word-cue chart on the board -T models the first sentence and asks Ss to listen -T checks if Ss recognize the model sentence -T asks one the student to say the next sentence -T gives feedback and corrects -T has Ss do the rest of the exercise orally with the same steps -T asks some Ss to go to the board and write complete sentences -T gives feedback, corrects and has Ss copy -T delivers posters to Ss -T writes the question words on the board and asks Ss to write complete sentences of their own. -T tells Ss to write their sentences on posters and put them on board after finishing them -T awards Ss good marks if their sentences are right * Answer key: (1) to jog, (2) go, (3) to gather, (4) to rain, (5) to reach, (6) to continue, (7) get. -T elicits the target language from Ss -T gets Ss to copy -T asks Ss to open their books and complete the passage on 137 with the right form of the verbs -T calls on some Ss to give their answers -T corrects and has a student read the whole paragraph aloud Consolidation ( 2ms): T has Ss ask their friends some Yes/ No questions and then reported them. Ex. Does your father work on the farm, Ngoc? I asked Ngoc if her father worked on the farm. Homework ( 1m) -Turn the passive sentences in language focus 1 into the active (277). Listen. Write the complete the sentences. Copy down. read paragraph aloud. Do exercise at home.

(278) voice -Do exercises in workbook. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching Revision. A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they have learnt in the lessons B / Teaching aids : Chart , posters., … C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Revision : 1 / The Passive Form Column A Tenses 1. Present Simple 2. Past Simple 3. Future Simple 4. Present Perfect. Column B Form a. Was / were + PP b. Have / has been + PP c. is / am / are +PP d. Will / shall be + PP (278). Individual.

(279) - Call Ss to give their answers and give Pairwork feedback . - Have them copy 2 / Compound words: ( article + noun + verb- ing + noun )  To form a compound adjective  Noun + Verb-ing a) A fire – making contest b) A bull – fighting festival c) A car – making country d) A flower – arranging contest e) A rice – exporting country f) A clothes – washing machine 3 / Reported speech a. Tenses Quoted speech Reported speech - Present simple -> Past simple - Will -> Would - Must -> Had to b. Pronouns : ( depending on the subject of the main clause ) c. Adverb of place and time This -> That / Now -> then Here - > there / Today -> that day Tomorrow - > the next day / Yesterday ->the day before / Ago -> before 4 / The passive forms: - Ask Ss to resay the form of the passive in the past simple tense Was / were + PII - Have Ss look at the exercise and choose the right verbs in the box for the gaps in the sentences *. Practice : - Get Ss to complete the senetnces with the right passive form of the verbs . - Call on some Ss to give their anwers . - Give feedback and correct . 5 / Question words before to - infinitives *. Tell / how / go there . -> Nga told Nhi how to go there . - Check if Ss recognize the model sentences => S + V + Question worh + to – infinitive . - Have Ss say the next sentence . - Give feedback and correct . - Get them to do the rest of the exercise orally with the same steps . 6 / Verb + to - infinitive (279). Individual. Teacher. Individual. Pairwork. Individual Whole class. Teacher. Individual Whole class.

(280) a. I want to go out at weekends. to – infinitive b. She enjoys swimming very much . Verb-ing c. He can speak many language . modal bare infinitive verb  Notes : a. Most of the verbs in English are followed by a to -infinitive . b. Some verbs are used as enjoyed : start , begin , .... c. Modals : can , could , will , might , must . => Get Ss to copy . * Homework : 1. Learn by heart all the structures in the lessons and give some examples with them . 2. Redo the exercises in their notebooks . 3. Do the exercise in the workbook . 4. Ready the test.. Individual. Individual. Individual Remember complete. and. Prep aring: 7/4/2010 Testing: 8/4/2010 Period 89. Written test (n 2). A / Aims and Objectives : Ss can summarize knowledge they have learnt form unit 12 to unit 14 to do the test well . B / Teaching aids : test paper , chalk C / Test : I / Put the verbs into the correct form , past progressive or simple past (2,0 ps ) 1. I was in the countryside with my grandfather some days ago . One night I ( walk ) .................along a country road when suddenly I ( hear ) ......... footsteps behind me . Somebody ( follow ) .................. me . Then I ( start ) .............. to run . 2. Mrs . Smith ( invite ) ............... Mrs Quen to have dinner while Mrs Quyen ( visit ) ................. the USA . 3. During the study period in class yesterday , it ( be ) .................... hard for us to concentrate because the students next door ( make ) .................... so much noise . II / Multiple choice : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. Thu is very keen ............... sports . ( in , at , on ) 2. Ba is very interested .............. Math . ( in , at , on ) 3. They are tired ................. doing the same thing everyday . ( in , of , at ) 4. Vietnam is a ................... country . (280).

(281) ( rice-exporting , rice - exported , exporting- rice ) 5. Have you ever been to a ...................... festival ? ( bull-fight , bull-fighting ,fighting-bull ) 6. She asked me ............. I could help her with the homework . ( what , whether , why ) 7. My parents decided ............... a tour round the country . ( make , making , to make ) 8. The policeman wanted to know ........... happened to those cars . ( what , how , why ) III/ Match the questions with the correct responses : ( 2,0 Ps ) Questions Responses Key 1. Where did you go on holiday ? a. No , we were not with a group 2. What is it famous for ? b. Yes , it was . 3. How long were you there ? c. Three days ago . 4. Was it a package holiday ? d. We went to Italy 5. Did you enjoy it ? e. We visited museums and art 6. Was the weather good ? gallerires . 7. What did you do there ? f. two weeks 8. When did you get back ? g. It was wonderful . h. It is an art city . It is famous for its Pisa Tower IV / Change the following sentences into passive voice : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. People use milk for making butter and cheese . => ........................................................................... 2. My brother lent me this book . => .......................................................................... 3. You must write the answers on one side of the paper only . => ..................................................................................... 4. They will send you a bill at the end of the month . => ........................................................................................ V / Put the following sentences into reported speech : ( 2,0 Ps ) 1. Sally said : “ I am going to the bookshop .“ => ................................................................ 2. Ann said to me : “ My parents have just bought a new house . “ => ............................................................................................... 3. “ The film that I saw really was interesting , “ said Lan . => ................................................................................................. 4. “ I do not know who she is . I have never seen her , “ said Bob . => ................................................................................................... Answer Key : I / 2,0 ps : each correct vern is 0,25 ps 1. Walked – heard – was following – started 2. Invited – was visiting 3. was - made (281).

(282) II / 2,0 ps : each right sentence is 0,25 ps 1. on 2. in 3. of 4. rice – exporting 5. fighting – bull 6. whether 7. to make 8. what III / 2,o ps : each correct match is 0,25 ps 1. d 2. h 3. f 4. a 5. g 6. b 7. e 8. c IV/ 2,0ps : each correct sentnces is 0,5 ps 1. Milk is used for making butter and cheese . 2. I was lent this book by my brother . 3. The answers must be written on one side of the paper only . 4. You will be sent a bill at the end of the month . V / 2,0 ps : each correct sentence is 0,5 ps 1. Sally said she was going to the bookshop . 2. Ann said to me taht her parents had just bought a new house . 3. Lan said that the film that she had seen really had been interesting . 4. Bob said that he did not know who she was . Preparing: 23/4/2009 Teaching: 24/4/2009. Ch÷a bµi kiÓm tra. Period 95. I. Objective: By the end of the lesson. SS will be able to undersand exam and can using all grammar easy. II. Procedure: T SS 1. Warm-up: T call some ss on the board repeat old - repeat lesson and write do exercise 2. Pre – exam: T call some ss on the board made - Listen exercise 1.2.4 T call some is nhËn xÐt and so s¸nh bµi lµm. 3. While – exam: T gi¶i thÝch c¸ch lµm vµ hưíng dÉn Listen (282).

(283) c¸c em lÇn sau lµm bµi cho tèt. T give right answer 4. Homework: T ark ss at home learn and do exercise. - Write - listen. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching. UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : (283).

(284) - get Ss to differentiate facts from opinions through reading , and express their opinions about a problem . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms): Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): * Getting started ( Brainstorming ) - Write the topic on the board . Individual - Computer can help us : + Save time ..... - Ask Ss to think of the topic and express their opinions . Express the opinions , - Collect Ss opinions and write them on the board . => Lead in the new lesson . Pre-reading ( 10 ms): Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . 1. Preteach vocabulary : Teacher – Ss - a printer ( picture ) - a manual = a book coming with a machine teklls you how to Listen and repeat chorus use / operate the machine . - to connect ( hand guesture ) - under guarantee : The machine you buy at a shop will be Copy down under guarantee from 6 to 12 months . - a plug (realia) - Socket (realia)  Have Ss copy .  Checking vocabulary : Bingo Play game 2. True or false prediction - Set the scene “ Nam and his father , Mr Nhat are talking about the problem of the computer , they have bought . What Pay attention happens to the computer? “ - Put the chart on the board and have Ss guess which Guess statements are true and which are false . Statements Guess Answer Whole class. (284).

(285) 1. The printer is not working T 2. Nam has laready turned the computer T on 3. Nam knows how to connect a printer F but he has not connected it properly . 4. The manual helped them to find out the F problem . 5. Mr . Nhat bought the computer in T HCM City and it is still under guarantee . 6. Mr . Nhat thinks the company would F not do anything with his computer because it is too far from his place . - Call on some pairs to give their answers and write their guesses on the board . While - reading ( 15 ms): 1. Check Ss, predictions : - Ask Ss to open their books , read the dialogue / 138 and listen to the tape . - Have ss work in pairs again to check if their guesses are right or wrong . - Feedback and correct the false ones : 3. F -> Nam know how to connect s printer and he has connected it properly . 4. F -> Mr . Nhat thinks it is not very helpful . 6. F -> Mr . Nhat thinks the company should do something with it . - Have Ss copy the correct sentences . 2. Reading comprehension : - Explain the words : “ Fact and Opinion “ + Fact : a thing that is known to be true , especially when it can be proved . + Opinion : Your feelings or thoughts about someone or something , raher than a fact . - Have ss read the statements and check the suitable boxes . - Call on some Ss to give their answers . * Answer key : a) Fact b) Opinion c) Opinion d) Fact e) Fact f) Opinion - Get Ss to copy . Post-reading ( 6 ms) : - Ask Ss to use reported speech to rewrite the dialogue . - Divide the class into 3 groups and assign each group to report about 3-4 sentences . - Have them write their report on a poster and put it on the board for public check . Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Home work ( 1 m): 1. Learn by hear new words and write two line for each word . (285). Pairwork. Answer and write answer on the board Read the dialouge Pair work Chech the gueees. Copy down Pay attention. Read the statements Copy down. Rewrite the dilouge. Retell the main points Do exercise at home.

(286) 2. Do the ex in the workbook and prepare the next lesson Unit 15 : Speak and listen. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching. UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 2: Speak and listen A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - use some common useful expressions to express agreement and disagrement - listen for details B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5 ms) : * Guessing game : “ Do you think that ...? “ - Ask Ss each to think one of the ways comptuers are helpful and Play game write it on a pice of paper . - Call on a stude4nt to the front of the class . - Get the rest of the class ask him/ her “ Do you think that computer are ... ? Individual - The student can only answer with yes or no . - Tell Ss the one to have the right guess will get one good mark and go on answering the classmates / questions . A/ SPEAKING ( 16 ms) Pre-speaking ( 4ms) Introduce the topic of the speaking and structures to students . 1. Brainstorm : - Write the topic on the board : Useful expressions to express Teacher – Ss agreements and disagreements - Put the table on the board and elicit students , answers then write express agreements them on the table and disagreements on the board Opinion Agreement Degree of Disagreement (286).

(287) Agreement I like ... So do I I agree , , I don t like . I agree but .... I think ... You are right Yes , but on I feel ... Neither do I the other I do not hand ... believe ...... I disagree I can not agree with you ... No , I think .... - Explain the phrase “ on the other hand “ to Ss . - Get Ss to copy the table . 2. Matching : - Put the pictures / 139 on the right of the board and the word cues on the left ( not in order ) - Have Ss match the words with the pictures . 1. Reading comic books d. 2. Playing in the rain a 3. Driving a car b 4. Foreign food c - Call on some Ss to go to the board to draw the matching lines => Answer key : 1. b 2. c 3. a 4. d While - speaking ( 8 ms): - Erase the words but leave the pictures * Oral Drill - Get a student to demonstrate the model (a) T : I think driving a car is easy Ss : I disagree . I think it is difficult to drive a car or So do I - Ask Ss to use the adjectives in the box on page 140 to express their opinions after going through the meaning of some new words . 1. entertaining 2. time - consuming 3. challenging * Suggestions : a . Driving a car - easy once we get used to it . Learning to drive a car - Challenging difficult to get used to driving in traffic . - Dangerous b. Comic - boring Reading comic books . - interesting / fun - time – consuming c. Foreign food - delicious Humbergers , pizza , - fun to eat French fries - unhealthy d. Playing in the rain - fun - interesting - entertaining - Have Ss use the pictures on the board to practice speaking with their partners . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class . (287). Copy down. Match the words. Copy down. demonstrate the model Whole class Individual. Pay attention. Practice speaking Demonstrate in fron of the class.

(288) - Give feedback and correct . Post-speaking ( 4ms) : Mapped dialogue - Present the dialogue and have Ss repeat , sentence by sentence - Call on one student to demonstrate the dialogue . + Open pair + Closed pairs : Ss make similar dialogues refering the cues / 140 to replace the information . B/ LISTENING ( 15 ms) Pre-listening ( 4ms) : Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words to students . 1. Pre-teach vocabulary : - Procedure (n) ( Translation ) - Pulp (nu) -> What is used to make paper ? - Vat (n) ( picture / drawing ) - to drain = to make something empty or dry by removing all the liquid from it ) - Roller (n) ( picture ) - Roll (n) ( realia ) => Have Ss copy . While -listening ( 7ms): * Gap fill ( Listen 1 ) - Inform the topic : Paper – making process . - Have Ss read the sentences . - Play the tape 2 or 3 times and ask ss to fill in the gaps with the words they catch . - Ask ss to compare their answers with their partners . - Call on Ss to give their answers . Answer Key : 1. simple 2. same 3. two hundred 4 left 5. rollers - Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences in front of class . Post - reading ( 4ms): Ordering Prediction ( Listen 2 ) - Ask ss to read the sentences (a-> g ) carefully and guess the order . - Ask Ss to work in groups to predictions - Collect their predictions and write their predictions on the board . - Play the tape again and ask Ss to listen. - Call on Ss to give their correction . - Give feedback and correct : Answer key : c. Paper pulp was placed in the vat . d. Paper pulp was mixed with water . a. The water was drained . e. The pulp fibers were poured out . g. The pulp was conveyed under the rollers . f. The fibers were smoothed and pressed dry . (288). demonstrate dialogue. the. Teacher – Ss .. Pay attention. read the sentences Fill the gap Compare the answer Copy down. read the sentences Group work Listen. Copy down.

(289) b. The paper was put on a roll . => Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences aloud . - Get them to copy their notebooks . Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson Homework ( 1m): 1. Write complete dialogues in your notebooks . 2. Do the exercises in the owrkbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 15 :Read. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Retell the main points Do exercises at home. Preparing Teaching. UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 3: Read A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - know computers work in a university B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up ( 5ms): * Jumbled words => Words relating to a computer - Put the cardboards on the board . Team work 1. terpirn -> printer 2. seumo -> mouse 3. recsnc -> screen 4. nimorot -> monitor (289).

(290) 5. bdoaryke -> key board 6. moseu dap -> mouse pad - Divide the class into 2 teams and ask each team to go to the boars to write their answers as fast as possible . Pre- reading ( 10 ms): Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . 1, Pre-teach : - a Freshman = the first – year student at a college / university - a jack ( translation ) - a bulletin board = notice board - skeptical (adj ) ( translation ) - impact (nu ) ( translation ) + Get Ss to copy the vocabulary * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember 2. Open prediction : Introduce the topic of the text . - Ask Ss to guess what they are going to read . * Suggestions : a) Where in the library do we get / find information ? b) How can we store the information ? c) If we want to discuss something , how can we do ? - Call on some Ss to give their predictions and write them on the board . While – reading ( 15 ms) : 1. Check the predictions : - Ask Ss to read the text to check if their guesses are correct or not . - Give feedback and correct 2. True / False Statements - Get Ss to read the text again then read the true / false statements and decide if the statements are true or false . - Call on some ss to give their answers and correct the false statements . - Have Ss copy all the right statements in their notebooks . Answer Key : a) T b) T c) T d) F -> Students do not have to go to computer rooms because college campuses now have computer jacks in every part of the university . e) T f) T Post-reading ( 6 ms): * Comprehension questions - Have Ss read the questions / 147 and find out the information in the text to answer . (290). Teacher Teacher – Ss. Whole class Whole class Group of 5 Ss Teacher – Ss Individual. Whole class. Pair work. Individual Pair work.

(291) - Ask Ss to compare their answers with their partners . Teacher - Call on some Ss to give their answers for the class . - Give feedback and correct . * Answer key : a) It has no library . All the information normally found in a library is now stored in the university, s computers . b) All the information normally found in a library or messages Individual normally found on a bulletin board . c) A computer and a telephone (line). d) With a bulletin board on the Internet , a great number of people (over 20 million) can get access to the bulletin and exchange information quickly. Remember and complete - Have them copy. Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m): 1. Learn by heart new words and write two line for each one . 2. Prepare for the next lesson Unit 15 : Write. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching. UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 4 : Write A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - on how to use the printer and complete a flow chart and get Ss to practice in writing instructions write a set on instructions. B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Teacher corrects and give them marks. (291).

(292) 3. New lesson (39 ms) Teacher’s activities Warm up ( 5ms): * Wordsquare - Put the word square chart on the board . - Inform the topic and the number of the hidden words . ( Words related to a computer ). Students’ activities Play game. - Ask Ss to write the words they find out on a piece of paper and Group work students hand in offer they finish their work.. C N E E R C S K O U T P U T P E M O N I T O R Y P A E N O C I B U H B C D E N O T R A Y O P T A E S U O M G E R R I P O W E R D - Give feedbcack and correct Pre-writing (10 ms) : Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to students 1. Pre-teach : => Use the picture / 142 to elicit words from Ss . - paper input tray - power button ( Picture ) - icon - output path - to remove = to put sth way + Have ss copy  Checking vocabulary : Matching - Ask Ss to look at exercise 1 / 142 and do the matching . - Get some Ss to give their answers and correct . Answer Key : a) 3 b) 1 c) 6 d) 2 e) 4 ) 5 2. Gap fill - Get Ss to make use of some phrasal verbs . - Put the words on the board and ask Ss to fill in the gaps with right words if possible . 1. to wait ...so/sth 2. to remove ... sth 3. to turn ... a machine 4. to plug ... sth 5. to load ... sth - Ask some Ss to give their answers and correct . Answer Key : a) 3 b) 1 c) 6 d) 2 e) 4 f) 5 Answer Key (292). Listen and repeat Copy down. Match. Copy down Fill in the gap. Pay attention. of. 4/5.

(293) 1. to wait for (so / sth ) 2. to remove  (sth) 3. to turn on / off ( a machine ) 4. to plug in sth 5. to load  ( sth ) While -writing ( 15 ms): - Ask Ss to look at the pictures / 143 and read the cues . - Have Ss work in pairs to outline the instructions - Call on some Ss to say out the instructions first ( 1 or 2 Ss for each sentence ) - Ask Ss to write the instructions in their note books Post - writing ( 6 ms): - Have some Ss read their writings before the class . - Give feedback and correct . Answer Key : Plug in the printer and turn on the power . Remove the old paper and load the new paper in the paper input tray . Wait for power button to flash Have the pages appear on the computer screen Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few seconds . The printed - paper will get out from the output path in a minute . Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson. Homework ( 1m) : 1. Learn by heart new word and write two line for each one . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Unit 15: Language focus. Period : date: ...................................... Week : date: ........................................ Preparing Teaching. UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 5: Language focus A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to : - use “ yet “ and “ already “ to express the present perfect . B/ Language contents: 1. Vocabulary : (293). Copy down. Pairwork write the instructions read their writings. Copy down. Retell the main points. Do exercises at home.

(294) 2. Grammar : 3. Language skills: Listening , speaking, reading and writing C/ Techniques : pairwork , groupwork E/ Teaching aids textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard E/ Procedures: 1.Class organization ( 1m): -Greeting and checking attendance. 2. Checking up ( 5ms): - Teacher corrects and give them marks. 3. New lesson (39 ms) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up ( 5ms): Lucky number ( Consolidation of Tenses ) - Write 10 numbers on the board ( 1 to 10 ) - Tell Ss each number is for a question but 3 of them are lucky Play game numbers . IF Ss choose a lucky number , they do not have to answer any question but they will get 2 points and they can Team work choose another number . - Divide the class into 2 teams. Questions 1. What does your father do ? 2. What did you do last night ? 3. Lucky number 4. How often is Hue Festival held ? Answer questions 5. Lucky number 6. What were you doing at 8 o,clock last night ? 7. Guess what your parents are doing at the moment ? 8. Who often cooks in your family ? 9. Which grade will you be in next school year ? 10.Lucky number .  Lead in the new lesson . Language focus 1,2 ( 15 ms) 1. Presentation : a) Set the scene “ Ba, mother has just been back from market . Pay attention She wanted him to do some housework while she was at the market . Ba made notes in his diary and checked (v) the work he has done . Look at Ba, diary “ - Show the chart ( Ba,s diary ) on the board + Do homework (v) -> ( already ) Listen and repeat + Tidy the room (v) x ( not yet ) + Turn off the washing machine (v) -> ( already ) + Call and tell Aunt Le to have lunch (v) -> ( already ) Copy down - Ask questions and elicit the answers from Ss . T : Has Ba done his homework yet ? S : Yes , he has already done his homework . T : Has Ba tidied the room yet ? S : No, he has not tidied the room yet . - Have Ss repeat and write the sentences on the board . repeat and write the => Present perfect with Yet and already sentences on the board (294).

(295) - Yet : used in questions and negative statements - Already : used in positive statements + Yet : at the end of the sentence . + Already : between auxiliary have and past participle - Have Ss copy . 2 Practice : Gap fill Dialogue - Ask Ss to look at Ba,s diary and complete the dialogue using Yet and Already - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue for the class . - Give feedback and correct . 3. Production : Language focus 2 Questions - Answers - Ask Ss to look at the flight information tables and ask questions to show the models . T : Has the flight to Vientiane departed yet ? S : Yes , it has not arrived yet . T : Has the flight from Los Angeles arrived yet ? S : No , it has not arrived yet . - Have ss take in turns to ask and answer the questions . - Call on some Ss to demonstrate the exchanges in front of the class - Give feedback and correct . Language focus 3 ( 8 ms): 1. Presentation : a) Pre teach : Set the scene :  Use Vietnamese to elicit the models : 1. I have ever been to Da Lat -> ( finished ) 2. My parents have gone to DaLat for 3 days -> ( incomplete ) => Present perfect tense Use : - finished actions -> indefinite time - incomplete actions -> for , since , recently Form : Have / has + Past participle - Get Ss to copy . 2. Practice : Grammar Drill - Ask ss to look at the table / 146 , read the sentences and check (v) the correct column . - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Give feedback and correct Finished Incomplete action action a) I have been to SaPa highlands . v b) They have lived in Ca Mau for v 10 years . c). She has finished her homework . v d) She has worked with the v computer since early morning. (295). Teacher. look at Ba,s diary and complete the dialogue demonstrate the dialogue. Ask questions Whole class ask and questions. answer. Whole class. Pay attention. read the sentences Pair work. Whole class. the.

(296) e) We have found the troubles of v the printer . f) Someone has unplugged the v printer . g) People have received information through the internet recently .. v. Language focus 4 ( 8 ms) 1. Presentation : * Revision - Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the sentences . - Ask Ss to decide which sentence is in the present perfect and which is past simple . a) Her family moved to Hanoi 2 years ago . b) He has never met such an intelligent boy before . c) My brother has become more independent sine he left home d) When did the Second world war break out ? - Call on Ss to give their answers . - Give feedback and correct . a) Past simple -> Finished action with definite time . b) Present perfect -> an action ( not ) taking place from the past to the present . c) Has become : Present perfect -> ( same as b) Left : Past simple -> finished action with understood defitine time . d) Past simple -> ( same as a) 2. Practice : Grammar Drill - Ask Ss to complete the dialogues orally . - Call on some pairs to give their answers . - Give feedback and correct . - Have some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues for the class . * Answer key : Ba : Have you seen the film Jurassic Park yet ? Nam : Yes , I have . Ba : When did you see it ? Nam : I saw it three months ago . Loan : We have not had a vacation since last year . Chi : why not ? Loan : My parents have been very busy since then . Nga : Have you heard the news about Nam ? Mai : No . What happened ? Nga : He had an accident . He was jogging . He suddenly fell and broke his leg . Sung : Have the plane arrived yet ? Clerk : Yes , it has . Sung : When did it arrive ? (296). read the sentences. Do exercise. complete the dialogues orally demonstrate dialogues. Copy down Pair work. Individual write 4 sentences. the.

(297) Clerk : It arrived at the airport two hours ago . 3. Production : Writing - Ask Ss to write 4 sentences of their own 2 in the past simple and 2 in the present perfect . - Have some of them write their sentences on the board for public check and give them points if possible Retell the main points Consolidation ( 2ms) - Retell the main points of the lesson Homework ( 1m): 1. Learn by hear all the structures and make some sentences with Copy down the sentences them . 2. Do the exercises in the work book . 3. Prepare the next lesson .. Preparing: 4/5/2009 Teaching: 5/4/2009 consolidation Period 101, 102,103 A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they have learnt in the second semester . B / Teaching aids : Cardboards , posters ... C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities =.> Introduce the contents of the lesson to students Teacher I / Grammar : 1/ Câu bị động Câu bị động đợc sử dụng nhằm để nhấn mạnh vào hành động của tân ngữ chứ không nhấn mạnh vào hành động Teacher – Ss của chủ ngữ trong câu chủ động. be + P2 Phơng pháp chuyển đổi từ câu chủ động sang câu bị Whole class động. - Đa tân ngữ của câu chủ động lên làm chủ ngữ. Trong trờng hợp nếu có 2 tân ngữ ( 1 trực tiếp, 1 gián tiếp), muốn Teacher nhÊn m¹nh vµo t©n ng÷ nµo th× ngêi ta ®a nã lªn lµm chñ ng÷ ( nhng thßng lµ t©n ng÷ gi¸n tiÕp lµm chñ ng÷). (297).

(298) VÝ dô: I gave him a book. hay I gave a book to him. Trong c©u nµy book lµ t©n ng÷ trùc tiÕp, him lµ t©n ng÷ gián tiếp, ta đổi: He was given a book by me. - Thời của động từ ở câu bị động phải tuân theo thời của động từ ở câu chủ động. - Đặt by + tân ngữ mới đằng sau tất cả các tân ngữ khác. - to be made, to be made of đợc làm bằng - chỉ một vật đợc lµm b»ng 1 thø nguyªn vËt liÖu. This table is made of wood. - to be made from: đợc làm bằng - chỉ một vật đợc làm b»ng 2 thø nguyªn vËt liÖu trë lªn. - to be made out of: đợc làm bằng ( dùng cho thực phẩm) This cake is made out of flour, egg, butter and sugar. - Mọi biến đổi về thời và thể đều nhằm vào động từ to be, cßn ph©n tõ 2 gi÷ nguyªn (xem c¸c c«ng thøc díi ®©y.) Simple present hay simple past am is are + [verb in past participle] was were Chủ động : Hurricanes destroy a great deal of property each year. Subject. present. Teacher – Ss. Whole class. Teacher. Teacher – Ss. Whole class. complement. Bị động : A great deal of property is destroyed by hurricanes each year. Teacher singular subject. be past participle. Chủ động : The tornado destroyed thirty houses. Subject. past. complement. Bi động : Thirty houses were destroyed by the tornado. plural subject. be. past participle. present progressive hay Past progressive am is are + being + [verb in past participle] was (298). Teacher – Ss. Whole class.

(299) were Chủ động : The committee is considering several new proposals. Subject. present progressive. complement. Bị động : Several new proposals are being considered by the committee. plural. subject. auxiliary. be. past participle. Chủ động : The committee was considering several new proposals. Subject. past progressive. complement. Bị động : Several new proposals were being considered by Teacher the committee. plural subject be. auxiliary. past participle. present perfect hay Past perfect has have + been + [verb in past participle] had Chủ động: The company has ordered some new equipment. subject. present perfect. Teacher – Ss. Whole class. complement. Bị động : Some new equipment has been ordered by the company. Singular subject. auxiliary. be past participle. Chủ động : The company had ordered some new equipment before the strike began. subject. past perfect. complement. Teacher. Bị động : Some new equipment had been ordered by the company before the strike began. Singular subject. auxiliary be. past participle. Teacher – Ss. §éng tõ khiÕm khuyÕt (modal) modal + be + [ verb in past participle] Chủ động : The manager should sign these contracts today. Subject. modal + verb. complement. Bị động : These contracts should be signed by the manager today. Subject. modal. be past participle. modal + perfect (299). Whole class.

(300) modal + have + been + [ verb in past participle] Chủ động: Somebody should have called the president this morning. Subject. modal + perfect. complement. Bị động : The president should have been called this morning. 2/ MÖnh lÖnh thøc trùc tiÕp. MÖnh lÖnh thøc trùc tiÕp lµ c©u mµ mét ng êi ra lÖnh cho một ngời khác làm việc gì đó. Nó có thể có please đi tr ớc. Teacher Chủ ngữ đợc hiểu là you. Sử dụng dạng đơn giản của động tõ (Nguyªn thÓ bá to). EX: Close the door. Open the window. Leave the room. Pay your rent. Please turn off the light. Be quiet. Teacher – Ss Dạng mệnh lệnh thức phủ định đợc thành lập nhờ cộng thêm don’t trớc động từ. Don’t close the door. Whole class Please don’t turn off the light. Don’t open the window, please. MÖnh lÖnh thøc gi¸n tiÕp. Thờng dùng với 4 động từ sau: to order to ask sb to do sth to tell ( not to do sth ) to say ex: John told Mary to close the door. Jack asked Jill to turn off the light. The teacher told Christopher to open the window. Please tell Jaime to leave the room. John ordered Bill to close his book. The policeman ordered the suspect to be quiet. Lu ý: §u«i cña Let’s ...., shall we. Ex: Let’s go out for lunch, shall we? Kh¸c víi let us trong c©u mÖnh lÖnh thøc. VÝ dô: Let’s go now (chóng ta ®i th«i) kh¸c víi Let us go, Teacher please. ( xin hãy để cho chúng tôi đi) II / Exercises : - Ask ss to do the exercises : 1. The exercises in the workbook : Ex 1/96 Ex 2 / 96 Ex 6 / 94 Teacher – Ss (300).

(301) 2. Practical Workbook : Ex II / 189 - Call on some Ss to to go the board to write them . - Correct and give feedback . III/ Homework : 1. Redo the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Ask ss to review to prepare the test .. Period 104. Whole class Individual Whole class. The second semester test. A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to do the test well . B / Teaching aids : Paper teat C / Procedure : - Deliver the paper test to Students . - Observe the class and draw the paper test I / Fill in each gap with one word or phrase given in brackets to complete each sentence : ( 2,5 ps ) 1. She has not finished the letter ............ ( already , just , yet , never ) 2. The boy is not ........... to lift the suitcase. ( enough strong , strong enough , too strong , so strong ) 3. Lan is studying hard .......... pass the final exam . ( for , in order to , so to , as to ) 4. It is too cold outside . Would you mind ......... the window ? ( to close , close , closing , closed ) (301).

(302) 5. Would you like to go to the movies tonight ? - Sorry , I can not . I ............ my homework this evening . ( am doing , do , will do , doing ) 6. I am happy ........... all the exams . ( passing , to pass , pass , passed ) 7. The teacher .............to the headmaster is in charge of my class . ( talks , is talking , talking , to talk ) 8. The bike ............ in Japan is US$ 100 . ( making , made , is making , to make ) 9. We .............. dinner when the phone rang . ( are having , had , have had , were having ) 10. He said ( that ) he ........... for a car company . ( worked , works , is working , has worked ) II / Complete the questions of the conversation : ( 2,5 ps ) Hoa : Hello . My name is Hoa . What is your name ? Tom : Hi . My name is Tom . Hoa : ...................................(1) ............................ ? Tom : I come from Australia . Hoa : ..................................(2) ...............................? Tom : I am studying Vietnamese . Hoa : ..................................( 3) ..............................? Tom : I have learnt it since last summer . Hoa : ..................................(4 ) ................................? Tom : I am having my final exams in June next year . Hoa : ..................................(5) ................................? Tom : Going to the movies tonight ? I am afraid I can not . I am doing my homework . Hoa: Another time perhaps . Good luck to you , Tom . Tom : Thanks a lot , Hoa . III / Read the passage . Then answer the questions below : ( 3, 0 ps ) Ha long – Bay of the Descending Dragon – is popular with both Vietnamese and international tourists . One of the attractions of Ha Long is the Bay ,s calm water with limestone mountains . The Bay,s water is clear during the spring and early summer . Upon arriving in Ha Long City , visitors can go along Chay Beach . From the beach , they can hire a boat and go out to the Bay . It is here that the visitors can find some of Southeast Asia,s most beautiful sites . Dau Go Cave is one of the most beautiful caves at Ha Long . It was the cave in which General Tran Hung Dao hid wooden stakes to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288. 1. Who is Ha Long popular with ? ............................................................................................................................... 2. What is one of the attractions of Ha Long ? ................................................................................................................................ 3. What is the Bay , s water like ? .............................................................................................................................. 4. What can visitors do when they arrive in Ha Long City ? ............................................................................................................................... 5. Which is one of the most beautiful caves at Ha Long ? ............................................................................................................................. 6. Where did General Tran Hung Dao hide wooden stakes to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288 ? (302).

(303) .............................................................................................................................. IV / Listen . You are going to listen to LiLy talking about herself . You are going to listen twice . Check ( v) the correct box for True or False ( 2,0 ps ) Num Statements True 1 English is important to her as she will need it for her future job . 2 LiLy comes from China . 3 She started learning English when she was eighteen . 4 She had a problem with listening . 5 She can understand people when they speak fast . 6 She does not find English difficult to learn . 7 She wants to be an English teacher . 8 She loves English songs , but she does not hope to become a singer .. False. Answer Key : I / 2,5 ps : each right sentence is 0,25 ps 1. yet 2. strong enough 3. in order to 4. closing 5. am doing 6. to pass 7 talking 8. made 9. were having 10. worked II / 2,5 ps : each correct sentence is 0,5 ps 1. Where do you come from ? 2. What are you doing in Vietnam ? / What are you learning in Vietnam ? 3. How long have learnt it ? 4. When are you having your final exams ? 5. Would you like to go the movies tonight ?. III / 3,0 ps : each correct sentence is 0,5 ps 1. Ha long is popular with both Vietnamese and international tourists. 2. One of the attractions of Ha Long is the bay,s calm water with limestone mountains . 3. The Bay,s water is clear during the spring and early summer . 4. They can go along Chay Beach , from the beach , they can hire a boat and go out to the Bay . They can find some of Southeast Asia,s most beautiful sites . 5. One of the most beautiful caves at ha long is Dau Go 6. General Tran Hung Dao hid wooden stakes in Dau Go cave to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288. IV / 2,0 ps : each correct sentence is 0,25 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. T 6. F 7. T 8. F (303).

(304) Tape script : Hi ! My name is Lily . I come from China . I am a student , a university student . I am eighteen years old . I am studying English as a foreign language . English is important to me because I will need it for my job in the future . I began learning English when I was very young – at the age of eight . I think that my biggest problem is listening . People speak very quickly , so I can not understand them . English is really hard for me to learn , but I like it . I want to be an English teacher ; or I hope to become a singer one day because I love English songs very much . The End. Period 105. Ch÷a bµi kiÓm tra. I. Objective: By the end of the lesson. SS will be able to undersand exam and can using all grammar easy. II. Procedure: T SS 1. Warm-up: T call some ss on the board repeat old - repeat lesson and write do exercise 2. Pre – exam: T call some ss on the board made - Listen exercise 1.2.4 T call some is nhËn xÐt and so s¸nh bµi lµm. 3. While – exam: T gi¶i thÝch c¸ch lµm vµ híng dÉn c¸c Listen em lÇn sau lµm bµi cho tèt. T give right answer 4. Homework: T ark ss at home learn and do exercise. - Write - listen (304).

(305)

Giao an

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về